You are on page 1of 328

3—Project Editor

3

Project Editor
Network models are based on three types of objects: subnetworks, nodes, and links. You work with these objects in the Project Editor. The Project Editor provides the resources needed to model all high-level components of a real-world network. Using Project Editor operations, you can: • create and edit network models • create derived models of nodes and links • customize the network environment • run simulations • choose and analyze simulation results The Project Editor contains a workspace for creating and editing network models. Subnetworks and nodes are placed in the workspace as objects and depicted there as icons. Other objects, depicted as connecting lines, represent communication links between the nodes and subnetworks. Network objects are characterized by attributes that control how they behave within the overall model. The Project Editor provides extensive operations for viewing and editing these attributes.

Menus
The Project Editor provides many operations for creating and working with network models. You access these operations from the Project Editor menu bar.
Table 3-1 Projector Editor
Menu File Description Contains operations that relate to high-level functions such as opening and closing projects, saving scenarios, importing models, and printing graphics and reports Contains operations that allow you to edit the preferences that control program operation and to manipulate text and objects Contains operations that affect the appearance of the editor window and its contents Contains operations that provide control over the scenarios included in a project Reference File Menu on page ER-2-2

Edit

Edit Menu on page ER-2-5

View

View Menu on page ER-3-4

Scenarios

Scenarios Menu on page ER-3-9

Modeler/Release 14.0 www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

ER-3-1

3—Project Editor

Table 3-1 Projector Editor (Continued)
Menu Topology Description Contains operations related to network topology, including building a network and creating network objects Contains operations related to specifying the traffic on a network, including importing traffic files and specifying routing across the network Contains operations related to modeling services. Contains operations related to the protocol models of the standard and specialized model libraries Contains operations for configuring and running discrete event simulations Lists all open editor windows and allows you to make one active Provides access to context-sensitive help, the product documentation and tutorials, and information about the program Reference Topology Menu on page ER-3-12

Traffic

Traffic Menu on page ER-3-16

Services

Services on page ER-3-198

Protocols

Protocols Menu on page ER-3-20

DES

DES Menu on page ER-3-22

Windows

Windows Menu on page ER-2-7 Help Menu on page ER-2-8

Help

End of Table 3-1

The editor menus on your machine may vary from those described here, particularly if there has been any UI customization or use of ETS. Also, there may be additional menus with commands used by various optional modules. These menus are described in the corresponding module documentation.

ER-3-2 www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Modeler/Release 14.0

3—Project Editor

In addition to the menu bar menus, pop-up menus are available within the Project Editor:
Table 3-2 Project Editor Pop-Up Menus
Menu Workspace Description Contains operations related to setting the workspace view, collecting results, and viewing results Contains operations related to setting object properties, collecting results, and viewing results Contains operations related to a particular statistic Contains operations related to the appearance and content of an analysis panel Contains operations related to the appearance and content of a graph Reference Workspace Pop-Up Menu on page ER-3-25

Object

Object Pop-Up Menu on page ER-3-26

Statistic

Statistic Pop-Up Menu on page ER-3-29 Panel Pop-Up Menu on page ER-3-30

Panel

Graph

Graph Pop-Up Menu on page ER-3-30

End of Table 3-2

There are operations available within the Project Editor that do not appear on a menu:
Table 3-3 Miscellaneous Operations
Operation Display Subnet View Description Moves you down in the network hierarchy by displaying the contents of a subnetwork when you double-click on the subnet’s icon. Automatically opens the corresponding node model when you double-click on a network node. Magnifies a selected part of an analysis panel by dragging the cursor across it. After this operation, the selected area fills the panel. You can also use <Control>+z and <Control>+u to zoom into and out from the center of the panel. In an analysis panel, this operation shifts the display along the horizontal axis when you press the left-arrow or right-arrow keys. (Not available when the full horizontal scale is displayed.)

Open Node Model

Zoom Panel

Pan Panel

End of Table 3-3

The following sections list the items in the Project Editor menus and give a reference to where you can get more information about each operation. • View Menu on page ER-3-4
Modeler/Release 14.0 www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete ER-3-3

3—Project Editor

• Scenarios Menu on page ER-3-9 • Topology Menu on page ER-3-12 • Services Menu on page ER-3-19 • DES Menu on page ER-3-22 • Pop-Up Menus on page ER-3-25 The standard File, Edit, Windows, and Help menus are described in Chapter 2 System Menus on page ER-2-1.

View Menu
The View menu includes operations that affect the appearance of the editor window and its contents.
Table 3-4 View Menu Summary
Menu item Show Network Browser Description Opens/closes the Network Browser pane in the left side of the Project Editor window. Toggles the display of the network topology pane. Toggles the display of the network showcase pane. Reference Show Network Browser on page ER-3-62 — Accessing the Network Showcase Interface on page ER-3-74 Displaying a Showcase in a Floating Window on page ER-3-77 Show Bird’s-Eye View on page ER-3-60 Show Time Controller on page ER-3-90

Show Network Topology Show Network Showcase

Open Network Showcase Window

Displays the active showcase in a floating window.

Show Bird’s-eye View

Open Bird’s-eye View, which enables you to find a desirable zoom level quickly. Shows the Time Controller window, which enables you to see the effects of time on time-varying data.

Show Time Controller

ER-3-4 www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Modeler/Release 14.0

3—Project Editor

Table 3-4 View Menu Summary (Continued)
Menu item Background > Set Properties… Sets the appearance of a subnetwork, including its coordinate system, grid, and display layers. Imports an outline map of a geographic area into the workspace, providing a graphic frame of reference for a network. Imports a bit-mapped graphic of a geographic area into the workspace, providing a graphic frame of reference for a network. Imports a map in MIF format into the workspace. MIF is a common format for maps of roads, political boundaries, and other data. Imports a bit-mapped image of a small area such as a floor plan into the workspace, providing a graphic frame of reference for a network. Specifies directories that store raster data in CADRG or CIB format. (TMM functionality only) Toggles map edit mode for image maps and background images: In this mode, you can: • Cut, copy, or paste • Modify the size • Modify the location Show Maps in Subnet Edit Display Preferences… Toggles display of image maps and background images. Set display preferences for nodes (icons/balloons/labels), links (arrowheads/labels), demands (labels), and paths (labels). Redraws the Project Editor workspace to ensure that it shows the current network state. — — Set Background Properties on page ER-3-57 Set Border Map… on page ER-3-34 Description Reference

Set Border Map…

Add Image Map…

Add Image Map… on page ER-3-34

Add MIF Map…

Add MIF Map… on page ER-3-37

Add Image…

Add Image… on page ER-3-38

Add CADRG/CIB Raster Directories…

Displaying CADRG and CIB Maps on page TMM-2-16

Map Edit Mode

Map Edit Mode on page ER-3-40

Refresh Workspace

Modeler/Release 14.0 www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

ER-3-5

3—Project Editor

Table 3-4 View Menu Summary (Continued)
Menu item Layout > Automatic Icon Scaling Turn automatic icon scaling on/off. Automatic Icon Scaling on page ER-3-45 Automatic Label Placement on page ER-3-45 Scale Node Icons Interactively on page ER-3-45 Lay Out Nodes Interactively on page ER-3-49 Lay Out Nodes (Balanced) on page ER-3-50 Lay Out Nodes (Simple) on page ER-3-50 Core-Centric Layout on page ER-3-52 Description Reference

Automatic Label Placement

Turn automatic label placement on/off

Scale Node Icons Interactively... Lay Out Nodes Interactively... Lay Out Nodes (Balanced)

Set the icon size for nodes, subnets, and utility objects.

Change the layout of nodes in the Project Editor workspace to improve visual clarity on the screen Apply an internal algorithm to produce a “reasonable” network layout Apply a simple, but fast algorithm to produce a “reasonable” network layout Applies core-centric layout to the current subnet. The layout places core nodes in the center. all other nodes are placed around the core nodes based on their quantity of links. Toggles between geographic positioning and logical positioning modes. If geographic positioning is disabled, network object arranges object according to the logical layout defined in the current network view.

Lay Out Nodes (Simple)

Lay Out Notes (Core Centric)…

Geographic Positioning

Geographic Positioning on page ER-3-47

Zoom > To Rectangle Allows you to drag a rectangle that demarcates the region to display. Zooms the view so all selected objects are displayed. To Rectangle on page ER-3-95 To Selection on page ER-3-95 To Window on page ER-3-95 Unzoom on page ER-3-95

To Selection

To Window Unzoom Subnets > Go To Parent Subnet

Displays all objects in the current network or subnetwork. Restores the previous zoom level.

Changes the view in the workspace to the contents of the next higher subnetwork. Displays contents of selected subnets in the current (parent) subnet. Hides contents of selected subnets.

Go to Parent Subnetwork on page ER-3-45 Expand Selected Subnets on page ER-3-44 Collapse Selected Subnets on page ER-3-42

Expand Selected Subnets

Collapse Selected Subnets

ER-3-6 www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Modeler/Release 14.0

if tort to your rights.please inform us. Clear All Deletes all balloons in the network. — Show all paths.com The document is for study only. (Wireless module only) Show all domains. Hide all paths. — — Show all links. Hide all links. Hide all demands. — — — — Modeler/Release 14. The setting is saved with the model. The setting you specify is on a per-subnet basis.3—Project Editor Table 3-4 View Menu Summary (Continued) Menu item Links > Show All Hide All Demands > Show All Hide All Paths > Show All Hide All Wireless Domains > Show All Hide All Annotations > Show in Subnet Toggles display of annotations. You can hide annotations in one subnet and show them in another. Minimizes all balloons in the network Note—The size of minimized balloons is set in the Edit Visualization Preferences dialog box (View > Edit Display Preferences). — — — — Show all demands. Hide all domains.cadfamily.we will delete ER-3-7 . Hides all balloons in the network.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.0 www. Description Reference Show All/Hide All Links on page ER-3-58 Balloons > Show All Hide All Minimize All Displays all balloons in the network.

3—Project Editor

Table 3-4 View Menu Summary (Continued)
Menu item Visualize Protocol Configuration > IP Interface Status Shows whether the connected interface is active or shutdown. Shows the routing protocols that are configured on the router interfaces. Select one of the following from the submenu: • IPv4 Routing Protocols • IPV6 Routing Protocols IP QoS Configuration IP Security Configuration Shows the IP QoS configuration on the links. Shows the packet filtering security configured on the links. Adds colored path objects to the workspace to represent the IP tunnels configured in the network. Shows the BGP peering (neighbor) relationships in the network. Shows the OSPF areas configured on the router interfaces. Shows which ATM routing protocols that are configured on the switch ports. Shows the VLANs configured in the network. Removes all protocol configuration visualizations from the workspace. — — IP Interface Status on page ER-3-92 IP Routing Domains on page ER-3-93 Description Reference

IP Routing Domains

IP Tunnel Configuration

BGP Peers

BGP Peers on page ER-3-93

OSPF Area Configuration…

OSPF Area Configuration on page ER-3-93 —

ATM Routing Domains

VLAN Configuration… Clear Visualization

— —

Visualize Network Configuration > Link Datarate Link Technology Clear Visualization Removes all network configuration visualizations from the workspace.

ER-3-8 www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Modeler/Release 14.0

3—Project Editor

Table 3-4 View Menu Summary (Continued)
Menu item Visualize Link Loads > Description Reference Visualize Link Loads on page ER-3-91 Configures the thresholds used in the utilization and throughput visualization on links. Colors the links in the workspace according to the last utilization and throughput values configured in the Background Load attribute on the link. Removes load visualization. Show/hide the window that shows utilization and throughput thresholds Apply a network view to the current subnet —

Settings…

Color by Link Load...

Color by Link Load on page ER-3-43

Clear Visualization Show Legend

— —

Set View for Subnet >

Set View for Subnet/Network on page ER-3-55 Set View for Subnet/Network on page ER-3-55

Set View for Network >

Apply a network view to the current network (all subnets)

End of Table 3-4

Scenarios Menu
The Scenarios menu includes operations that provide control over the scenarios included in a project.
Table 3-5 Scenarios Menu Summary
Menu item New Scenario… Description Creates a new scenario within the current project. Reference New Scenario on page ER-3-105 Duplicate Scenario on page ER-3-97 Manage Scenarios on page ER-3-103 — — Switch To Scenario on page ER-3-108

Duplicate Scenario…

Creates a copy of the current scenario.

Manage Scenarios…

Allows you to delete, rename, and control various aspects of scenarios in the current project. Switch to next scenario in project. Switch to previous scenario in project. Switches the editor window to the selected open scenario.

Previous Scenario Next Scenario Switch To Scenario

Modeler/Release 14.0 www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

ER-3-9

3—Project Editor

Table 3-5 Scenarios Menu Summary (Continued)
Menu item Scenario Components > Import… Imports a selected element, such as a network model, custom model list, or results file. Places a copy of a specific element (such as a network model, custom model list, or results file) in your primary model directory. Import… on page ER-3-106 Description Reference

Export…

Export… on page ER-3-107

User-Defined Reports > Open Live Report Table... Generate Report from Template... Generate Report… Generates a report that lists objects and attribute values of interest. Define the objects and attributes include in a report table. Network Difference Reports on page MC-16-21 User-Defined Reports on page MC-16-18

Define Report…

Network Difference Report Generate Report… Generate a network difference report that compares the network protocols and device configurations between two network model scenarios. Opens the most recently generated report. Network Difference Reports on page MC-16-21

Launch Last Web Report Object/Attribute Difference Report > Generate Report...

Generate a report that shows the differences between two scenarios. Specify the objects and attributes to consider for the difference report. View the last generated difference report.

Object/Attribute Difference Reports on page MC-16-28 Object/Attribute Difference Reports on page MC-16-28 Object/Attribute Difference Reports on page MC-16-28 Object/Attribute Difference Reports on page MC-16-28

Define Report

View Last Report

Launch Last Web Report

View the last generated web report.

ER-3-10 www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Modeler/Release 14.0

3—Project Editor

Table 3-5 Scenarios Menu Summary (Continued)
Menu item Live Object/Attribute Difference > Specify Behavior Specifies the criteria used to define object/attribute difference. Description Reference Live Object/Attribute Differences on page ER-3-98 Specify Live Object/Attribute Behavior Dialog Box on page ER-3-102 —

Stop Comparing

Turn off Live Difference mode and clear all difference visualizations from the Project Editor window. Specifies global settings for Live Object/Attribute Difference. Specifies whether to display the legend that appears in the lower-left corner of the workspace while Live Object/Attribute Differences is active. The legend describes the active tracking mode and meaning of each icon used to mark the various network object. Note—This operation sets the network_diff.suppress_live_legend preference.

Global Preferences >

Suppress Legend

Use Icons in Workspace and Browser Use Icons in WorkspaceOnly Use Icons in Browser Only Set Default Behavior File

Specifies where to use the icons for Live Object/Attribute Differences. Note—This operation sets the network_diff.live_icon_use preference.

Specifies the default specification file for Live Object/Attribute Differences behavior. Note—This operation sets the network_diff.default_live_spec preference.

Select Objects with Differences Select Objects Only In This Network Reconcile Selected Object Differences Track Changes from Object Defaults Track Changes from Last Save Track Changes from Now

Select all objects, in all subnets, that are marked as changed.

Live Object/Attribute Difference Operations on page ER-3-101

Reconcile differences for all selected objects that have counterparts in the reference scenario. Track all attribute settings that differ from the creation defaults for an object. Track past changes in the current scenario (since the last time the project was saved). Track future changes in the current scenario.

Live Object/Attribute Difference Operations on page ER-3-101 Object Differences on page ER-3-100 Live Object/Attribute Difference Operations on page ER-3-101 Live Object/Attribute Difference Operations on page ER-3-101

Modeler/Release 14.0 www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

ER-3-11

3—Project Editor

Table 3-5 Scenarios Menu Summary (Continued)
Menu item Compare to Network Description Compare the current scenario to a scenario in a different project. Compare the current scenario to a scenario in the same project. Select objects that are unique to the current scenario and do not have counterparts in the reference scenario. Exports a graphic representation of the complete model that can be read by a browser. Exports a bitmap representation of the model displayed in the active window. Reference Live Object/Attribute Difference Operations on page ER-3-101 Live Object/Attribute Difference Operations on page ER-3-101 Live Object/Attribute Difference Operations on page ER-3-101 Generate Scenario Web Report… on page ER-3-98 Generate Scenario Bitmap… on page ER-3-97

Compare to Scenario: <scenario_name> Select Objects without Counterparts Generate Scenario Web Report… Generate Scenario Bitmap…

End of Table 3-5

Topology Menu
The Topology menu includes operations related to network topology, including building a network and creating network objects.
Table 3-6 Topology Menu Summary
Menu item Open Object Palette Description Opens a palette of model icons for creating subnetworks, nodes, and links. Add objects that call attention to or label other model elements. Creates subnets, defines the nodes included in subnets, and moves nodes to a subnet. Reference Open Object Palette on page ER-3-161 Open Annotation Palette on page ER-3-158 Creating Subnetworks on page ER-3-120 Creating and Populating Geographic Subnets on page ER-3-122 Group Nodes into Subnets on page ER-3-132

Open Annotation Palette

Subnets

ER-3-12 www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Modeler/Release 14.0

3—Project Editor

Table 3-6 Topology Menu Summary (Continued)
Menu item Import Topology > From Device Configurations… Imports network topology from router configuration files. (eXpress Data Import functionality only) Imports network topology from VNE Server. Performing an Import with DCI on page XDI-2-20 Description Reference

From VNE Server…

Import from VNE Server on page MC-13-13

From Circuit Switch Text Files...

Imports network topology from Promina files for the nodes, links, and circuits in the network. Imports network topology from ACE. (ACE functionality only) Discrete Event Simulations Using ACE on page ITGSP-1-1 ATM Text File Imports on page MC-13-3 XML Topology Exports and Imports on page MC-13-115 Using the Import Log on page MC-13-116 Using the Import Log on page MC-13-116

From ACE…

From ATM Text files

Imports network topology from ATM text files, with optional conversion from WANDL format. Imports a network topology from an XML file.

From XML File…

Open Import Log

Opens an edit pad with information about imports into the current scenario. Clears all entries in the current scenario’s import log.

Clear Import Log

Export Topology > To EMA… generate EMA C code from model. To EMA… on page ER-3-117 To Spreadsheet… on page ER-3-117 To Visio… on page ER-3-118

To Spreadsheet…

Exports a text description of the objects in a model that can be opened in a spreadsheet application. Creates Visio .vdx (Visio XML drawing) format files that can be viewed and edited in Visio 2003.

To Visio.…

Modeler/Release 14.0 www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

ER-3-13

Exports network data to an XML file. subnets.. and so on. Creates custom router. switch.cadfamily. Save Current Topology to File. Model Assistant > Edit File… Create a new model assistant file or edit an existing file Apply an existing model assistant file to the network Model Assistant on page ER-3-148 Model Assistant on page ER-3-148 — Subnet Hierarchy to VNE Server as Groups on page ER-3-118 Reference Network Whiteboard Editor on page ER-4-1 XML Topology Exports and Imports on page MC-13-115 To XML… Apply File… Open Error Log.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. bridge.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. Create Custom Device Model… — Create Custom Device Model on page ER-3-109 Rapid Configuration on page ER-3-180 Rapid Configuration… Delete Unconnected Nodes… Terrain > — Chapter 2 Using Terrain Modeling Module on page TMM-2-1 3DNV > Display 3D Network View Visualizing a Network Scenario in 3D Network Visualizer on page AV-5-7 ER-3-14 www.3—Project Editor Table 3-6 Topology Menu Summary (Continued) Menu item To Network Whiteboard. number of nodes. hub.. and LAN models..please inform us. and user-defined report tables to Network Whiteboard. • Selected Subnets…—exports subnets selected in the project editor to VNE Server groups.if tort to your rights. Save the current scenario to a model assistant file. (TMM functionality only) (3DNV functionality only) Connects the current scenario to 3D Network Visualizer for viewing 3D animation.0 .com The document is for study only. Automatically creates a network model based on your specifications of topology. There are three options: • Entire Network—Export entire network scenario • Current Subnet—Export current subnet only • Selected Objects—Export selected objects only Subnet Hierarchy to VNE Server as Groups Exports subnet hierarchy to VNE Server. Subnets are mapped to VNE Server groups in a one-to-one fashion. vendor-specific. View log messages generated from the last time an MA file was applied to the network.. model types. Two submenu options are available: • Entire Network…—exports all subnets and nodes to groups that contain nodes on VNE Server. Delete all nodes that are not connected This submenu contains operations used with the Terrain Modeling module.… Description Exports specified showcases.

Defines a site trajectory. Applies a mobility profile to selected sites.we will delete ER-3-15 . (Wireless functionality only) Hide Trajectories of Selected Nodes in 3D Visualizer Define Trajectory… Clear Trajectory Assignment.3—Project Editor Table 3-6 Topology Menu Summary (Continued) Menu item Add '3DNV Mapping' Attribute to Selected Nodes Description Adds the 3DNV Mapping extended attribute to one or more nodes or subnetworks.0 www.. Import STK Orbit… Imports an STK orbit file..if tort to your rights.com The document is for study only..cadfamily. Removes a mobility profile from selected sites. Removes the assigned trajectory from all or selected mobile sites. Disables display of trajectories in 3D Network Visualizer for all selected nodes having assigned trajectories. (Wireless functionality only) Verifies that the packet formats and data rates of the transmitter and receiver within the objects match those defined for the link. Using Random Mobility on page WM-2-25 Using Random Mobility on page WM-2-25 Creating Random Trajectories on page WM-2-27 Importing an STK Orbit on page WM-2-22 Verify Links on page ER-3-192 Clear Mobility Profile. Reference Default Modeler/3D Network Vis ualizer Mapping on page AV-5-3 Visualizing Trajectories in 3D Network Visualizer on page AV-5-8 Visualizing Trajectories in 3D Network Visualizer on page AV-5-8 Defining Segment-Based Trajectories on page WM-2-17 — Show Trajectories of Selected Nodes in 3D Visualizer Enables display of trajectories in 3D Network Visualizer for all selected nodes having assigned trajectories.. (Wireless functionality only) Random Mobility > Set Mobility Profile. Set Trajectory Created from Random Mobility… Applies a random trajectory to all or selected sites.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Create shared risk groups and import/export shared-risk-group data files Verify Links… Shared Risk Groups Shared Risk Groups on page ER-3-185 Modeler/Release 14...please inform us.

Marks selected failed node or link as recovered. and links in the current network model. Traffic Menu The Traffic menu contains operations related to specifying the traffic on a network.3—Project Editor Table 3-6 Topology Menu Summary (Continued) Menu item Fail Selected Objects Description Marks selected node or link as failed. Table 3-7 Traffic Menu Summary Menu item Open Traffic Center Description Displays the hierarchical structure of all subnets.0 .com The document is for study only.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Additionally. including importing traffic files and specifying routing across the network. Reference Fail Selected Objects on page ER-3-119 Recover Selected Objects Recover Selected Objects on page ER-3-184 — Recover All Objects End of Table 3-6 Recovers all failed objects in network.if tort to your rights.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. with traffic information. nodes. use the Visualize Operational Status option to show failed network objects due to their membership in a shared risk group.please inform us.cadfamily. Reference Viewing and Editing Traffic in the Traffic Center on page MC-10-20 ER-3-16 www.

Creates and configures a full or partial mesh of voice traffic flows between all or selected nodes in the network.com The document is for study only. (XDI functionality only) Imports traffic from Sniffer. From ACE… Import traffic flows from ACE.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Exports traffic flows to a . (XDI functionality only) Imports traffic from a .we will delete ER-3-17 .cadfamily. Creates and configures a full or partial mesh of IP multicast flows between all or selected nodes in the network.csv file. Create Traffic Flows > IP Multicast Flows IP Multicast Flows on page ER-3-195 Create Traffic Flows > VoIP Flows VoIP Flows on page ER-3-196 Configure Traffic Scaling. Modeler/Release 14.tr2 files. (ACE functionality only) Opens the traffic flow import log..tr1.csv file.if tort to your rights.please inform us. (XDI functionality only) Import traffic from Fluke Networks OptiView Console. Open Import Log Clear Import Log Export Traffic Flows > To Spreadsheet — Export Traffic Flows Operations on page ER-3-196 Unicast Flows on page ER-3-195 Create Traffic Flows > Unicast Flows Creates and configures a full or partial mesh of IP traffic flows between all or selected nodes in the network. (XDI functionality only) Imports traffic from cflowd.0 www. which contains error and diagnostic information generated during previous imports.3—Project Editor Table 3-7 Traffic Menu Summary (Continued) Menu item Import Traffic Flows > From Cisco NetFlow… Imports traffic from Cisco NetFlow. (XDI functionality only) Imports traffic from NetScout nGenius. .tr1 and .tr2) Files… Imports traffic from a text . Clears the link load import log.. Importing Traffic Flows on page XDI-3-1 Importing Traffic Flows on page XDI-3-1 Importing Traffic Flows on page XDI-3-1 Importing Traffic Flows on page XDI-3-1 Description Reference From NetScout nGenius… From Cflowd… From Fluke Networks OptiView Console… From Network General Distributed Sniffer/Sniffer Pro… From Spreadsheet Importing Traffic Flows on page XDI-3-1 Troubleshooting Traffic-Flow Imports on page MC-14-29 Troubleshooting Traffic-Flow Imports on page MC-14-29 ACE Traffic Flows on page ITGSP-1-10 — From Text (.

Importing Baseline Loads on page MC-15-1 — Open Import Log Clear Import Log Convert Link Loads To Flows > Configure/Convert… — Converts baseline load traffic to traffic flows. (XDI functionality only) CA eHealth Baseline Loads: Preparing for an Import on page XDI-4-9 MRTG Link Loads: Preparing for an Import on page XDI-4-2 InfoVista Link Loads: Preparing for an Import on page XDI-4-4 Description Reference From MRTG From InfoVista From HP OpenView Performance Insight From Text Files Imports the background traffic load on a device or link from ASCII (.3—Project Editor Table 3-7 Traffic Menu Summary (Continued) Menu item Import Baseline Loads > From CA eHealth–Network… Imports the background traffic load on a device or link from CA eHealth–Network. ER-3-18 www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.gbu) traffic files. (XDI functionality only) Imports the background traffic load on a link from InfoVista reports. (XDI functionality only) Imports the background traffic load on a device or link from MRTG traffic file.com The document is for study only. Clears link load import log. which contains error and diagnostic information generated during previous imports. Opens traffic flow import log. (Flow Analysis module only) Converting Link Loads to Traffic Flows on page MC-10-32 — — Importing Traffic Flows on page MC-14-1 Open Conversion Log Clear Conversion Log Specify Core/Edge Devices… Opens link loads conversion log. Specifies which nodes in your network should be assigned traffic from unrecognized sources.if tort to your rights.0 . Clears link loads conversion log. Import Node Aliases > From Change Sets… Imports aliases to nodes in the current scenario. From Change Sets… on page ER-3-197 From Text File… on page ER-3-197 From Text File… Imports aliases from a tab-separated text file.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.please inform us.

For more information. Imports a service definition from a previously exported services definition. Table 3-8 Services Menu Summary Menu Item Create Service Description Creates a service in the Network Browser.we will delete ER-3-19 . Clears the services analysis results. Importing Services on page ER-3-209 Reference Defining a Service on page ER-3-201 Defining a Service User Group on page ER-3-205 Visualizing Services Analysis on page ER-3-208 Create Service User Group Visualize Status Clear Visualization Import… Export… Exporting Services on page ER-3-209 End of Table 3-8 Modeler/Release 14. To Change Set… on page ER-3-196 To Text File… on page ER-3-197 Description Reference To Text File… End of Table 3-7 Services Menu The Services menu contains operations related to services analyses.0 www.if tort to your rights.com The document is for study only. see Services.cadfamily. Displays the services analysis results.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Exports a service definition to a file for future import.3—Project Editor Table 3-7 Traffic Menu Summary (Continued) Menu item Export Node Aliases > To Change Set… Exports aliases from nodes in the current scenario.please inform us. Exports aliases to a tab-separated text file. Creates a service group in the Network Browser.

Configures BGP start time.) Reference Applications on page STM-1-1 Servers Server on page STM-29-1 Mainframes Mainframe Model User Guide on page STM-20-1 — IP on page STM-11-1 TCP IP BGP BGP on page STM-3-1 EIGRP EIGRP on page STM-5-1 IGRP IGRP on page STM-10-1 IS-IS IS-IS on page STM-16-1 OSPF OSPF on page STM-23-1 RIP RIP on page STM-25-1 MPLS MPLS on page SPM-22-1 LPD RSVP Opens the RSVP model user guide.if tort to your rights. Opens OSPF model user guide. creates and edits server definitions. Configures interface metrics. (Requires the MPLS specialized model. Opens the Applications model user guide.please inform us. autonomous system numbers on routers. Configures IP addresses. Opens the IGRP model user guide. Configures.0 . and route re-distribution. Opens the IP model user guide.3—Project Editor Protocols Menu The Protocols menu contains operations related to the various protocols supported in the standard and specialized model libraries. Configures RIP start time and route re-distribution from other protocols into RIP. Imports server job definitions. Opens the EIGRP model user guide. hides. OSPF start time.cadfamily. Opens the RIP model user guide. type of service characteristics for conversation pair traffic. areas. displays.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. and SPF calculation parameters. Configures IGRP start time and route re-distribution from other protocols into IGRP. and deletes LSPs in the network. autonomous system numbers. metric styles. Opens the Server model user guide. Imports or exports LSP configuration from/to ASCII text files. Imports mainframe characterizations.com The document is for study only.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. and configures servers. Opens the TCP model user guide. opens the Mainframe model user guide. Configures interface cost. Opens MPLS model user guide. Table 3-9 Protocols Menu Summary Menu item Applications Description Adds ACE application models to the existing network and configures application demands. Opens the BGP model user guide. interface circuit types. and ping traffic. system types. — RSVP on page STM-27-1 ER-3-20 www. and route re-distribution from other protocols into BGP. dynamic routing protocols. Configures EIGRP start time and route re-distribution from other protocols into EIGRP.

if tort to your rights. Shows/hides routes for the Fibre Channel models. Opens the Wireless LAN model user guide. Opens the Frame Relay model user guide. — VLAN on page STM-37-1 Reference ATM on page STM-2-1 LANE PNNI — — Frame Relay Frame Relay on page STM-8-1 — Circuit-Switch DOCSIS DPT — SRP on page STM-31-1 Ethernet FDDI Fibre Channel Token Ring VLAN — — STP MANET — MANET on page STM-21-1 — — UMTS Wireless LAN End of Table 3-9 Modeler/Release 14. (Requires the PNNI specialized model. Lets you show or hide STP configuration.com The document is for study only.3—Project Editor Table 3-9 Protocols Menu Summary (Continued) Menu item ATM Description Configures oversubscription on a per-service class basis for all or selected nodes in the network. Opens the ATM model user guide.please inform us.) Configures PVCs between nodes in the network. Configures VLANs for selected nodes or links. Opens the LANE model user guide. enables/disables VLANs for switches.) Opens the DOCSIS Model User Guide.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.cadfamily. Opens the Circuit-Switched model user guide. configures links as trunks. Opens the UMTS model user guide. (Requires the Circuit-switched specialized model. Opens the Token Ring model user guide.we will delete ER-3-21 . Creates a DPT ring in the current scenario. Lets you show or hide DSR routes and open the DSR or TORA model user guides. Opens the Ethernet model user guide. and infers VLAN configuration from switches.0 www. Opens the SRP model user guide. Opens PNNI model user guide. Opens the FDDI model user guide.

3—Project Editor DES Menu The DES menu contains operations to configure and run simulations.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. Restart Discrete Event Simulation Restarts a simulation from a checkpoint file (Linux only).0 . Define Service Level Agreement on page ER-3-214 Configure/Run Discrete Event Simulation on page ER-3-213 Configure/Run Discrete Event Simulation (Advanced) on page ER-3-214 Run Discrete Event Simulation on page ER-3-247 Checkpoints on page ER-3-317 Open DES Log on page ER-3-218 Configure/Run Discrete Event Simulation… Configures various aspects of a simulation using Detailed mode.com The document is for study only. Displays a log of log of errors and significant discrete event simulation events Open DES Log Results > View Results… Displays statistics collected during a discrete event simulation. Record Packet Flow Animation For Subnet Record Node Movement Animation For Subnet Expert Service Prediction > Define Service Level Agreement… Defines a service level agreement. Toggles collection of animation data that records the physical movement of nodes and subnets.please inform us. Reference Choose Individual Statistics on page ER-3-211 Choose Statistics (Advanced) on page ER-3-213 Packet Flow Animation on page ER-3-278 Node Animation on page ER-3-278 Choose Statistics (Advanced) Opens the Probe Editor for advanced control of the results to be collected during simulation. Configure/Run Discrete Event Simulation (Advanced) Configures all aspects of a simulation using Advanced mode. View Results on page ER-3-235 ER-3-22 www.cadfamily. Table 3-10 DES Menu Summary Menu item Choose Individual Statistics… Description Specifies the global statistics to collect during the simulation. Toggles collection of animation data that records the flow of packets between nodes.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.if tort to your rights. Run Discrete Event Simulation Runs the simulation.

please inform us.we will delete ER-3-23 .cadfamily. Play 2D Animation Launches the animation viewer. Generates a specified report. Reference Compare Results on page ER-3-235 Find Top Statistics on page ER-3-221 Tracking Application Delays on page ER-3-224 — Find Top Statistics… View Application Delay Tracking View DES Reports Displays output tables generated during a discrete event simulation. Displays application delay data collected during discrete event simulation. Displays the maximum or minimum results for a given statistic. Modeler/Release 14.if tort to your rights. Panels Displays a list of all open panels and allows you to select one to make active.3—Project Editor Table 3-10 DES Menu Summary (Continued) Menu item Compare Results… Description Launches the Results Browser for viewing and comparing available results. Generate Web Report… Generate Web Report on page ER-3-229 Launch Last Web Report on page ER-3-229 Using the 2-D Animation Viewer on page AV-1-1 — Launch Last Web Report Opens most recently generated web report in HTML browser.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only.0 www.

Delete All Panels Delete All Panels on page ER-3-221 End of Table 3-10 ER-3-24 www. Show All on page ER-3-220 Hide All on page ER-3-220 Distribute on page ER-3-219 Cascade on page ER-3-219 Description Reference Hide All Hides all analysis panels. Create From All Panels on page ER-3-220 Load With Latest Results on page ER-3-220 — Load With Latest Results Reload Data Into All Panels Applies current statistics to all analysis panels. Applies current statistics to all templates in scenario.please inform us.0 .com The document is for study only.3—Project Editor Table 3-10 DES Menu Summary (Continued) Menu item Panel Operations > Arrange Panels > Show All Draws any analysis panels previously hidden.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. Arranges open panels in an overlapping pattern that ensures the title bar of each panel is visible Redraws open panels to a uniform size and arranges them in a grid Cascade Tile Tile on page ER-3-220 Panel Annotations > Make All Panels Into Annotations Create annotation objects from all open analysis panels Delete all analysis panel annotations in the network — Delete All Panel Annotations — Panel Templates > Create From All Panels Makes all analysis panels in the current scenario into templates.if tort to your rights. Deletes all analysis panels in the current scenario.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Distribute Arranges analysis panels in a grid but does not resize them.cadfamily.

cadfamily.3—Project Editor Pop-Up Menus The following sections describe the Project Editor pop-up menus: • Workspace Pop-Up Menu on page ER-3-25 • Object Pop-Up Menu on page ER-3-26 • Statistic Pop-Up Menu on page ER-3-29 • Panel Pop-Up Menu on page ER-3-30 • Graph Pop-Up Menu on page ER-3-30 Workspace Pop-Up Menu Right-click in any open part of the workspace to display the Workspace pop-up menu. in alphabetic order. collecting results. Find Top Statistics on page ER-3-221 Go to Parent Subnetwork on page ER-3-45 Description Opens a statistic browser for choosing the results to be collected during a discrete event simulation. This menu provides access to frequently used operations for setting the workspace view. Open DES Log on page ER-3-218 DES Animation for Subnet > Record Packet Flows Toggles collection of animation data that records the flow of packets between nodes. Displays results collected during the last simulation.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.if tort to your rights. and viewing results.com The document is for study only. — Record Node Movements — View Results View Results on page ER-3-235 Modeler/Release 14. Toggles collection of animation data that records the physical movement of nodes and subnets. Changes the view in the workspace to the contents of the next higher subnetwork.0 www. The following table lists the operations on the Workspace pop-up menu.please inform us. Reference Choose Individual Statistics on page ER-3-211 Go To Parent Subnetwork Move Selected Objects to Non-Geographic Positions Open DES Log Displays the log of discrete event simulation errors and significant events.we will delete ER-3-25 . Table 3-11 Workspace Pop-Up Menu Operations Menu item Choose Individual DES Statistics Edit Selected Objects Find Top Results Displays maximum or minimum values for a selected result.

centered at the cursor location. This menu provides access to frequently used operations for adjusting the display.please inform us.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. Specifies which statistics will be collected during a discrete event simulation. setting object properties. collecting results. Allows you to perform an action on a link in the link bundle. (Requires 3DNV module.com The document is for study only. Reference Zoom In on page ER-3-276 Zoom Out Zoom Out on page ER-3-276 Zoom to Selection To Selection on page ER-3-95 Zoom to Window End of Table 3-11 To Window on page ER-3-95 Object Pop-Up Menu Right-click on any object (subnet. The items on this menu vary depending on the type of object clicked. Returns the view of the network model to the previous magnification level.3—Project Editor Table 3-11 Workspace Pop-Up Menu Operations (Continued) Menu item Zoom In Description Magnifies the view of the network model by 2x. demand. path) to display the Object pop-up menu.if tort to your rights. Sets the view to display all objects in the model.cadfamily. the object must be mapped to a 3DNV entity and the 3D Visualizer must be enabled) Brings the selected object to the front so it is not obscured by other objects of the same type. (Requires 3DNV module) ER-3-26 www. and viewing results. Zooms the view in or out so that all selected objects are visible. Table 3-12 Object Pop-Up Menu Operations Menu item Add Ports Assign Port Connectivity… Attach to Entity in 3D Visualizer Attaches the object to the mapped entity in 3D Network Visualizer. — Description Add new ports to an existing node Reference Add Ports on page ER-3-249 Bring to Front Object Layering on page ER-3-41 Bundling Links and Demands on page ER-3-177 Choose Individual Statistics on page ER-3-211 Bundling Links and Demands on page ER-3-177 Visualizing Trajectories in 3D Network Visualizer on page AV-5-8 Bundled Links Choose Individual DES Statistics Collapse to Bundle Display Trajectory in 3D Visualizer Toggles display of assigned trajectories for selected sites. The following table lists the operations on the Object pop-up menu. node.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Collapses similar links into a bundle. in alphabetic order.0 . link.

Displays the contents of a subnet. which displays the currently selected path(s).cadfamily. Defines custom documentation for the selected object(s). Opens the Path Viewer window.we will delete ER-3-27 . Edits all objects with the same “model” attribute value. Hides the currently selected demand. — — — — Enter Selected Subnet on page ER-3-264 Bundling Links and Demands on page ER-3-177 Expand Selected Subnets on page ER-3-44 Expand Expand Subnet Fail This <Object> Fail Selected Objects on page ER-3-119 — Hide Attached Demands Hide Similar Demands Hides all demands with the same “model” attribute value.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Opens the Attributes dialog box for the object. Enters the selected subnet while preserving the set of selected objects. Hides the currently selected path.3—Project Editor Table 3-12 Object Pop-Up Menu Operations (Continued) Menu item Edit Aliases Description Assigns imported traffic from unrecognized sources to a specific node. Displays both primary and advanced attributes of the subnetwork. only certain operations can be performed on the displayed objects. Edits all objects with the same “model” attribute value. Hides all paths with the same “model” attribute value.0 www. When a subnet is expanded.com The document is for study only. Expands the collapsed bundle to display the individual links in the bundle. link. Fail a node. — Reference — Edit Attributes Edit Attributes (Advanced) Edit Attributes on page ER-3-252 Edit Documentation Edit Ports Edit Similar Demands Edit Similar Links Edit Similar Nodes Edit Similar Paths Enter Subnet Edits all objects with the same “model” attribute value.if tort to your rights. — Hide Similar Paths Hide This Demand Hide This Path Open DES Log — — — Open DES Log on page ER-3-218 — Open Path Viewer Modeler/Release 14.please inform us. Edits all objects with the same “model” attribute value. or demand in the network. Displays the log of discrete event simulation errors and significant events.

Selects all objects with the same “model” attribute value.cadfamily.please inform us. Defines the name of the object. Reference Recover Selected Objects on page ER-3-184 Bundling Links and Demands on page ER-3-177 Redefine Bundle Path Allows you to redefine a bundle path by drawing it in the workspace. Allows you to redefine a link’s path by redrawing it in the workspace. When this operation is selected. Selects all objects with the same “model” attribute value. Opens an edit pad with a description of the link model.com The document is for study only. This item appears when you open the menu for an object that is currently unselected. Shows all paths with the same “model” attribute value. (This is the same as editing the “name” attribute of the object.3—Project Editor Table 3-12 Object Pop-Up Menu Operations (Continued) Menu item Recover This <Object> Description Recover a node or link in the network. Unselects the object from which the pop-up menu was opened. the link bundle is deleted and the link model is automatically loaded so that you can redraw the link bundle.) Redefine Path Redrawing Links on page ER-3-176 Select — Select Similar Demands — Select Similar Links — Select Similar Nodes — Select Similar Paths — Send to Back Object Layering on page ER-3-41 — Set Name Show Attached Demands Show Similar Demands Shows all demands with the same “model” attribute value. Selects all objects with the same “model” attribute value. Selects all objects with the same “model” attribute value. When this operation is selected. Opens an edit pad with a description of the demand model. Selects the object from which the pop-up menu was opened.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.0 . This item appears when you open the menu for an object that is currently selected.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. the link is deleted and the link model is automatically loaded so that you can redraw the link. Sends the selected object to the back so it may be obscured by other objects of the same type.if tort to your rights. — Show Similar Paths Unselect — — View Demand Description View <Object> Description on page ER-3-274 View <Object> Description on page ER-3-274 View Link Description ER-3-28 www.

Toggles statistic animation data capture for this statistic.0 www.please inform us.com The document is for study only. (This item appears for global and object statistics. Opens an edit pad with a description of the node model. View Results Displays results collected during the simulation.if tort to your rights. Table 3-13 Statistic Pop-Up Menu Operations Menu item Change Collection Mode Description Controls how results are collected during simulation.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. but not for scenario-wide object statistics. Reference — View Link Peak Usage (Flow Analysis) — View Node Description View <Object> Description on page ER-3-274 View <Object> Description on page ER-3-274 View Results on page ER-3-235 View Path Description Opens an edit pad with a description of the path model. This menu provides access to frequently used operations for controlling statistic collection and viewing statistic information. Generate Live Statistic Live Stats Page on page ER-3-308 Record Statistic Animation — View Description End of Table 3-13 — Modeler/Release 14. The following table lists the operations on the Statistic pop-up menu.cadfamily. The results are based on the last discrete event simulation run.we will delete ER-3-29 .) Opens an edit pad containing a definition of this statistic. in alphabetic order. Reference Change Collection Mode on page ER-3-249 — Change Draw Style Sets a default draw style for graphs created from this statistic. Enables capture of statistic values for display during simulation on the Live Stats page of the Simulation Progress dialog box. End of Table 3-12 Statistic Pop-Up Menu Right-click on a statistic name in the Define Report dialog box to display the Statistic pop-up menu.3—Project Editor Table 3-12 Object Pop-Up Menu Operations (Continued) Menu item View Link Peak Usage (Discrete Event Simulation) Description Opens a Results Browser report with the throughput and utilization information for the link. The results are based on the last flow analysis run. Opens a Results Browser report with the throughput and utilization information for the link.

please inform us. or Silver Color Scheme. Gold Color Scheme.0 style). makes all vertical scales equal. Use Same Vertical Scale If more than one stacked graph is present.3—Project Editor Panel Pop-Up Menu Right-click in the border of an analysis panel (outside any graphs) to display the Panel pop-up menu.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. This menu provides access to frequently used operations for manipulating the panel’s display of simulation results. Exports all statistic data in the graph to the spreadsheet program specified in the spreadsheet_prog preference.0 . Adds the analysis panel as an annotation object in the network workspace. Hidden panels can be retrieved by clicking the Hide/Show Graph Panels toolbar button or by choosing DES > Panel Operations > Arrange Panels > Show All. Restores original horizontal scale of graph. Full Horizontal Scale Export All Graph Data to Spreadsheet — Exporting Data to a Spreadsheet on page ER-3-265 Hide This Panel — Make Panel Annotation in Network Analysis Panel Annotation Objects on page ER-3-271 — Chart Style End of Table 3-14 Graph Pop-Up Menu Right-click in a graph (the plotting area of an analysis panel) to display the Graph pop-up menu. This menu provides access to frequently used operations for controlling the display of results in the graph. The following table lists the operations on the Panel pop-up menu. ER-3-30 www. Reference Edit Panel Properties on page ER-3-263 Statistic Information on page ER-3-266 Add Graph on page ER-3-248 — Show Statistic Data Opens the Statistic data dialog box Add Graph Adds a blank graph to the panel. Table 3-14 Panel Pop-Up Menu Operations Menu item Edit Panel Properties Description Opens the Edit Panel dialog box. a temporary text file is created.cadfamily. If no program is specified.com The document is for study only. Classic (pre-12.if tort to your rights. Hides the panel. Sets the graphic style for the analysis panel: Default.

Controls drawing of horizontal grid lines. such as discrete points. Toggles use of a log scale for the x axis. thin. Add Statistic Full Vertical Scale Adds statistics to a graph. Sets the way data is presented in the graph. a temporary text file is created. Controls drawing of vertical grid lines.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Creates a distribution based on the data in a trace.0 www. Toggles display of traces as 2D or 3D. or bar chart. or both. medium. Table 3-15 Graph Pop-Up Menu Operations Menu item Edit Graph Properties Description Opens the Edit Graph dialog box. If no program is specified. or thick. Resets both the horizontal and vertical scale of the graph to display the full range of values. Resets the horizontal scale of the graph to display the full range of x-axis values. Sets the type of line used to draw statistics in the graph: dashed. medium.com The document is for study only. Exports all statistic data in the graph to the spreadsheet program specified in the spreadsheet_prog preference.cadfamily. Toggles display of trend lines for traces in the graph.please inform us. Reference Edit Graph Properties on page ER-3-261 Edit Panel Properties on page ER-3-263 — — Edit Panel Properties Opens the Edit Panel dialog box. linear trace. y axis.we will delete ER-3-31 . Resets the vertical scale of the graph to display the full range of y-axis values.if tort to your rights. Full Horizontal Scale — Full Scale — X Grid Y Grid Draw Thickness — — Draw Thickness on page ER-3-252 Draw Styles on page ER-3-251 — Draw Style Symbol Size Show 3D Depth Show Trend Line Use Log Scale Export Graph Data to Spreadsheet — — — Exporting Data to a Spreadsheet on page ER-3-265 Generate Distribution From Trace on page ER-3-274 — Generate Distribution from Trace Remove Trace Displays a list of statistics in the graph and removes the selected one from the graph. or large.3—Project Editor The following table lists the operations on the Graph pop-up menu. End of Table 3-15 Modeler/Release 14. Sets the size of data point symbols in graphs using the Discrete and Linear Symbol draw styles: small.

0 . see Configuring the Toolbar on page ER-1-6.3—Project Editor Toolbar Buttons The Project Editor has toolbar buttons for frequently-used operations. To configure the toolbar buttons.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. The name of each toolbar button appears as a tooltip when you rest the cursor on the button.please inform us.com The document is for study only.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.cadfamily. ER-3-32 www.if tort to your rights.

The items that appear on this menu are described below in alphabetical order. image maps.we will delete ER-3-33 .if tort to your rights.com The document is for study only.please inform us.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Three different types of maps are recognized: border maps. and are described by referencing points on an x-y axis.0 www. • Background Operations on page ER-3-33 • Collapse Selected Subnets on page ER-3-42 • Color by Link Load on page ER-3-43 • Expand Selected Subnets on page ER-3-44 • Go to Parent Subnetwork on page ER-3-45 • Layout Operations on page ER-3-45 • Network Showcase on page ER-3-66 • Set View for Subnet/Network on page ER-3-55 • Set Background Properties on page ER-3-57 • Show All/Hide All Links on page ER-3-58 • Show Bird’s-Eye View on page ER-3-60 • Show Network Browser on page ER-3-62 • Show Time Controller on page ER-3-90 • Visualize Link Loads on page ER-3-91 • Visualizing Protocols Configured in a Network on page ER-3-92 • Zoom Operations on page ER-3-95 Background Operations Backgrounds (both maps and images) represent real-world entities that are fixed in space.3—Project Editor View Menu Operations This section contains descriptions and procedures for using the operations available from the View menu in the Project Editor. Modeler/Release 14. such as office floor plans. Images represent small-scale entities. allowing you to interpret them more easily. They provide a physical context for your network models.cadfamily. The basic difference between maps and images is that maps represent large-scale geographic entities and are described by latitude and longitude coordinates. and MIF maps.

3 Choose View > Background > Set Border Map… ➥ The Choose Border Map dialog box appears.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. Border maps are visible in every subnet and cannot be edited. Geological Survey.i extension. You can get additional images of this type from the Web. Campus. Office. Modeler includes pre-imported image maps. When a TIFF files is imported. see Add Image… on page ER-3-38.map. at http://terraserver. Imported image map files are stored with a . When you use the Startup Wizard. Two image map formats can be imported: • GeoTIFF—GeoTIFF files include latitude and longitude information.com The document is for study only.0 . which are used to place the map in the correct position. such as floor plans.please inform us. 4 Select the desired map.com. France. End of Procedure 3-1 Add Image Map… Image maps comprise a bit-mapped image that is tied to specific latitude-longitude coordinates. or map-specific).) Image maps are visible only in the subnet in which they are placed. you can select the scale for the network. Logical. and California.microsoft. Such maps provide a more graphically detailed background than do border maps.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Procedure 3-1 Placing a Border Map 1 Verify that your network model is set to the appropriate scale (World. the project editor switches to map edit mode allowing you can enter latitude and longitude data. which appear in the list presented by the View > Background > Add Image Map command.if tort to your rights. ER-3-34 www. 2 Display the subnet in which you want to place the map and zoom to the approximate area. ➥ The map is placed in your network model. Modeler includes a library of border maps. The image maps were created by the U. • TIFF—TIFF files do not include latitude and longitude information.cadfamily. You can modify the scale of an existing model with the Set Background Properties operation (see Set Background Properties on page ER-3-57).3—Project Editor Set Border Map… Border maps use vector lines to define political and geographic areas such as East Asia. using latitude-longitude coordinates to specify positions. Enterprise.S. (For background images of smaller extent.

image maps can be hidden by using the Show Maps in Subnet operation (on the View > Background menu).gif format.com The document is for study only. Enterprise.0 www. 5 Verify that the Add Map to Current Subnet checkbox is selected. End of Procedure 3-2 Modeler/Release 14. Logical. Once placed in a network model. You can modify the scale of an existing model with the Set Background Properties operation (see Set Background Properties on page ER-3-57). or map-specific).we will delete ER-3-35 . Figure 3-1 Add Map dialog box 4 Verify that the Use Existing Map radio button is selected. When you use the Startup Wizard. 3 Choose View > Background > Add Image Map… ➥ The Add Map dialog box appears. The following procedures describe two tasks: • Placing an Already-Imported Image Map on page ER-3-35 • Importing an Image Map on page ER-3-36 For information about editing an image map. you can select the scale for the network. see Map Edit Mode on page ER-3-40. these maps are often in . 6 Select the desired file name. 2 Display the subnet in which you want to place the map and zoom to the precise area. Campus. Office. You must convert such images to TIFF or GeoTIFF format before importing them.please inform us.if tort to your rights. centered in the workspace.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. ➥ The map is placed in your network model.3—Project Editor You can also find other maps on the Internet. Procedure 3-2 Placing an Already-Imported Image Map 1 Verify that your network model is set to the appropriate scale (World.

You may want to import a border map to use as reference. Office. if you import an image map of New York City while in the Paris subnet.if tort to your rights.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Procedure 3-3 Importing an Image Map 1 Verify that your network model is set to the appropriate scale (World. When you use the Startup Wizard. • If the image is a TIFF file. 7 Click OK. You can import a map for later use even if you do not want to include it in the current scenario. the latitude and longitude specifications in the file are used to place the image map in the correct geographic position. you have two options: the better option is to determine and enter the correct latitude and longitude specifications for the map image. At this point. you can select the scale for the network. you receive this error message and be unable to see the image map. ➥ The file is saved in the first directory listed in your mod_dirs preference. You can modify the scale of an existing model with the Set Background Properties operation (see Set Background Properties on page ER-3-57). See Map Edit Mode on page ER-3-40 for details on this dialog box.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. the message display may show the error message “Map is completely outside of current subnet but is added to subnet anyway. Campus.com The document is for study only. the Set Location and Size dialog box appears.please inform us. The image is placed in the workspace. You will have to import the image map into a subnet whose extent covers the coordinates of the image map for it to be visible. 2 Display the subnet where you want to place the map and zoom to the approximate area. 6 Do one of the following: • Type the path name of the file you want to import and enter a file name in the Save Map As field. Logical. or map-specific). Enterprise. A message in the message display area lists the geographic area covered by the map. the map is placed correctly the next time it is imported. • If the image is a GeoTIFF file. select the file you want to import.0 . 3 Choose View > Background > Add Image Map… ➥ The Choose Map dialog box appears. The view may scroll so the map can be seen. 4 Click the Import radio button.cadfamily. For example. ER-3-36 www. If you do this. 5 Verify that the Add Map to Current Subnet checkbox is set appropriately.” This means that the subnet extent covers a geographic area that is different from the geographic area covered by the map you imported. • Click on the Browse button.3—Project Editor After importing an image map. and verify that the file name in the Save Map As field is acceptable.

we will delete ER-3-37 . Details can be seen by clicking the View Log button in the dialog box. If other coordinates are used in the file or if the MIF file is a later version (4. ellipsoids. End of Procedure 3-3 Add MIF Map… MIF maps are text files of geographic information in the MapInfo Interchange File format created by MapInfo Corporation.com. These include: — Collections (drawn as individual items) — Multipoints and text (displayed) — Tables using MS Access databases (skipped) — Interleaved line styles or objects (skipped) — Datums. The directory containing the MIF files must be listed in the mod_dirs preference. Procedure 3-4 Importing a MIF Map 1 Display the subnet where you want to place the MIF map and zoom to the approximate area. or remove them by choosing View > Background > Set Properties. If problems occur during import. with the following possible results: • Some items might be skipped or handled differently. You can rearrange. and projections released after version 3. Modeler tries to import the file. a dialog box summarizes the problems.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Maps in this format are available from a variety of sources and mapping programs.3—Project Editor The other option is to exit map edit mode.0–7.) 2 Choose View > Background > Add MIF Map… ➥ A list of available MIF files appears.0 MIF files that use a global coordinate system with units of degrees. import a border map.com The document is for study only. and—using the border map as a guide—place your image map in approximately the correct location. Modeler/Release 14.mapinfo.mif extension (which are the files that contain geographic information).8).please inform us.cadfamily. Previous MIF import logs are moved to the op_admin/tmp directory. Modeler uses MIF files with a .if tort to your rights. The log for the most recent MIF import is saved in your op_admin directory. Modeler imports version 3. (You may want to import a border map to use as reference. hide.0 (skipped) • The map might display incorrectly or not at all. The MIF specification can be downloaded from the MapInfo Corporation website at http://www.0 www. MIF maps are imported as separate layers in the workspace (as described in Object Layering on page ER-3-41).

Note—MIF data usually covers a limited area. you can select the scale for the network. see Add Image Map… on page ER-3-34. Imported image files are stored with a .) Images are visible only in the subnet in which they are placed. click Close. ➥ Each map is placed in the subnet as you click its name. Unless that area is visible in the subnet. 4 When you are finished adding maps. They typically represent a small-scale. images can be hidden using the operation View > Background > Show Maps in Subnet. a dialog box opens summarizing the problems found. When you place an image.if tort to your rights.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. 2 Choose View > Background > Add Image… ➥ The Add Background Image dialog box appears. When you use the Startup Wizard.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.com The document is for study only. real-world area such as an office floor plan. the project editor automatically switches to map edit mode for you to adjust the image position or size. The following procedures describe two tasks: • Placing an Image in a Network Model on page ER-3-38 • Importing an Image on page ER-3-39 For information about editing an image. After being placed in a network model. (For background images of larger extent.i extension.please inform us. You can modify the scale of an existing model with the Set Background Properties operation (see Set Background Properties on page ER-3-57).bkg.cadfamily. such as a city map. End of Procedure 3-4 Add Image… Images must be a bit-mapped graphic in TIFF format. you will not see imported maps until you zoom into that area. ER-3-38 www. see Map Edit Mode on page ER-3-40. Procedure 3-5 Placing an Image in a Network Model 1 Verify that your network model is set to the appropriate scale for the background image (Enterprise. or Office). If the file cannot be imported completely.0 . Campus.3—Project Editor 3 Click the file name of each map you want to add to the workspace.

com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. You can exit the editing mode by choosing View > Background > Map Edit Mode.we will delete ER-3-39 .com The document is for study only. End of Procedure 3-5 Procedure 3-6 Importing an Image 1 Choose View > Background > Add Image… ➥ The Add Background Image dialog box appears.bkg. See Map Edit Mode on page ER-3-40 for details. ➥ The file is saved (with an extension .please inform us. 2 Select the Import Background Image radio button. 3 Do one of the following: • Type the path name of the file you want to import and enter a file name in the Save Background As field.cadfamily. 4 Select the desired background image.0 www.i) in the first directory listed in your mod_dirs preference. End of Procedure 3-6 Modeler/Release 14. ➥ The map is placed in your network model. centered in the workspace and editing mode is turned on. See Map Edit Mode on page ER-3-40 for details. • Click on the Browse button and select the file that you want to import. The project editor changes to editing mode.3—Project Editor Figure 3-2 Add Background Image Dialog Box 3 Verify that the Use Existing Background Image radio button is selected.if tort to your rights. 4 Click OK to save the file. or you can edit the background image.

you can: • Change the location of a map or image. • Cut. for example. (The project editor changes automatically to this mode after some operations. paste the map of France into a scenario that is measured in feet. You cannot. ➥ Handles appear around the map or image.0 . You typically copy a map or image to a different scenario.3—Project Editor Map Edit Mode Map edit mode allows you to modify both image maps and images. In this mode. or within the same scenario. make sure the scale of the destination scenario matches the scale of the source scenario. Resize a map or image Use either of two methods: • Drag one of the handles on the map. copy. Move a map or image Use either of two methods: • Drag the object to the desired position.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. as described in step 4 to step 6. ➥ The Map pop-up menu appears. or paste. using techniques described in the following table. When you paste a map or image to a different scenario.com The document is for study only. ER-3-40 www. but you can paste multiple copies in the same scenario. copy or paste a map or image from one scenario to another.) 2 Select the map or image by clicking on it. • Modify the attributes in the Set Location and Size dialog box.if tort to your rights. Procedure 3-7 Editing a Map or Image 1 Choose View > Background > Map Edit Mode. “Location” means the position of the map or background image within the subnet. 3 Edit the map or image as desired. right-click on it. as described in step 4 to step 6. • Modify the attributes in the Set Location and Size dialog box. • Change the size of a map or image.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Instruction Choose the desired operation from the Edit menu. Table 3-16 Edit Map or Image Operations To… Cut. End of Table 3-16 4 To resize (or move) a map or image.please inform us.

0 www. grid line. • To resize a map—modify the latitude and longitude attributes. End of Procedure 3-7 Object Layering Layering is used to separate objects in the workspace. Each type of object (such as a node. kilometers.please inform us.cadfamily. the frontmost object is the one that is highest in the object type hierarchy. or map) is drawn on a particular layer. This dialog box varies. ➥ The message display confirms that you have exited Map Edit mode. • To move an image—modify the X Position and Y Position attributes. Figure 3-3 Set Location and Size Dialog Box For an image For a map 6 Follow the appropriate step: • To resize an image—modify the X Span (width) and Y Span (height) attributes and click OK. ➥ The Set Location and Size dialog box displays.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. feet. with objects in higher layers overlaying—and possibly obscuring—those in lower ones.if tort to your rights. and annotations) • Grid lines • MIF maps • Satellite orbits • Vector (border) maps • Background maps and images Modeler/Release 14. The unit of measure is the same unit of measure as used for the subnet (degrees. • To move a map—modify the latitude and longitude attributes. depending on whether the object to be modified is an image or a map. paths.3—Project Editor 5 Choose Set Location and Size from the pop-up menu.we will delete ER-3-41 . links.com The document is for study only. and so on). When objects of different types overlap. The default hierarchy—from front to back—is as follows: • Network objects (nodes. 7 Choose View > Background > Map Edit Mode.

a path overlays all other network objects. • When moved to the back. each type of object exists in a sub-layer with other similar objects. To select an expanded subnet. for example. within the network objects layer. These operations move the selected object within its sub-layer. links will always appear behind nodes and in front of annotations. ER-3-42 www.com The document is for study only.if tort to your rights.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. in which they are represented by a single icon.cadfamily. Collapse Selected Subnets This operation restores selected subnets to their typical collapsed state. Collapsed subnet For information about expanding subnets. If objects of the same type overlap. This hierarchy is: • Paths (see text) • Nodes (including subnets) • Links and paths • Annotations Thus. (See Set Background Properties.) In addition. Paths are treated in a special way with regard to layering.3—Project Editor You can change this hierarchy using the View > Background > Set Properties operation.please inform us. click on the subnet extent. relative to all other objects of its type. you can specify which object will appear in front by using the Bring to Front or Send to Back operation from the Object pop-up menu. as follows: • When created or moved to the front. Figure 3-4 Expanded and Collapsed Subnets Click on the subnet extent to select an expanded subnet. a path moves to the back of the link and path sub-layer. see Expand Selected Subnets on page ER-3-44.0 .we will delete Modeler/Release 14. including nodes.

you can view link utilizations and throughputs throughout the network.we will delete ER-3-43 . Figure 3-5 Visualizing Link Utilization and Throughput colors indicate level of utilization in each direction: green = low yellow = medium red = high line thickness (1 to 5 pixels) indicates level of bidirectional throughput Procedure 3-8 Viewing Link Visualizations 1 Configure and run a discrete event simulation to collect results for the link utilizations and throughputs in your network.0 www. Therefore.if tort to your rights. as shown in Figure 3-5.com The document is for study only.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Note—The data collected during the most recent simulation is used to visualize the utilization and throughput on each link. choose DES > Color Links by Utilization. 2 If you have any other type of visualization enabled on the links. disable this visualization.3—Project Editor Color by Link Load After you complete a discrete event simulation.cadfamily. 3 When the simulation completes. The Color by Link Load operation draws an arrow over each link to indicate the utilization (arrow color) and throughput (arrow thickness) on that link.please inform us. Figure 3-6 Link Statistics Visualization Dialog Box Modeler/Release 14. make sure that the relevant link statistics are selected in the Choose Results dialog box (DES > Choose Individual Statistics…) before running the simulation. ➥ The Link Statistics Visualization dialog box appears.

and perform any of the operations in the pop-up menu.please inform us. To move. • Right-click on a object to display the Object pop-up menu. ER-3-44 www. that you create two different subnetworks. You see the area covered by the lower-level subnet in the context of the larger geography covered by the parent subnet. placing a jammer in the first.if tort to your rights. copy. The objects in the subnet move with it as you drag. While the subnet is expanded. • Attach links to an object in the subnet. When you expand a subnet. or paste an object in the expanded subnet. you see the objects in it. you must actually be in the subnet.cadfamily.0 . By default. • Drag the subnet as a whole to a new location.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.3—Project Editor 4 Optionally. This effect is not obvious when you look only at the second subnetwork.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. 5 Click Show to view the link visualizations. and the subnet extent. This is helpful when two subnets cover the same geographic area or cover areas that partially overlap. End of Procedure 3-8 Expand Selected Subnets Expanding a subnet displays the contents of the subnet at the parent subnet level. as determined by the subnet object’s “x span” and “y span” attributes. Double-click on the subnet’s surrounding box (the subnet extent) to open the subnet in a new window. cut.com The document is for study only. because you can clearly see the interaction among all objects. change the default settings. Say. for example. the peak values for both utilization and throughput are visualized. but becomes clear when you see the contents of both subnetworks in the larger geographic context. the links leading to the subnet (reattached to the appropriate objects in the subnet). Figure 3-7 Two Expanded Subnets The subnet name is shown in the upper-left corner Double-click on the subnet extent to open the subnet. you can: • Click on the subnet’s extent to select it. Assume further that the jammer actually affects transmissions in the second subnetwork.

com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Because automatic icon sizing in large networks can slow down performance.large_element_count preference. choose View > Layout > Automatic Icon Scaling. To turn automatic icon resizing on or off from the menu bar.0 www. if an icon is 12 x 12 pixels at full size.try_small_font preference. Layout Operations The Layout submenu provides several operations for controlling the way nodes and subnets are displayed in the workspace.cadfamily. you can scale the icon to 50% so that it appears at half-size (6 x 6 pixels) at most. The icon_autosizing.directions preference.we will delete ER-3-45 . Scale Node Icons Interactively This operation enables you to scale the icon size of one or more sites. which is the subnetwork in which the current subnet resides.if tort to your rights. autosizing is turned off if the node count reaches or exceeds the threshold specified by the icon_autosizing. use the title_autoplacing. it is hidden unless the node is selected. For example. The Project Editor window returns to the parent subnetwork.please inform us. Operations include • Automatic Icon Scaling on page ER-3-45 • Automatic Label Placement on page ER-3-45 • Scale Node Icons Interactively on page ER-3-45 • Geographic Positioning on page ER-3-47 • Lay Out Nodes Interactively on page ER-3-49 • Lay Out Nodes (Balanced) on page ER-3-50 • Lay Out Nodes (Simple) on page ER-3-50 • Core-Centric Layout on page ER-3-52 Automatic Icon Scaling The Project Editor window can resize node icons automatically to reduce overlapping and visual clutter. Automatic Label Placement The Project Editor window can move node labels automatically to reduce overlapping. Modeler/Release 14. To allow automatic label placement to use smaller fonts.com The document is for study only.3—Project Editor Go to Parent Subnetwork This operation changes the view in the editor window to the next higher level in the network. If there is no space to show the node label. To turn automatic label placement on or off. You can control where the label is placed with the title_autoplacing.disable preference controls whether this feature is on or off. choose View > Layout > Automatic Label Placement.

select the “Fix icons at full size” radio button.com The document is for study only. it appears as a simple shape rather than as a bitmap.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.if tort to your rights. left-click in the network background to ensure that no nodes are selected. If you don’t like the results.3—Project Editor If you scale an icon below a certain size. • To scale all icons to a specified percentage of their current size.please inform us. 4 Click the Preview button to see the results of the current settings. Figure 3-9 Scale Selected Icons Dialog Box 3 Scale the selected icons by the desired amount. End of Procedure 3-9 ER-3-46 www. • To scale all icons to their full size (as defined by the icon bitmaps). change the scaling options and click Preview again.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. then use the slider to set the percentage. click the “Set Icons to Uniform Size” button. to the current size of the smallest icon in the selection set). choose View > Edit Display Preferences. select the “Scale icons” radio button. To specify the size of the shapes used and the threshold at which bitmap icons are replaced by shapes. ➥ The Scale Selected Icons dialog box appears. Figure 3-8 Scaling a Node Icon full sized icon icon scaled to 50% of full size icon scaled to 10% of full size (becomes minimized) Procedure 3-9 Scaling One or More Node Icons 1 Select the nodes whose icons you want to scale. To scale all node icons in a scenario.0 . 2 Choose View > Layout > Scale Node Icons Interactively.cadfamily. 5 Click OK to apply the current settings or Cancel to revert to the original appearance. the icon becomes minimized—that is. • To scale all selected icons to the same size (that is.

• The non-geographic positioning mode allows objects to be placed anywhere in the Project Editor workspace. regardless of their physical locations.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. subnet.com The document is for study only. This menu item shows a checkmark when the geographic positioning mode is enabled. The geographic positions and paths of objects are not affected by the current view. a path can contain multiple segments. Non-Geographic Positioning Mode The non-geographic positioning mode allows objects to be placed anywhere in the Project Editor workspace. Each network view can have its own layout. Each node. There are two positioning modes: • The geographic positioning mode shows network objects according to their geographic locations. see Set View for Subnet/Network on page ER-3-55. regardless of their physical locations. (For more information about network views.we will delete ER-3-47 . choose View > Layout > Geographic Positioning.please inform us.0 www. Each link object has a defined physical path. so a view can arrange objects in a way that makes sense to that view.) Modeler/Release 14.3—Project Editor Geographic Positioning The positioning mode determines how objects are arranged in the Project Editor workspace.if tort to your rights. and configuration utility object has two advanced attributes (“x position” and “y position”) that determine its geographic position. Geographic Positioning Mode The geographic positioning mode shows network objects by their physical locations. To switch modes.

If you move an object while in geographic mode—that is. This means that unless a view specifies otherwise.please inform us. Figure 3-10 Geographic vs. In the non-geographic mode. • If in non-geographic mode. Or you can arrange objects to emphasize certain characteristics of the network. These buildings use various types of connections. Non-Geographic Positioning: Example Geographic positioning Non-geographic positioning Object Positions in Geographic and Non-Geographic Mode Each node. choose View > Layout > Move Selected Nodes To Geographic Positions. Figure 3-10 shows a network that connects several buildings located throughout the United States. subnetwork. ER-3-48 www.3—Project Editor A non-geographic layout can add visual clarity to your network. as determined by its “x position” and “y position” attributes. You can display selected nodes in the other mode’s position: • If in geographic mode. a view inherits its layout from the geographic locations of the objects in that view.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.0 . choose View > Layout > Move Selected Nodes To Non-Geographic Positions. ISDN.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. If you move an object while in non-geographic positioning mode. ADSL. Note—When you move or place objects. an object can have multiple non-geographic positions in addition to its geographic position. By default. Because each network view can specify its own non-geographic layout. the view shows an object at its physical position.cadfamily. the changes apply to the current layout mode and view only. For example. while View > Layout > Geographic Positioning is enabled—the change affects the object’s geographic position only.com The document is for study only. the change affects the current view only. and configuration utility object has exactly one geographic position. and so on. you can use a non-geographic layout when nodes are too close together to distinguish at a specific zoom level.if tort to your rights. the buildings are arranged by connection type: dial-up.

3—Project Editor Lay Out Nodes Interactively The Layout Nodes Interactively operation enables you to expand. follow these steps. To put all objects in the position of their initial values (when the Layout Network Objects dialog box first opened). 6 Click Run. ➥ The Layout Network Objects dialog box appears. as needed. specify the layout region within which that algorithm will operate. click Undo. click Redo. Figure 3-11 Layout Network Objects Dialog Box 2 From the Algorithm drop-down menu.we will delete ER-3-49 . See Table 3-17 for a description of the interactive layout options. 5 For the Disperse algorithm. This is the “mark” icon for the Expand/Contract and Rotate algorithms.please inform us.com The document is for study only. 3 Select the objects on which you want to operate. 4 Drag the mark icon to the point on the screen where you want to anchor the selected group of objects during the layout operation.if tort to your rights. or rotate objects in a network display to improve visual clarity on the screen. click Undo All.. select the desired interactive layout option (Expand/Contract is the default option). To un-do the previous layout operation..cadfamily. To re-do the last Undo operation. Each iteration will add an “undoable” command to the local Undo stack. ➥ A special green cross icon initially appears in the center of your selection set. 8 Click OK. contract.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Procedure 3-10 Using Interactive Layout to Adjust the Network Display 1 Choose View > Layout > Lay Out Nodes Interactively.0 www. To perform this operation. End of Procedure 3-10 Modeler/Release 14. 7 Repeat Steps 3 through 6.

it is better for subnets with large numbers of sites. the sites in the current subnet are repositioned.if tort to your rights. but not necessarily aesthetic layout. (See Figure 3-12 for an example.cadfamily. • If one or more sites are selected. the sites in the current subnet are repositioned. If there are unconnected groups of sites in the subnet.com The document is for study only.3—Project Editor The Layout Network Objects dialog box provides the following options.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. ER-3-50 www. Table 3-17 Network Layout Options Algorithm Name Expand/Contract Description Moves selected objects away from or toward the green cross “mark” icon Moves selected objects away from or toward the mark icon horizontally Moves selected objects away from or toward the mark icon vertically Rotates (by degrees) the selected objects in a counter-clockwise direction around the mark icon Moves selected objects within the specified layout region away from each other Expand/Contract Horizontally Expand/Contract Vertically Rotate Disperse End of Table 3-17 Lay Out Nodes (Balanced) When you choose View > Layout > Lay Out Nodes (Balanced).com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Lay Out Nodes (Simple) When you choose View > Layout > Lay Out Nodes (Simple).adjust_unconnected_groups preference. trying to produce an aesthetic layout. every site in the current subnet is considered for repositioning.) The algorithm used by this operation is faster and uses less memory than the balanced algorithm used by the Lay Out Nodes (Balanced) operation. only the selected sites are considered for repositioning.0 . Thus.please inform us. trying to produce an illustrative. This step can be disabled with the network_layout. (See Figure 3-12 for an example. You can control which sites are moved as follows: • If no sites are selected. this operation also balances the spacing between the groups.) This operation can make a crowded network easier to work with and is faster than manually repositioning sites.

if tort to your rights.cadfamily.3—Project Editor Figure 3-12 Automatic Node Layout Examples Original layout Balanced layout (appearance after applying the Layout Nodes Automatically (Balanced) operation to the original layout) Simple layout (appearance after applying the Layout Nodes Automatically (Simple) operation to the original layout) Modeler/Release 14.please inform us.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.0 www.we will delete ER-3-51 .com The document is for study only.

0 . Before the core-centric layout is applied (shown in the upper-left of the figure).com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. The core-centric layout operation is even more useful with larger networks. the layout is more meaningful with core nodes placed in the center of the arrangement. Before Core-Centric Layout After Core-Centric Layout ER-3-52 www. The following figure shows an example of a core-centric layout.please inform us.com The document is for study only. However. All other nodes are placed around the core nodes based on the quantity of links. the layout is more meaningful and easier to understand. the layout is arbitrary.3—Project Editor Core-Centric Layout The core-centric Layout operation (View > Layout > Lay Out Nodes (Core Centric)…) allows you to create a meaningful network layout. based on core nodes.if tort to your rights.cadfamily. The layout places core nodes in the center. Figure 3-13 Core-Centric Layout (Example) By placing core nodes in the center. Nodes with no link attachments to the network are placed on the left side of the workspace.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. Nodes attached to the network with only one link are placed furthest from the core nodes. after the core-centric layout is applied (shown in the lower-right of the figure).

cadfamily. display pertinent node and/or link information. 2 Choose View > Layout >Lay Out Nodes (Core Centric)… ➥ The Core Centric Layout dialog box appears. the more compressed the layout. Balloons. balloons can be minimized or hidden to reduce clutter. If no nodes are selected. End of Procedure 3-11 Balloons Simulation results and visualizations can include balloons. The higher the spacing factor. ➥ The layout is applied to the current subnet. After running a simulation or applying a visualization.we will delete ER-3-53 . If one or more nodes are selected. subnets. Selected objects are designated as core nodes.0 www.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Specify a spacing factor by either entering a number in the input field or using the slider bar. • Use Selected Nodes—Select one or more nodes. when expanded. Additionally.com The document is for study only. you can perform the following procedures on the balloons: • Showing and Hiding All Balloons on page ER-3-54 Modeler/Release 14.please inform us.3—Project Editor Core nodes are determined using one of the following methods: • Select Core Nodes with Most Connections—Core nodes are determined based on the quantity of links. 4 Select the Layout button. Nodes with the highest quantity of links are designated as core nodes.if tort to your rights. See Figure 3-13 for an example core-centric layout. “Select core nodes with most connections” displays. and/or utility objects. Figure 3-14 Core Centric Layout Dialog Box 3 Specify the requested information: • Core Node Selection Method—Specifies the method for selecting core nodes. Procedure 3-11 Applying a Core-Centric Layout 1 Enter the subnet to which you want to apply a core-centric layout. “Use Selected Nodes” displays. • Spacing factor input field/slider—Specifies the spacing of the layout (0-100).

choose View > Annotations > Balloons > Hide All. Hiding balloons hides both expanded and minimized balloons. • Displayed balloons (expanded or minimized) are included in a printout of the network (File > Print). Before expanding and/or minimizing balloons. Showing and Hiding All Balloons Balloons can be hidden to reduce clutter. Procedure 3-12 Showing or Hiding All Balloons 1 To show all balloons.please inform us. you can minimize balloons to reduce clutter and to select the balloons that you want to view. choose View > Annotations > Balloons > Show All.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.if tort to your rights. • Balloons are not saved when exiting a scenario. • Balloons are not included with a copied node or link. • Balloons are not included in a duplicated scenario. Procedure 3-13 Expanding or Minimizing Balloons 1 To expand balloons that are minimized: • Select a minimized balloon to expand a specific balloon. see Showing and Hiding All Balloons on page ER-3-54. you must show all balloons. • Select node(s) and/or link(s) to expand the associated balloons. For more information.0 .com The document is for study only. Additionally.cadfamily. Balloon positions are retained until balloons are deleted. Note—Hidden balloons cannot be expanded or minimized. 2 To hide all balloons.3—Project Editor • Expanding and Minimizing Balloons on page ER-3-54 • Deleting All Balloons on page ER-3-55 Note the following characteristics when working with balloons: • Balloons can be repositioned in the workspace by dragging them with the mouse. ER-3-54 www.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. End of Procedure 3-12 Expanding and Minimizing Balloons You can expand balloons to view the information they display.

➥ All balloons are deleted.please inform us.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. • Visual arrangement of objects in workspace—To highlight a specific aspect of the network. A view can exclude irrelevant objects.3—Project Editor 2 To minimize a balloon that is expanded. a view might arrange and group objects without regard to their physical locations.we will delete ER-3-55 . A network view most commonly affects the following properties: • Show/hide objects in the Project Editor workspace—Normally. so the objects exist but are not visible. Modeler/Release 14. End of Procedure 3-14 Set View for Subnet/Network A network view is a predefined set of visualization settings. double-click on the balloon. if the current view excludes all demands. and you choose View > Demand Objects > Show All. the results include balloons from both simulation runs. Procedure 3-14 Deleting All Balloons 1 Choose View > Annotations > Balloons > Clear All. You can apply a network view to reduce visual clutter and highlight information of interest in your network. the demands do not appear because they are excluded from the view. See Geographic Positioning on page ER-3-47 for more information. the procedure cannot be undone.0 www. Deleting All Balloons Deleting all balloons is useful before rerunning a simulation. If you do not delete balloons before rerunning a simulation.if tort to your rights. The current view overrides other show/hide settings in the Project Editor.com The document is for study only. End of Procedure 3-13 Note—The size of minimized balloons (in pixels) is set in the Edit Visualization Preferences dialog box (View > Edit Display Preferences). Note—After balloons are deleted. a view shows a subset of all objects in the network. For example.cadfamily.

choose View > Refresh Current View. bitmap.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. or change the properties of any network object. Visio to XML. If you add. The View menu includes operations for hiding some types of objects such as demands or annotations.com The document is for study only. locations IA file Find Top Statistics Yes No Yes Exports only objects visible in the current view Exports all objects. This browser has an “Include Hidden” and an “Ignore Views” checkbox. Table 3-18 Effects of Network Views on Different Objects and Operations Object Type / Operation Annotations Connections Browser Delete Unconnected Nodes (Topology menu) Demands Affected by View? No Yes No Comments Always visible.please inform us. the view name appears in the title bar.0 . remove. regardless of the current view Yes Can be excluded from the current view (not shown in Project Editor). View settings override Show/Hide settings.3—Project Editor You can apply a view to the current subnet only or to the entire network.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. which enable you to determine which objects appear in the browser treeview. spreadsheet. Export Topology to HTML. regardless of the current view You can configure to show all objects or only those visible in the current view Shows only flows included in the current view Can be excluded from the current view (not shown in Project Editor). View settings override Show/Hide settings.if tort to your rights. Can be excluded from the current view (not shown in Project Editor) Traffic Center Links Yes Yes Network Browser Yes Nodes Yes Paths Yes Subnetworks Yes ER-3-56 www. A network view has no effect on network evaluation and prediction operations. this ensures that Project Editor reflects the current view accurately. When the scenario or subnetwork has a view applied. Note—A network view affects the visual representation of the network and some related options (see Table 3-18).cadfamily. Discrete event simulations and Flow Analysis operations consider all objects in the network and use their physical locations to generate results. regardless of the current view Shows only connections that are visible in the current view Inspects all nodes in the network. Can be excluded from the current view (not shown in Project Editor) Can be excluded from the current view (not shown in Project Editor).

com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.if tort to your rights. see Object Layering on page ER-3-41. solid.3—Project Editor Table 3-18 Effects of Network Views on Different Objects and Operations (Continued) Object Type / Operation Trajectories Verify Links View Results Affected by View? No No Yes Comments Always visible. feet. regardless of the current view Inspects all links in the network. A layer appears in front of (and may obscure) all layers behind it. Sets the number of units between each grid line. Table 3-19 Background Properties Dialog Box Property Color Division Drawing Resolution Subnet Layers Description Sets the color of the grid lines. arc seconds. regardless of the current view If “Ignore Views” is unchecked. in the top subnetwork.com The document is for study only. The following table lists the properties that can be set.cadfamily. However. the units are the same as the parent subnetwork’s. or dashed. meters.please inform us. Sets the grid lines to be disabled (hidden).we will delete ER-3-57 . Typically.0 www. End of Table 3-19 Modeler/Release 14. the View Results dialog box shows only statistics for objects visible in the current view End of Table 3-18 Set Background Properties Use the View > Background > Set Properties operation to redefine the appearance of the subnetwork currently displayed in the Project Editor. or miles. The units can be degrees. By default. kilometers. the units must be degrees. background properties are originally set by the Startup Wizard. For more information about layers. Units Sets the scale on which the grid is based. Adjusts the zoom level of the current subnetwork view in pixels per unit. Sets which layers are shown in the network view and the order in which the layers appear.

please inform us.0 .we will delete Modeler/Release 14.if tort to your rights. the links may interfere with the dragging and repositioning of the network objects. ➥ Changes made to a background property take effect immediately. For example. 2 To change units.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. if there are numerous links. after an import. displaying the properties of the current view. Procedure 3-15 Setting Background Properties 1 Choose View > Background > Set Properties… ➥ A dialog box opens. you should set background properties before creating a model. ER-3-58 www.cadfamily. Note—The View > Background > Set Properties operation does not change the overall scale of an existing network model or the defined distances between nodes. Figure 3-15 View Properties Dialog Box 3 Set the Resolution. Also. To avoid confusion.com The document is for study only. drag the objects to the new locations. as necessary. and Subnet Layers. However. changing the units also change the resolution and division properties (to keep the grid lines in the same apparent location). To adjust the distance between nodes after background properties have been changed. changing the resolution can cause the model to “disappear”. forcing you to scroll the editor window to find it. Drawing. select an option from the Units pull-down menu. there is a need to move nodes/subnets in the workspace. Division.3—Project Editor Setting some of the background properties automatically affects other background properties. End of Procedure 3-15 Show All/Hide All Links Frequently. Color. A subnetwork can have units of degrees only if its parent subnetwork has units of degrees.

3—Project Editor You can toggle the display of links in the Project Editor. When satisfied with the node layout. However. and links do not display in the Bird’s-eye view. links do display in the Network Showcase between featured network objects. choose View > Links > Hide All • To display the links. Modeler/Release 14. it is much easier to reposition nodes/subnets. links are not listed in the Network Browser (unless you choose to display hidden objects). choose View > Links > Show All Hiding and showing links does not change the link bundling display or settings. When links are hidden.please inform us.if tort to your rights. When links are hidden.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. you can show the links. • To hide the links.we will delete ER-3-59 .com The document is for study only.cadfamily.0 www.

if tort to your rights.3—Project Editor Show Bird’s-Eye View You can quickly focus and adjust the zoom level of the Project Editor using the Network Bird’s Eye View.please inform us. There are two types of Bird’s-eye View windows: • Embedded—Click the Embedded Bird’s-eye Viewer button to toggle display of the window • Floating—Choose View > Show Bird’s-eye View ER-3-60 www.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.cadfamily.com The document is for study only. The Bird’s-Eye View window is useful for • Specifying a desirable zoom level • Finding areas of interest in subnets with many objects or with a lot of unoccupied space • Drilling down into multiple nested subnets.0 .we will delete Modeler/Release 14.

com The document is for study only.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Modeler/Release 14.please inform us.3—Project Editor The following figure shows both types Bird’s-eye Views.if tort to your rights.we will delete ER-3-61 .0 www. the Bird’s-Eye view opens a new tabbed page to show the geographic extent of the subnet. Figure 3-16 Bird’s-Eye Views: Embedded and Floating Embedded Viewer Click the Embedded Bird’s-eye Viewer button to toggle the display of the Embedded Bird’s-eye Viewer Floating Viewer As you drill-down into a subnet.cadfamily. Note—The birds-eye viewer is intended to be used in geographic subnets (with fixed bounds) and not with logical subnets (which are boundless).

com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. To display/hide the network browser. Figure 3-18 highlights features of the Network Browser. cutting.please inform us.3—Project Editor Show Network Browser The Network Browser organizes and displays network objects in a treeview.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. The treeview makes it easy to find and edit objects. especially in large networks with multiple layers of subnets. Thus any changes you make to the network (such as selecting. editing. Figure 3-17 Network Browser and Network Topology Network Browser Network Topology The Network Browser and the Network Topology provide different views of the same network. ER-3-62 www. choose View > Show Network Browser.cadfamily.com The document is for study only. The following figure shows a typical Network Browser.0 . or pasting an object) are reflected in both views.if tort to your rights.

3—Project Editor Figure 3-18 Network Browser Arrange-By pull-down menu Search field Because a demand is connected to two nodes. enter a string in the Search field and press Enter. it appears as a child of two parents Click the Settings button to show/hide checkbox options In this example. Type ahead searching starts with the selected item. only nodes are shown as direct children of subnets. because the Network Browser is arranged by Nodes. Note that the type ahead searching feature considers displayed (non-hidden) items only.com The document is for study only. Matching objects are selected/highlighted. Modeler/Release 14.cadfamily.please inform us.if tort to your rights. • Type Ahead Searching—Locate items in a treeview by typing the first one or more characters of the name. Connected objects appear as children of the top-level object Right-click on an object to edit it Feature in Network Showcase checkbox You can do the following in the Network Browser: • Search for objects—To search for an object (i.. click on it. • Select one object—To select one object. the search cycles through the treeview.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.we will delete ER-3-63 .0 www.e. subnet or node) by name. If you repeat the same characters.

then drag the selection to a subnet icon in the treeview or the workspace.cadfamily. and then click the last object (for consecutive objects). — Expand Tree checkbox—Check this box to expand the treeview to display the nodes/links. click the Settings button to show/hide the checkbox options. • Edit objects—To edit one object. — Click the first object. see Network Showcase. View > Demands > Hide All). • Zoom to an object in the Project Editor—Double-click on an object in the treeview to zoom to that object in the Network Topology. For more information. To edit multiple objects of the same type.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. right-click on the object and choose Edit Attributes or Advanced Edit Attributes. • Feature in Showcase—To feature network objects in the active showcase.0 . — Ignore Views checkbox—Check this box to show objects that are excluded from the current network view. • Show or hide objects in the Network Browser—There are several methods for showing/hiding objects in the Network Browser. • Move nodes or subnets to a new parent subnet—Select one or more nodes in the treeview. right-click on an object and choose Edit Similar <object_types>s.com The document is for study only. do one of the following: — Hold down the Ctrl key and click on each object (for non-consecutive objects). — Right-click on an object and choose Select Similar <object_types>. hold down the Shift key. Uncheck this box to contract the treeview. ER-3-64 www. select the corresponding checkbox. — Include Hidden checkbox—Check this box to show paths. — Show Only Selected checkbox—Check this box to display only those objects that are currently selected.) — Arrange-by pull-down menu—Use this menu to display only items of interest (such as IP routers or servers). — Click and drag the cursor to select multiple items in the treeview.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.if tort to your rights.please inform us. (For the methods involving a checkbox. demands and cell systems that are hidden as a result of settings in the View menu (for example.3—Project Editor • Select multiple objects—To select multiple objects.

if tort to your rights. suppose the Arrange-by menu is set to Nodes. For example. When the Network Browser is opened in a project for the first time. demands or paths) appear as children of the node.please inform us. Selects the parent node • Organize the treeview with different hierarchies—Set the Arrange-by pull-down menu to organize the treeview by object type or other criteria.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.0 www. even if the Network Browser is closed. such as “Routing protocols”. The treeview then displays all nodes as direct children within each subnet.we will delete ER-3-65 . the Network Browser reuses your previous settings.3—Project Editor • Keyboard Shortcuts—Use the following shortcut keys to quickly navigate through a treeview. Note—Search strings and selected objects are not saved with the Network Browser. Some of the Arrange-by pull-down menu options. Collapses a treeview node. Modeler/Release 14.(minus) <Right Arrow> <Left Arrow> <Backspace> Description Expands a treeview node.cadfamily. When the Network Browser is reopened during the current and future sessions.com The document is for study only. The Network Browser settings are saved with the project. Collapses the treeview node and selects the parent node. In these arrangements. Expands the treeview node and selects the first child node. Any objects connected to a node (such as links. Shortcut Key + (plus) . display objects in arbitrary groups based on attribute values or other object characteristics. the settings are saved with the project. subnet objects are usually not displayed and all qualifying objects are displayed side-by-side below a group or subgroup folder.

Network objects are added to a showcase by selecting the objects in either the Network Topology or Network Browser.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. There is no limit to the number of showcases that can be defined for a scenario. • Network Showcase Pop-Up Menu—describes the pop-up menu options.3—Project Editor Network Showcase The Network Showcase enables users to focus on multiple areas of interest within their network. without disturbing the underlying hierarchical structure. Overview of the Network Showcase Each scenario can include multiple showcases. without consideration of subnets or geographical layouts.cadfamily. For more information. • Network Showcase Example Workflow and Example Workflow Steps: Using Network Showcase—describe a typical Network Showcase workflow and the associated procedures. • Network Showcase Procedures—describes procedures.com The document is for study only. see Removing Featured Objects from a Showcase on page ER-3-79.please inform us. grouped by workflow categories. • The Default showcase cannot be deleted.if tort to your rights. Figure 3-19 shows a typical Network Showcase interface and how it relates to the Network Topology and Network Browser.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. Additionally. each scenario includes a “Default” showcase. The Network Showcase is especially helpful when you want to visualize a selected portion of the network in a separate space. This section includes the following topics: • Overview of the Network Showcase—describes the concepts and capabilities of the Network Showcase.0 . To remove objects from the Default showcase. ER-3-66 www. Note the following characteristics of the Default showcase: • The Default showcase cannot be renamed or displayed in a floating window without first copying the showcase. see Copying a Showcase on page ER-3-76.

0 www. Click on the Network Showcase pull-down menu to: • Display another showcase for the scenario • Create a new showcase • Import a featured object set and and configuration settings • Duplicate the current showcase • Rename the current showcase • Delete the current showcase Showcase Floating Window Modeler/Release 14. choose “Open In Window” to display the showcase in a floating window. The blue outline indicates mode for adding “featured” objects.cadfamily.we will delete ER-3-67 . or Network Browser also selects the object in the other representations.please inform us. Network Showcase “Featured” objects appear larger than “associate” objects. From the Network Showcase pop-up menu. “Featured” objects also appear in color with blue labels.if tort to your rights.3—Project Editor Figure 3-19 Network Showcase: User Interface and Relation to Network Topology/Network Browser Network Browser Network Topology Selecting an object in the Network Topology.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only. Network Showcase. Select the checkbox in the Network Browser to “feature” the corresponding object in the active showcase.

Featured links. path.cadfamily. However. object positions are not maintained from one session to another. thickness. Figure 3-21 shows an example showcase in a floating window. link. Associate nodes are displayed as small gray-scale icons with small black labels.0 . demand. node. link. the connection is shown in the showcase. You can reposition objects within the showcase. node. paths. Additionally. Since the showcase provides a view of selected objects. you can display the showcase in a floating window. • Associate Objects—Network objects are included in a showcase because of their type (node. in a showcase. black lines. link. Featured nodes are displayed as large color icons with blue labels. Associate links. demand. demand) and distance (number of hops) from the featured object. Figure 3-20 Concepts of the Showcase Featured Object A featured object is a network object (subnet. and line style as in the Network Topology. After configuring and adding featured objects to a showcase. and demands are displayed with the same color. ER-3-68 www. if the objects are connected in any way. A hop is the distance from the featured object to the next node (an associated object). subnet) that you specifically choose to include in a showcase. paths. link. you can resize the display of the showcase by sliding the divider bar between the Network Showcase and the Network Topology.3—Project Editor Showcases display two types of network objects: • Featured Objects—Network objects (node. path. path. dotted. you can simultaneously view objects from different subnets. However.com The document is for study only. In the example.if tort to your rights. This example shows “1 hop”. Associate Object An associate object is a network object that is included in the showcase because of its type (subnet. Featured objects appear in the showcase using automatic layout.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. you cannot scroll through or zoom in/out of the showcase pane. and demands are displayed with thin. In the Network Topology. subnet) and distance (number of hops) from the featured object.please inform us. path. the showcase displays objects from two subnets (Atlanta and DC) and shows how the objects in the subnets are connected. generally you cannot view objects from different subnets at the same time. or demand) that you specifically choose to include in a showcase. However.

com The document is for study only.we will delete ER-3-69 .cadfamily. see: • Network Showcase Example Workflow • Example Workflow Steps: Using Network Showcase • Network Showcase Procedures • Network Showcase Pop-Up Menu • Show Network Browser Network Showcase Example Workflow After defining a hierarchical network topology (either manually or imported from another source)..if tort to your rights. you can simultaneously view specific network objects from different subnets. For more information.please inform us. all ATM routers or HP servers) Modeler/Release 14.3—Project Editor Figure 3-21 Example of a Showcase in a Floating Window Atlanta subnet objects Link Connection between Subnets DC subnet objects The Network Showcase allows you to view objects from different subnets at the same time. Use the Network Showcase to • show the path between two network devices • display similar network devices (e.0 www.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.g.

please inform us. see Overview of the Network Showcase on page ER-3-66.3—Project Editor Figure 3-22 shows the typical workflow for showing the path between two network devices. Figure 3-22 Network Showcase Workflow—Path Between Two Network Devices Start Step 1: Access the Network Showcase Interface Step 2: Create the Showcase Step 3: Configure the Showcase Step 4: Feature Objects in the Showcase Step 5: Analyze/Present the Showcase End For a description of the workflow steps.cadfamily.if tort to your rights.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. ER-3-70 www. Example Workflow Steps: Using Network Showcase Use the following workflow steps to show the path between two network devices using the Network Showcase. see Example Workflow Steps: Using Network Showcase on page ER-3-70.com The document is for study only.0 . • Workflow Example Step 1: Access the Network Showcase Interface • Workflow Example Step 2: Create the Showcase • Workflow Example Step 3: Configure the Showcase • Workflow Example Step 4: Feature Objects in the Showcase • Workflow Example Step 5: Analyze/Present the Showcase For an overview discussion of the Network Showcase.

Procedure 3-16 Workflow Example: Accessing the Network Showcase Interface 1 Choose View > Show Network Showcase. the Network Showcase will be configured as follows: • network object types to feature—Specifies the network objects that can be “featured” (added) in the showcase.3—Project Editor Workflow Example Step 1: Access the Network Showcase Interface After defining the network topology. For more information. see Featured Object. Procedure 3-17 Workflow Example: Creating a Showcase 1 From the Network Showcase pull-down menu. End of Procedure 3-17 Workflow Example Step 3: Configure the Showcase Configuring the showcase allows you to customize characteristics and behavior of the showcase.0 www. see Creating a Showcase on page ER-3-75. For this example. only nodes and links will be “featurable”. Procedure 3-18 Workflow Example: Configuring a Showcase 1 Define network object types to feature—By default.cadfamily. 2 Enter the name for the new showcase and click OK. paths. For additional information. • background color—Defines the background color for the showcase.we will delete ER-3-71 . see Associate Object. For this example. links. you can access the Network Showcase Interface. ➥ The new showcase appears in the Network Showcase pane. nodes. End of Procedure 3-16 Workflow Example Step 2: Create the Showcase Create a showcase for displaying “featured” objects. For more information. select New… ➥ The Enter Name dialog box appears.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.if tort to your rights. For more information. and demands can be featured. Modeler/Release 14.com The document is for study only. • network object types to associate with featured objects—Specifies the network object type(s) that can be included in a showcase as objects associated with featured objects. see Accessing the Network Showcase Interface on page ER-3-74.please inform us.

For this example.1 Right-click on an empty space in the showcase and choose Types To Feature > Demands. nodes up to three hops away will be displayed in the showcase. (In the Network Topology pane.0 . which makes it easier to see items in the showcase. nodes up to 3 hops away and links can be included in the showcase as objects associated with featured objects. End of Procedure 3-18 Workflow Example Step 4: Feature Objects in the Showcase Feature objects in the showcase. Since “And Nodes 3 Hops Away” and the “Attached Links” options are selected. 2. For more information.1 Enter the subnet. ➥ The checkmark next to the Demands option is removed. 3.cadfamily. For this example. ➥ The background color changes from gray to white.3—Project Editor 1.if tort to your rights. two objects from different subnets will be featured in the showcase.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.2 Right-click on an empty space in the showcase and choose Types To Feature > Paths. the background color will be changed to white. only nodes and links can be featured in the showcase. ➥ The checkmark next to the Paths option is removed. double-click on the subnet icon to enter the subnet.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. see Defining a Background Color for a Showcase on page ER-3-85. see Defining Network Object Types to Feature on page ER-3-83.) ER-3-72 www. Since there are checkmarks next to the Nodes and Links options. 2 Define network object types to associate with featured objects—Specifies the network object types that are included in a showcase as objects associated with feature objects. For more information.1 Right-click on an empty space in the showcase and choose Associations To Show > And Nodes 3 Hops Away.1 Right-click on an empty space in showcase and choose Background Color > Use White. 1. Procedure 3-19 Workflow Example: Featuring Objects in a Showcase 1 Feature a node from any subnet: 1.please inform us. 3 Define background color—Defines the background color. For more information. In this example. see Defining Network Object Types to Associate with Featured Objects on page ER-3-83.com The document is for study only.

com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. see Featuring Objects in a Showcase on page ER-3-78. The showcase displays both featured nodes and their associate objects. Additionally.please inform us. Network Showcase Procedures You can use the following procedures when working with the Network Showcase: Accessing the Network Showcase Interface • Accessing the Network Showcase Interface Managing a Showcase • Creating a Showcase • Copying a Showcase • Renaming a Showcase Modeler/Release 14. For more information. To display a showcase in a floating window. the selected node appears in the showcase.com The document is for study only. where <showcase name> is the name of the showcase that you want displayed in a floating window. Notice that the showcase displays selected nodes from different subnets.cadfamily. included with the node are associate nodes and links up to three hops away. choose View > Open Network Showcase Window > <showcase name>.3—Project Editor 1. see Displaying a Showcase in a Floating Window. which cannot be done in the Network Topology.1 Enter a different subnet. ➥ The selected node appears in the showcase. 2 Feature a node from a difference subnet: 2.2 Right-click on a node and choose Featured In Showcase > <showcase name>.0 www. End of Procedure 3-19 Workflow Example Step 5: Analyze/Present the Showcase Analyze the showcase to determine that it shows the information that you want it to show. Included with the node. maximize the floating window for a better view. are associate nodes and links up to three hops away.we will delete ER-3-73 . Note that the same procedure can be accomplished using the checkboxes next to nodes in the Network Browser.2 Right-click on a node and choose Featured In Showcase > <showcase name>. For additional information. When presenting the showcase to others.if tort to your rights. ➥ Again. 2.

0 .if tort to your rights. See Figure 3-19.3—Project Editor • Deleting a Showcase • Displaying a Showcase in a Floating Window Configuring a Showcase • Defining Network Object Types to Feature • Defining Network Object Types to Associate with Featured Objects • Automatically Featuring Selected Network Objects • Defining Layout Effort • Defining a Background Color for a Showcase • Applying a Predefined Network View to a Showcase • Displaying Legend Information Associated with a Network View • Applying the Network Topology Visualization to a Showcase Featuring Objects in a Showcase • Featuring Objects in a Showcase • Removing Featured Objects from a Showcase • Selecting Featured Objects in a Showcase • Exporting a Featured Object Set and Configuration Settings • Importing a Featured Object Set and Configuration Settings Accessing the Network Showcase Interface You can easily display or hide the Network Showcase. ➥ The Network Showcase appears below the Network Topology. The following procedure describes how to display and hide the Network Showcase. Procedure 3-20 Displaying/Hiding the Network Showcase 1 Perform one of the following tasks: • Choose View > Show Network Showcase.com The document is for study only.cadfamily.please inform us.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. ER-3-74 www.

3—Project Editor • Click on the divider bar below the Network Topology and slide the bar up or down.) End of Procedure 3-21 Modeler/Release 14. ➥ The new showcase displays. (See Featuring Objects in a Showcase on page ER-3-78.cadfamily.we will delete ER-3-75 .please inform us.if tort to your rights. repeat one of the above tasks. The showcase is empty until you feature objects in it. Click the divider bar below the Network Topology pane and slide the bar up or down.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. If the Network Showcase is hidden. End of Procedure 3-20 Creating a Showcase A project scenario can include multiple showcases.com The document is for study only. Note—To hide the Network Showcase. the divider bar appears at the bottom of the Network Topology pane. select New… ➥ The Enter Name dialog box appears. Procedure 3-21 Creating a Showcase 1 From the Network Showcase pull-down menu. 2 Enter the name for the new showcase and click OK.0 www.

we will delete Modeler/Release 14. ➥ The showcase is renamed. ➥ The copy of the showcase with the specified name displays. Procedure 3-23 Renaming a Showcase 1 From the Network Showcase pull-down menu. The rename option is helpful when you want to give a showcase a name that better identifies the featured objects. select Rename… • Right-click on an empty space in the showcase and choose Rename This Showcase… ➥ The Enter Name dialog box appears. 2 Perform one of the following: • From the Network Showcase pull-down menu. End of Procedure 3-22 For more information. Procedure 3-22 Copying a Showcase 1 From the Network Showcase pull-down menu. The copied showcase includes all objects and configuration settings defined in the original showcase.cadfamily. select Duplicate… ➥ The Enter Name dialog box appears. see: • Creating a Showcase Renaming a Showcase You can rename a showcase. 3 Enter the name for the copied showcase and click OK.3—Project Editor Copying a Showcase You can copy the contents of a showcase to a new showcase. 2 From the Network Showcase pull-down menu.The copy option is useful when you want to create a new showcase that is similar to an existing showcase.com The document is for study only. select the showcase that you want to copy.0 .please inform us. select the showcase that you want to rename. End of Procedure 3-23 ER-3-76 www. 3 Enter the new name for the showcase and click OK.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.if tort to your rights.

3—Project Editor Note—The Default showcase cannot be renamed.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. ➥ The specified showcase is deleted. the system prompts for a new name and copies the showcase to a new showcase with the specified name.if tort to your rights.please inform us. see Copying a Showcase on page ER-3-76. 3 Click OK. you can delete it. A typical showcase floating window is shown in Figure 3-19 and Figure 3-21. Displaying a Showcase in a Floating Window For a better view. select Delete… • Right-click on an empty space in the showcase and choose Delete This Showcase… ➥ A confirmation dialog box appears to confirm the deletion. see Removing Featured Objects from a Showcase. For more information. see: • Creating a Showcase Deleting a Showcase When a showcase is no longer useful.0 www.we will delete ER-3-77 . End of Procedure 3-24 Note—The Default showcase cannot be deleted. To clear the contents of the Default showcase.cadfamily. select the showcase that you want to delete. 2 Perform one of the following: • From the Network Showcase pull-down menu. If you select the rename option when the Default showcase is displayed. Modeler/Release 14. Procedure 3-24 Deleting a Network Showcase 1 From the Network Showcase pull-down menu. For more information. you can display the contents of a showcase in a floating window.com The document is for study only.

➥ The showcase displays in a floating window.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.cadfamily. then that showcase is configured to exclude objects of that object’s type as featured objects. The showcase floating window displays until you either close the window or select the showcase from the Network Showcase pull-down menu. right-click on an empty space in the floating window and choose Show Inside Editor. Note— — If a showcase name is dimmed and not selectable.3—Project Editor After a showcase is displayed in a floating window.please inform us. ER-3-78 www.0 . For more information.if tort to your rights. Procedure 3-25 Displaying a Showcase in a Floating Window 1 Perform one of the following • Choose View > Open Network Showcase Window > <showcase name>. • Right-click on an empty space in the showcase and choose Open In Window. If you select the Open In Window option when the Default showcase is displayed. To display the contents of the floating window in the Network Showcase pane.com The document is for study only. For more information. right-click on an object and choose Featured In Showcase > <Network Showcase name>. you can continue to define the showcase and the objects featured in the showcase. End of Procedure 3-25 Note—The Default showcase cannot be displayed in a floating window. the system prompts for a new name and copies the network objects to a showcase with the specified name. A showcase cannot appear in more than one place at the same time. then before displaying the network objects in a floating window. where <showcase name> is the name of the showcase that you want displayed in a floating window. see Copying a Showcase on page ER-3-76.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. — Selecting an already checked showcase stops featuring that object in the specified showcase. see Defining Network Object Types to Feature on page ER-3-83. Featuring Objects in a Showcase There are many methods for specifying a Featured Object in a showcase: • Select an Object and Specify the Showcase Name In the Network Topology or Network Showcase.

see Automatically Featuring Selected Network Objects on page ER-3-84.) If not already displayed. click an object checkbox to feature the object in the active showcase. — In a showcase. right-click on an associate object and choose Feature In This Showcase. For more information. — In the Network Showcase.if tort to your rights. (See Figure 3-19. Network Topology.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. For more information. Then right-click on an empty space in the showcase and choose Feature Selected Objects.com The document is for study only. ➥ The selected object is removed from the showcase. see: • Displaying a Showcase in a Floating Window Removing Featured Objects from a Showcase You can remove one or more Featured Objects from a showcase. select one or more associate objects. or Network Browser. • Change an Associate Object to a Featured Object — In a showcase. double-click on an associate object. the Network Showcase is automatically shown when an object checkbox is selected in the Network Browser.cadfamily.please inform us.3—Project Editor • Select the Object Checkbox in the Network Browser In the Network Browser. When the Network Showcase is automatically shown for the first time in a scenario. the Default showcase is displayed.0 www. as described in the following procedures: • Removing a Single Featured Object from a Showcase • Removing Multiple Feature Objects from a Showcase • Removing All Objects from a Showcase Procedure 3-26 Removing a Single Featured Object from a Showcase 1 Right-click on the object that you want to remove from the showcase and select Stop Featuring In This Showcase. End of Procedure 3-26 Modeler/Release 14. • Use the Auto-Feature Mode The Auto-Feature mode allows you to feature objects in the current showcase by simply selecting objects in the Network Topology or Network Browser.we will delete ER-3-79 .

You can select one or more objects in the showcase to perform an action on the objects (i. ➥ All objects are removed from the showcase. edit attributes). • To select all featured objects. click on the object. 2 Right-click on an empty space in the showcase and choose Stop Featuring Selected Objects. hold down the Control key and click on the objects that you want to select.if tort to your rights. ➥ The selected objects are removed from the showcase.com The document is for study only. • To select multiple objects.0 . ER-3-80 www.3—Project Editor Procedure 3-27 Removing Multiple Feature Objects from a Showcase 1 Select the objects that you want to remove from the showcase. Or.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. it is also selected in the Network Topology and Network Browser. Perform one of the following actions to select object(s) in a showcase: • To select a single object.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Selecting objects in a showcase is similar to selecting objects in the Network Topology and Network Browser.please inform us.e. right-click on an empty space in the showcase and choose Select Featured Objects.cadfamily. hold down the left-mouse button and draw a selection box around the objects you want to select. Use one of the following methods: • Hold down the Control key and click on the objects that you want to remove. End of Procedure 3-27 Procedure 3-28 Removing All Objects from a Showcase 1 Right-click on an empty space in the showcase and choose Stop Featuring All Objects.. End of Procedure 3-28 Selecting Featured Objects in a Showcase When an object is selected in the showcase. • Hold down the left-mouse button and draw a selection box around the objects that you want to remove.

• Importing a Featured Object Set into an Existing Showcase—Imports only the set of featured objects. The Network Showcase includes two types of imports: • Importing Configuration Settings and a Featured Object Set into a New Showcase—Imports configuration settings (types to feature. Note—Regardless of the import type. layout effect. then that object is not included in the showcase. only objects defined in the current project scenario are imported. layout effort. Additionally..com The document is for study only. associations to show. and background color) and a set of featured objects into a new showcase. Featured objects already defined in the showcase are retained.0 www.e. If an object is in the featured object set file but is not defined in the current project scenario. select the showcase that you want to export the featured objects and configuration settings from. see: • Importing a Featured Object Set and Configuration Settings Importing a Featured Object Set and Configuration Settings Importing Featured Objects and configuration settings quickly re-creates a particular showcase. Configuration settings are not imported. the export includes configuration settings (i.if tort to your rights.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. and background color). ➥ The export file is saved in the specified location.we will delete ER-3-81 . Modeler/Release 14. ➥ The Save As dialog box appears. associations to show. End of Procedure 3-29 For more information.please inform us.cadfamily. The export featured object file can be imported into the same scenario or a different scenario to quickly re-create a particular showcase.3—Project Editor Exporting a Featured Object Set and Configuration Settings Exporting Featured Objects saves a list of the featured objects to a file for future use. auto-feature network selection mode. Procedure 3-29 Exporting a Featured Object Set 1 From the Network Showcase pull-down menu. auto-feature network selection mode. 2 Right-click on an empty space in the showcase and choose Export Featured Set. types to feature. 3 Specify the name and location of the export file and choose Save.

2 Right-click on an empty space in the showcase and choose Import Featured Set. 3 Locate and select the featured object set file that you want to import and choose OK.if tort to your rights. The new showcase appears containing the configuration settings and featured objects from the selected import file. 2 Locate and select the featured object set file that you want to import and choose OK.please inform us. select the showcase to which you want to import featured objects. End of Procedure 3-30 Procedure 3-31 Importing a Featured Object Set into an Existing Showcase 1 From the Network Showcase pull-down menu.cadfamily. ➥ The Import Selection File dialog box appears. select Import… ➥ The Import Showcase dialog box appears.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.0 .com The document is for study only. 3 Enter the name of the showcase. ➥ The featured objects are imported into the showcase. End of Procedure 3-31 For more information. ➥ The Enter Name dialog box appears.3—Project Editor Procedure 3-30 Importing Configuration Settings and a Featured Object Set into a New Showcase 1 From the Network Showcase pull-down menu.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. see: • Exporting a Featured Object Set and Configuration Settings • Creating a Showcase ER-3-82 www.

Additionally.) If a network object type is not selected. Procedure 3-32 Defining the Network Object Types to Feature in a Showcase 1 Right-click on an empty space in the showcase and choose Types To Feature. Nodes. this option is selected. Associate Objects appear as minimized objects.3—Project Editor Defining Network Object Types to Feature You can define the network object type(s) that can be featured (added) in each showcase in a scenario.please inform us. To feature all objects in a subnet. for node objects. By default. the subnet contents are not automatically featured.we will delete ER-3-83 . select one of the following: • Attached Nodes—Indicates to not include associate node objects.if tort to your rights.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. (See Featured Object.com The document is for study only. • And Nodes 2 Hops Away—Indicates to include associate node objects up to 2 hops away from the featured object. End of Procedure 3-32 Defining Network Object Types to Associate with Featured Objects You can define the network object type(s) that can be included in each showcase as objects associated with featured objects. 2 Select one or more of the options: • Nodes • Links • Paths • Demands • Subnets Note—When a subnet is featured. see Selecting Featured Objects in a Showcase. Links. 2 For nodes. all objects of that type are removed from the showcase. By default. Modeler/Release 14. then that object type cannot be featured (added) in the showcase as a featured object. • And Nodes 1 Hop Away—Indicates to include associate node objects up to 1 hop away from the featured object.cadfamily. Paths.0 www. Procedure 3-33 Defining the Network Object Types to Associate with Featured Objects in a Showcase 1 Right-click on an empty space in the showcase and choose Associations To Show. and Demands are selected. Note—When you unselect an object type. you can specify the number of hops to include for associate node objects.

End of Procedure 3-34 Note—When Auto-Feature mode is turned on.cadfamily.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.if tort to your rights.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. • Attached Paths—Indicates to include associate path objects.com The document is for study only. (Click an object again to unselect it. turn off the mode by right-clicking on an empty space in the showcase and choose Auto-Feature Network Showcase. ➥ The showcase outline changes from blue to red. The Auto-Feature mode is useful when you have many objects to add to a showcase.3—Project Editor • And Nodes 3 Hops Away—Indicates to include associate node objects up to 3 hops away from the featured objects. ER-3-84 www. click on the object that you want featured in the showcase. you cannot select objects in the showcase pane. By default.0 . You can only select objects in the Network Topology and Network Browser. select the showcase to which you want to feature (add) objects. End of Procedure 3-33 Automatically Featuring Selected Network Objects The Auto-Feature mode allows you to specify Featured Objects in the current showcase by simply selecting the object in the Network Topology or Network Browser. To add multiple objects. • Attached Demands—Indicates to include associate Demand objects.please inform us. 3 For objects other than nodes. Procedure 3-34 Automatically Featuring Selected Network Objects in a Showcase 1 From the Network Showcase pull-down menu.) 4 After adding featured objects. this option is selected. select one or more of the following: • Attached Links—Indicates to include associate link objects. hold down the Control key and click on the objects. 3 In the Network Topology or Network Browser. 2 Right-click on an empty space in the showcase and choose Auto-Feature Network Showcase.

com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.3—Project Editor Defining Layout Effort When a network object is “featured” (added) in a showcase. Defining a background color can make the showcase easier to see and differentiates it from other showcases. You can define the level of effort used to produce the layout for each showcase in a scenario. End of Procedure 3-35 Defining a Background Color for a Showcase You can define the background color of each showcase. • Use White—Changes the background color in the showcase to white. ➥ The objects in the showcase are automatically repositioned using the specified effort. Procedure 3-36 Defining the Background Color of a Showcase 1 From the Network Showcase pull-down menu. depending on the number of objects in the showcase. The default color is defined by the ui_colors.com The document is for study only. select the showcase for which you want to define a background color. select the showcase for which you want to define layout effort. 2 Right-click on an empty space in the showcase and choose Background Color. 2 Right-click on an empty space in the showcase and choose Layout Effort.0 www.cadfamily. the system tries to produce an esthetically pleasing layout. Modeler/Release 14. 3 Select one of the options: • No Effort • Small Effort • Normal Effort • Large Effort Note—“Large Effort” may impact performance. Procedure 3-35 Defining the Layout Effort for a Showcase 1 From the Network Showcase pull-down menu.tool_back preference.please inform us.if tort to your rights.we will delete ER-3-85 . 3 Choose one of the options: • Use Default—Change the background color in the showcase to the default color.

see Displaying Legend Information Associated with a Network View on page ER-3-86. ➥ The showcase incorporates the specified view. Then choose a view option. • From the View pull-down menu.please inform us.com The document is for study only. you can display the visualization legend. Procedure 3-38 Displaying Legend Information Associated with a Network View in a Showcase 1 From the Network Showcase pull-down menu.if tort to your rights.cadfamily. For more information. select the showcase to which you want to apply a predefined network view. if applicable. Procedure 3-37 Applying a Predefined Network View to a Showcase 1 From the Network Showcase pull-down menu. if applicable. Choose Default View to display Showcase objects in the default view (no applied network view). you can also display the legend associated with the network view. choose a view option.0 . select the showcase for which you want to display the legend information associated with the applied network view. 2 Perform one of the following: • Right-click on an empty space in the showcase and choose View. End of Procedure 3-37 After applying a network view to a showcase. in the showcase.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.3—Project Editor • Choose…—Displays the Color dialog box from which you can select a predefined or custom color for the showcase background. Displaying Legend Information Associated with a Network View After applying a network view to a showcase (Applying a Predefined Network View to a Showcase on page ER-3-86). ➥ The background color of the showcase is changed to the selected color.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. ER-3-86 www. End of Procedure 3-36 Applying a Predefined Network View to a Showcase You can apply an existing network view to a showcase.

com The document is for study only. End of Procedure 3-39 Network Showcase Pop-Up Menu The following table lists the Network Showcase pop-up menu operations. the legend appears in the showcase.if tort to your rights. see Featuring Objects in a Showcase on page ER-3-78. ➥ The visualization applied in the Network Topology is applied to the showcase. 2 Right-click on an empty space in the showcase and choose Overlay Topology’s Visualizations. see Selecting Featured Objects in a Showcase on page ER-3-80. Modeler/Release 14. End of Procedure 3-38 Applying the Network Topology Visualization to a Showcase After applying a view to the network shown in the Network Topology. For more information.we will delete ER-3-87 .com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. For more information. ➥ If the applied view includes a legend. Table 3-20 Option Feature Selected Objects Network Showcase Pop-Up Menu Description Features (adds) the selected objects in the active showcase. For more information. see Removing Featured Objects from a Showcase on page ER-3-79. For more information.3—Project Editor 2 Right-click on an empty space in the showcase and choose Show View Legend. you can apply the same view to the network shown in a showcase.please inform us. Procedure 3-39 Applying the Network Topology Visualization to a Showcase 1 From the Network Showcase pull-down menu.0 www. Select Featured Objects Selects all “featured” objects in the active showcase for performing an action on them. Stop Featuring All Objects Removes all featured objects from the active showcase. Stop Featuring Selected Objects Removes the selected featured objects from the active showcase.cadfamily. select the showcase to which you want to apply the visualization used in the Network Topology. see Removing Featured Objects from a Showcase on page ER-3-79.

see Applying a Predefined Network View to a Showcase on page ER-3-86.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. see Automatically Featuring Selected Network Objects on page ER-3-84. For more information. Types To Feature Defines the network object type(s) that can be featured (added) in the active showcase. Associations To Show Defines the network object type(s) that can be included in the active showcase as objects associated with featured objects. if applicable. For more information. ER-3-88 www.please inform us. For more information.com The document is for study only. in the active showcase. see Displaying Legend Information Associated with a Network View on page ER-3-86.if tort to your rights.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. see Defining Network Object Types to Associate with Featured Objects on page ER-3-83. Show View Legend Displays the visualization legend.cadfamily.0 . For more information. see Exporting a Featured Object Set and Configuration Settings on page ER-3-81. Layout Effort Defines the effort requested for producing an aesthetically pleasing layout in the active showcase. see Defining Layout Effort on page ER-3-85. For more information. For more information. For more information. see Defining Network Object Types to Feature on page ER-3-83. View Applies a predefined view to the active showcase. Auto-Feature Network Selection Allows you to add “featured” objects to the active showcase by simply selecting objects in the Network Topology or Network Browser.3—Project Editor Table 3-20 Option Network Showcase Pop-Up Menu (Continued) Description Exports a list of featured objects from the active showcase. For more information. see Importing a Featured Object Set and Configuration Settings on page ER-3-81. For more information. see Defining a Background Color for a Showcase on page ER-3-85. Export Featured Set Import Featured Set Imports a list of featured objects into the active showcase to quickly re-create a showcase. The list of exported objects can be imported to quickly re-create a showcase. Background Color Defines the background color of the active showcase.

Rename This Showcase… Renames the active showcase.if tort to your rights.3—Project Editor Table 3-20 Option Network Showcase Pop-Up Menu (Continued) Description Applies the Network Topology’s visualizations to the active showcase.please inform us. For more information. For more information. Delete This Showcase… Deletes the active showcase. see Applying the Network Topology Visualization to a Showcase on page ER-3-87. see Displaying a Showcase in a Floating Window on page ER-3-77.we will delete ER-3-89 . Right-click in a floating window and select Show Inside Editor to display the showcase in the Network Showcase.com The document is for study only. see: • Overview of the Network Showcase • Network Showcase Example Workflow • Example Workflow Steps: Using Network Showcase • Network Showcase Procedures Modeler/Release 14. see Deleting a Showcase on page ER-3-77.cadfamily. see Renaming a Showcase on page ER-3-76.0 www.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. End of Table 3-20 For more information. For more information. For more information. Overlay Topology’s Visualizations Open in Window / Show Inside Editor Displays the active showcase in a floating window.

you can use the Time Controller to animate through the link-load levels To open the Time Controller.3—Project Editor Show Time Controller The Time Controller is useful when you want to see how network objects and data change over time. choose View > Show Time Controller. this opens the Time Controller Settings dialog box. Modeler is in a special time view mode in which the Project Editor shows the network state at a specific time. Examples of time-varying data include trajectories. all calendar values are shown in local time. You can use this window to set and view the current time and to run animations. click Configure.0 .com The document is for study only. (Unless indicated otherwise by the user interface.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. When this window is open.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. and profile attributes.if tort to your rights. Figure 3-23 Visible Effects of Time Controller: Examples Demand Profiles Simulation/Flow Analysis graphs—Vertical line indicates the current time in the Time Controller Mobile nodes—Node position reflects the node location at the current time in the Time Controller Link load visualization—When link-load visualization is turned on. To specify the time range and other options. output-vector statistics.) Figure 3-24 Time Controller and Time Controller Settings ER-3-90 www.cadfamily.please inform us.

3—Project Editor

You can specify the start time, end time, and time step either manually (in the Value field) or based on a specific data source present in the scenario (the Source menu). Note—Time view mode has no effect if the current time is outside the time window of the data set; therefore, it is good practice to choose start and end times from the Source menu, because the values are based on existing data. When you close the Time Controller, the “current” network time is reset to the network start time, as specified in the “Start modeling at calendar time” field in the Time Controller Settings dialog box. For more information about how time is modeled, see Network Time: Calendar, Relative, and Network Start Times on page MC-7-38.

Visualize Link Loads
You can use the Visualize Link Loads feature to see overall link-load levels quickly and to pinpoint overloaded links. When link load visualization is turned on, colored arrows appear over the links. The line color indicates the load level (as a percentage of total capacity) in each direction; the line thickness indicates the total link capacity.
Figure 3-25 Visualizing Link Loads

A common interface is provided for visualizing link loads, regardless of the data source (such as attributes on link objects or outputs from discrete event simulations and Flow Analysis): • To turn on link-load visualization, choose View > Visualize Link Loads > Color by Link Load. This menu item opens a dialog box that prompts you for the link-load data source and the type of data to visualize. • To clear link-load visualization, choose View > Visualize Link Loads > Clear Visualization. • To change the visualization settings (thresholds, colors and line widths), choose View > Visualize Link Loads > Settings… • To see how link-load levels change over time, turn on link-load visualization, then choose View > Show Time Controller. For more information, see Show Time Controller on page ER-3-90.
Modeler/Release 14.0 www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete ER-3-91

3—Project Editor

Visualizing Protocols Configured in a Network
After creating the network topology, most of the configuration that you do occurs in attributes. The values of these attributes are generally not readily viewed in the Project Editor workspace. There are several visualization operations that let you see some of the more common protocol configuration settings in the workspace. These operations appear on the View > Visualize Protocol Configuration menu. Only one protocol visualization can be shown at a time. After viewing protocol configurations, you can remove them from the workspace using the Clear Visualization operation. Visualizations are not saved with the project, so all visualizations are lost when the project is closed. For more information, see the following visualizations: • IP Interface Status on page ER-3-92 • IP Routing Domains on page ER-3-93 • BGP Peers on page ER-3-93 • OSPF Area Configuration on page ER-3-93
IP Interface Status

The Visualize IP Interface Status operation shows whether a connected interface is active or shutdown. This is done using arrows placed on the links in the workspace. An up arrow indicates that the interface is active and a down arrow indicates that the interface is shutdown.
Figure 3-26 Visualizing IP Interface Status

When one interface is active and the other is shutdown, it is not always apparent which icon applies to an interface. You can select Edit Ports from the pop-up menu of a link to see which interface is active and which is shutdown.

This message appears whenever IP Interface Status is shown in the workspace.

ER-3-92 www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Modeler/Release 14.0

3—Project Editor

IP Routing Domains

The Visualize IP Routing Domains operation shows the routing protocols configured in the network. Icons are placed on the links in the network to indicate the routing protocol(s) that are configured on the interfaces attached to the link. When routing domains are shown in the workspace, a legend appears in the lower left-hand corner to indicate what each icon represents.
Figure 3-27 Visualizing Routing Domains

BGP Peers

The Visualize BGP Peers operation shows the BGP peering (neighbor) relationships in the network. EBGP confederation peers are shown in dark green, EBGP peers are shown in blue, all other colors indicate IBGP peers. Additional information about the peers appears in the tooltip of the peering visualization. For networks using route reflection, the visualization also indicates if a router is a reflector or a client.
OSPF Area Configuration

The Visualize OSPF Area Configuration operation colors the links in the workspace so that each area in the network is represented by a different color. When you launch this operation from the menu, a dialog box appears to let you specify the color to use for each area ID configured in the network.

Modeler/Release 14.0 www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

ER-3-93

3—Project Editor

You can identify the area ID of a link by viewing its tooltip, which is visible when you position the pointer over the link.
Figure 3-28 Visualizing OSPF Areas
Without OSPF Area Visualization

With OSPF Area Visualization

When visualizing OSPF areas, the Area ID appears in the tooltip.

ER-3-94 www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Modeler/Release 14.0

3—Project Editor

Zoom Operations
At times, you may want to magnify the view of some portion of the network model in the workspace. This may be for display purposes or to emphasize a particular part of the network model. You can repeatedly magnify selected areas of the workspace, as well as return to any previously selected magnification level. You can zoom in or out in several ways: • Using the scroll wheel on the mouse — To zoom in, turn the scroll wheel forward or use the Page Down button. — To zoom out, push the scroll wheel backward or use the Page Up button. — To pan, hold down the scroll wheel and drag the mouse pointer. Optionally, hold down the right and left mouse buttons and drag the mouse pointer. Note—To move the view up/down, hold down the Control key and turn the scroll wheel. • Using the Zoom toolbar buttons • Using the Zoom items on the Workspace pop-up menu • Using the Bird’s-Eye View window Additionally, use the following operations on the View > Zoom submenu: • To Rectangle This operation allows you to get a close-up view of a model at a specified location within the Project Editor. This operation can be applied multiple times to provide an ever-closer view. If you choose View > Zoom > To Rectangle or click on the Zoom button, the cursor changes to a bar and you can drag to define the rectangular-shaped region to be magnified. If you choose Zoom In from the Workspace pop-up menu, the project editor zooms to a pre-defined area. • To Selection This operation zooms the view in or out so that all selected objects fill the editor window. • To Window This operation displays all objects in the current network or subnetwork. If a subnet’s extent is large, Zoom > To Window might cause all objects to be clustered together at one point on the screen, making the network difficult to view. If this happens, select all objects in the cluster and use Zoom > To Selection. Note—Zoom > To Window clears all previous views in the Project Editor, and cannot be undone by using Unzoom. (This simply shrinks the subnetwork view in the editor window). • Unzoom
Modeler/Release 14.0 www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete ER-3-95

3—Project Editor

This operation restores the previous zoom level.

ER-3-96 www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Modeler/Release 14.0

It duplicates all elements of a scenario except simulation results.please inform us.if tort to your rights. use Scenario Components Operations. or just click OK to accept the default name. Modeler/Release 14.cadfamily.0 www. Procedure 3-40 Duplicating a Scenario 1 Display the scenario you want to duplicate.com The document is for study only.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.3—Project Editor Scenarios Menu Operations This section contains descriptions and procedures for using the operations available from the Scenarios menu in the Project Editor. End of Procedure 3-40 Generate Scenario Bitmap… This operation generates a bitmap image of the network shown in the active window of the Project Editor. ➥ The copied scenario is displayed. 2 Choose Scenarios > Duplicate Scenario… ➥ The Enter Name dialog box displays with a default scenario name. • Duplicate Scenario on page ER-3-97 • Generate Scenario Bitmap… on page ER-3-97 • Generate Scenario Web Report… on page ER-3-98 • Live Object/Attribute Differences on page ER-3-98 • Manage Scenarios on page ER-3-103 • New Scenario on page ER-3-105 • Scenario Components Operations on page ER-3-106 • Switch To Scenario on page ER-3-108 Duplicate Scenario This operation places a copy of the selected scenario in the active project.we will delete ER-3-97 . The items that appear on this menu are described below in alphabetical order. 3 Enter a scenario name and click OK. To copy a scenario from one project to another. see Chapter 16 Publishing Network Information on page MC-16-1.

com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.3—Project Editor Generate Scenario Web Report… This operation generates a set of web pages that represents all objects and subnetworks in the current scenario. Live Object/Attribute Differences The Live Object/Attribute Difference view option is a visualization mode in which icons are used to identify changes in a network scenario and in individual objects. For more information. You can use this option to identify and track • Differences between the current scenario and a reference scenario • Changes to the current scenario since the last save • Future changes to the current scenario (“Track Changes from Now” operation) • Attribute changes that differ from an object’s creation defaults Viewing Differences You can visualize two types of differences: • Differences in a network (see Object/Attributes Differences) • Differences in an object (see Object Differences on page ER-3-100 and Text Differences on page ER-3-101) Object/Attributes Differences When Live Object/Attributes Difference mode is enabled. your current scenario is compared with a reference scenario.please inform us.cadfamily. see Chapter 16 Publishing Network Information on page MC-16-1.0 .com The document is for study only. ER-3-98 www. Traversing these pages in a web browser is similar to traversing a network in the Project Editor. see Live Object/Attribute Difference Operations on page ER-3-101.if tort to your rights. depending on the view mode: • A separate scenario (Compare to Network or Compare to Scenario) • A previous state of the current scenario (Track Changes from Last Save or Track Changes from Now) The Project Editor window and the Network Browser mark changed objects in the network and show icons to identify • Objects with relevant differences—You can specify the criteria that is used to determine a “relevant difference” between two objects. For more information. The reference scenario is one of the following.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.

This subnet contains no objects that differ from the reference subnet. This object has relevant differences.0 www.if tort to your rights. This subnet contains objects that differ from the reference subnet This subnet contains objects that are in the current network only.we will delete ER-3-99 . • Subnets with changed objects—If any object in a subnet has changed. Figure 3-29 Live Object/Attribute Difference in Project Editor: Example Workspace Network Browser Table 3-21 Icon Icons Used in Live Object/Attribute Difference Mode Description This object has no relevant differences. End of Table 3-21 Modeler/Release 14.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. not when you track changes in one scenario.cadfamily.please inform us. • Subnets that contain objects with no counterparts • Objects with no relevant differences—These icons appear only when you compare two scenarios.3—Project Editor • Objects with no counterparts—An “object with no counterpart” is an object that exists in the current scenario only. and has no corresponding object in the reference scenario.com The document is for study only. an icon appears over the subnet. This object is in the current network only.

the Attributes dialog box has these additional features: • A third column (Reference) shows attribute values in the reference object. Figure 3-30 Live Object/Attribute Difference in Attributes Dialog Box: Example To set an attribute to its reference value.cadfamily. and compound attributes that contain attributes with different settings. When Live Object/Attributes Difference mode is enabled. right-click on the object and choose Edit Attributes. right-click on reference value and select Apply Reference Value ER-3-100 www. • This window incudes a “Show only differences” checkbox.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. depending on the view mode: — The counterpart object in the reference scenario (Compare to Network or Compare to Scenario) — The previous state of the current object (Track Changes from Last Save or Track Changes from Now) — The creation default settings for that object (Track Changes from Creation Defaults) • The Reference column uses icons and colored rows to indicate attributes with equal settings.0 . right-click on the reference value and select Apply Reference Value.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. To do this. see Edit Attributes on page ER-3-252. so you can see only attributes with different settings. The reference object is one of the following.if tort to your rights.com The document is for study only. • If an attribute’s current and reference settings are different. For more information about the Attributes dialog box. you can reset the current value to its reference setting. attributes with different settings.3—Project Editor Object Differences To see changes in an object.please inform us.

For more information. not in the Project Editor window.please inform us. For more information. by dragging from the object palette).we will delete ER-3-101 . The “creation default” settings for an object are the initial settings of an object when it is created manually (for example. the Text Editor window has a second pane (Reference) that shows differences in the reference text object. Track Changes from Last Save Track past changes in the current scenario (since the last time the project was saved) Track future changes in the current scenario Compare the current scenario to a scenario in a different project Compare the current scenario to a scenario in the same project Specify Difference Behavior Track Changes from Now Compare to Network Compare to Scenario: <scenario_name> Modeler/Release 14.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. see Object Differences on page ER-3-100. This view mode marks changes in an object’s Attributes dialog box only. Track Changes from Creation Defaults Track all attribute settings that differ from the creation defaults for an object. Table 3-22 Scenarios > Live Object/Attribute Difference Submenu Operation Stop Comparing Description Turn off Live Difference mode and clear all difference visualizations from the Project Editor window Specify the criteria used to define object/attribute differences. The reference text object is one of the following.cadfamily.0 www.if tort to your rights. depending on the view mode: • The counterpart object in the reference scenario (Compare to Network or Compare to Scenario) • The previous state of the current object (Track Changes from Last Save or Track Changes from Now) Live Object/Attribute Difference Operations The following table lists the operations available on the Scenarios > Live Object/Attribute Difference submenu. If Live Object/Attribute Difference mode is enabled.3—Project Editor Text Differences You can use Live Object/Attribute Difference to track changes in a text object such as an annotation or a text-based attribute. see Specify Live Object/Attribute Behavior Dialog Box on page ER-3-102.com The document is for study only.

cadfamily.0 . Select objects that are unique to the current scenario and do not have counterparts in the reference scenario. End of Table 3-22 Select Objects without Counterparts Specify Live Object/Attribute Behavior Dialog Box You can use Specify Object/Attribute Difference Behavior dialog box to exclude irrelevant object types and attributes from the comparison and thereby track differences of interest only. in all subnets. “reconcile differences for an object” means that all relevant settings for the current object are set so that it becomes equivalent to its counterpart in the reference scenario. and located in the same subnet. A subnet object is selected only if it has relevant attribute changes. You can undo and redo this operation using the corresponding operations in the Edit menu.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. or reside within a selected subnet • Have counterparts in the reference scenario In this case.if tort to your rights.com The document is for study only. Figure 3-31 Specify Live Object/Attribute Behavior Dialog Box ER-3-102 www. that are marked as changed.please inform us.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. this operation reconciles all objects in that subnet that have counterparts in the reference scenario. An object has a counterpart if the reference scenario contains an object with the same name. If a subnet is selected. as the current object.3—Project Editor Table 3-22 Scenarios > Live Object/Attribute Difference Submenu (Continued) Operation Select Objects with Differences Description Select all objects. Reconcile Selected Object Differences Reconcile differences for all objects that meet both these conditions: • Are currently selected.

3—Project Editor Table 3-23 Specify Live Object/Attribute Behavior Dialog Box Option Attributes to ignore during comparison Description Specify attributes to ignore: • Ignore all non-modeling attributes—Ignore attributes that do not affect discrete event simulation or Flow Analysis results (examples: “color”.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. “trajectory”) • Ignore transmitter and receiver attributes—Ignore attributes specific to wireless objects (examples: “channel”. “y position”. “ber model”) Generate Ignore specific attributes table Generate a difference report based on the current settings Ignore specific attributes during the comparison.we will delete ER-3-103 . Modeler/Release 14. Buttons and pull-down menus allow you to: • Rename scenarios • Add new scenarios • Duplicate scenarios • Delete scenarios • Run a simulation and collect the specified statistics • Change the simulation duration and the units of the simulation duration • Delete results • Re-order scenarios in the list Note—Changes are applied when you click OK to close the dialog box. Ignored attributes are excluded from the final report. Save difference settings to a template file Load Objects to Compare Save As End of Table 3-23 Manage Scenarios This operation lets you view a list of each scenario in your project and its status. “creation source”) • Ignore position attributes—Ignore attributes that specify physical locations of objects (examples: “x position”. “ragain model”. No changes are applied if you click Cancel. “line style”. Load difference settings from a template file Specify the types of objects to include in the comparison report.please inform us.0 www.if tort to your rights. these attributes are ignored when comparing the same object between scenarios.cadfamily. In addition.com The document is for study only.

if tort to your rights. 2 Perform the instructions listed in the following table for the desired operation. Table 3-24 Manage Scenarios Operations To… Rename a scenario Add a new scenario Do This… Select the scenario to be renamed and type the new name. “uncollected” means that a probe file exists. “<collect>” means a simulation is requested and will be run when you click OK. Left-click in the Scenario Name column of the first empty row and choose Duplicate <scenario_name> from the menu.cadfamily.please inform us. Figure 3-32 Manage Scenarios Dialog Box “out of date” means that the set of chosen results.3—Project Editor Procedure 3-41 Managing Scenarios 1 Choose Scenarios > Manage Scenarios… ➥ The Manage Scenarios dialog box for the current project displays.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.0 . simulation configuration. but a simulation has not been run.com The document is for study only.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Left-click in the Scenario Name column of an empty row and choose the <new> item from the menu. Duplicate a scenario Delete a scenario ER-3-104 www. or network model has changed since the results file was created. • Left-click in the Saved column and choose <delete> from the menu. The simulation will run when you click OK. All files that comprised the scenario are deleted. Run a simulation Select the scenario and left-click the Collect Results button. Use either of two methods: • Select the scenario to be deleted and left-click on the Delete button.

3 Enter a scenario name and click OK.com The document is for study only.3—Project Editor Table 3-24 Manage Scenarios Operations (Continued) To… Change the simulation duration Do This… Select the simulation duration and type in the new duration. If necessary. End of Procedure 3-42 Modeler/Release 14. ➥ The project editor displays a workspace.cadfamily. Choose <leave> to keep the scenario in the same position. 4 Enter values as prompted by the Startup Wizard to set the context of your scenario. then select the item that indicates the order desired. Left-click in the # column of the scenario to be re-ordered. Procedure 3-42 Creating a New Scenario 1 Display a new or existing project.please inform us. or just click OK to accept the default name. Select the scenario and click on the Discard Results button.we will delete ER-3-105 .com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. with either the default context (if you did not specify a particular context in the Startup Wizard) or the context you specified. Delete results Re-order a scenario in the list End of Table 3-24 3 Click OK to close the dialog box and store changes to disk.if tort to your rights. 2 Choose Scenarios > New Scenario… ➥ The Enter Name dialog box displays with a default scenario name.0 www. ➥ The Startup Wizard opens. End of Procedure 3-41 New Scenario This operation creates a new scenario in the current project. The scenario’s results file and animation history file will be deleted. or click on Quit to exit the Startup Wizard. select new simulation duration units from the pull-down menu.

you will. consisting of a network model and.if tort to your rights. an animation history.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. a simulation sequence.cadfamily. and simulation configuration. importing a complete scenario is never destructive—the imported scenario is added to the destination project. most often. • One or more of the components listed above. possibly.0 . If you do not import a complete project. and a results file.com The document is for study only. Figure 3-33 Import Dialog Box Component type pull-down menu File list Scenario pull-down menu (active only if the component type to be imported is Project) 3 Follow the appropriate procedure: ER-3-106 www. CAUTION—Import can be destructive. You can import some or all of the scenarios included in the project. an analysis configuration.3—Project Editor Scenario Components Operations The Scenario Components operations allow you to Import… and Export… the components of a scenario.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. 2 Choose Scenarios > Scenario Components > Import… ➥ The Import dialog box opens. a custom model list. want to import just a network model. Components include such things as the network model. the imported component destroys the existing one. If you import a component and a component of the same type already exists in the destination scenario. Import… Use this operation to import: • A complete project. a probe model.please inform us. a traffic import model. However. requested statistics (probes). Procedure 3-43 Importing a Component or a Complete Project 1 Display the destination project (the project you want the project or component imported into).

3—Project Editor • To import a specific component (such as the network model). 2 Choose Scenarios > Scenario Components > Export… ➥ The Export dialog box opens. 4 Enter a name in the Model Name field. choose Project from the component type pull-down menu.if tort to your rights. choose that type of component from the component type pull-down menu. 5 Click OK. Procedure 3-44 Exporting a Scenario Component 1 Display the scenario containing the component you want to export.com The document is for study only. ➥ The specified components or scenarios are imported into the destination project. traffic import model. select the project that contains the desired scenario. End of Procedure 3-44 Modeler/Release 14. Figure 3-34 Export Dialog Box Component type pull-down menu 3 Choose the component type you wish to export from the component pull-down menu. • To import a complete scenario. probe model. simulation sequence. or results file) in your primary model directory. 4 Click OK. When Network Model (or any component except Project) is chosen. End of Procedure 3-43 Export… This operation places a copy of a specific scenario component (network model.0 www. analysis configuration. animation history.please inform us.we will delete ER-3-107 . custom model list. then choose either <all scenarios> or the specific desired scenario from the scenario pull-down menu.cadfamily. The file will be stored with this name. each file of that type is displayed in the file list.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.

• Create Custom Device Model on page ER-3-109 • Export Topology Operations on page ER-3-117 • Fail Selected Objects on page ER-3-119 • Group Nodes into Subnets on page ER-3-132 • Model Assistant on page ER-3-148 • Open Annotation Palette on page ER-3-158 • Open Object Palette on page ER-3-161 • Rapid Configuration on page ER-3-180 • Recover Selected Objects on page ER-3-184 • Shared Risk Groups on page ER-3-185 • Verify Links on page ER-3-192 ER-3-108 www. if it is already open).com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. To open a scenario (or make its window active.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.please inform us.com The document is for study only. The items that appear on this menu are described below in alphabetical order.3—Project Editor Switch To Scenario This part of the scenario menu lists every scenario in the current project. Topology Menu Operations This section contains descriptions and procedures for using the operations available from the Topology menu in the Project Editor.if tort to your rights.0 . choose its name from this list.cadfamily.

1000BaseX) FDDI Token Ring Cloud ATM Frame Relay SLIP Multiprotocol Fibre Channel Devices Hub Switch Endnode Multihomed Endnode Firewall ATM Ethernet (10BaseT.cadfamily. hubs. The following table lists the device categories and the technologies or device types supported by Create Custom Device. servers. Ethernet LANE. you can create your own new device models using the Create Custom Device Model operation. and switches. 100BaseT.please inform us. and EtherChannel FDDI Frame Relay SLIP Token Ring and TR LANE Hub Ethernet (10BaseT. including routers. 1000BaseX) FDDI Fibre Channel Token Ring LAN Model Shared Switched Modeler/Release 14. 100BaseT.0 www.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.3—Project Editor Create Custom Device Model In addition to using the built-in model objects and creating derived models. bridges.we will delete ER-3-109 . Table 3-25 Supported Device Classes Device Category Bridge Supported Technologies or Device Types Ethernet (10BaseT. workstations. 100BaseT.if tort to your rights.com The document is for study only. Device Creator allows you to create several different types of network components. 1000BaseX).

please inform us.if tort to your rights. 100BaseT.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.cadfamily. 1000BaseX) and EtherChannel FDDI Frame Relay SLIP Token Ring Voice over ATM ER-3-110 www.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.0 . and EtherChannel FDDI Frame Relay Fibre Channel SLIP Token Ring and TR LANE Wireless LAN Multihomed Host Client Server Multi-Service Switch Circuit Switched Ethernet (10BaseT. Ethernet LANE.3—Project Editor Table 3-25 Supported Device Classes (Continued) Device Category Mainframes Supported Technologies or Device Types ATM Ethernet (10BaseT. 1000BaseX).com The document is for study only. 100BaseT.

1000BaseX) and EtherChannel FDDI Fibre Channel Frame Relay LANE Multiprotocol Switch SSP Token Ring UMTS RNC Vendor Device 3Com Avici Systems Bay Networks Cabletron Cisco eXtreme Networks Fore Systems Foundry Networks Hewlett-Packard Juniper Networks Lucent (Ascend) Newbridge NEC Nortel Networks End of Table 3-25 Modeler/Release 14. 100BaseT.0 www.please inform us. and EtherChannel FDDI Frame Relay SLIP Token Ring and TR LANE Wireless LAN Switch ATM Ethernet (10BaseT.com The document is for study only.cadfamily. Ethernet LANE. 100BaseT.we will delete ER-3-111 .if tort to your rights. 1000BaseX).com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.3—Project Editor Table 3-25 Supported Device Classes (Continued) Device Category Router Supported Technologies or Device Types ATM DOCSIS Ethernet (10BaseT.

• They support inheritance. ER-3-112 www. you can give a model created with Device Creator any name that does not duplicate the name of an existing base or derived model of the same type.if tort to your rights.cadfamily. so that changes to the original (parent) models can automatically affect all models derived from it. For more information.com The document is for study only. Model Names As with derived models. • They create both a derived model and a base model.please inform us.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.0 . see: • Derived Models on page MC-4-55 • User Model Directories on page EI-1-23. so that you may use either depending on the modeling requirements.3—Project Editor Models created with the device creator have several advantages: • They make it easy to configure new models for specialized needs and integrate them into your network models.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.

com The document is for study only.3—Project Editor Creating a Custom Device Procedure 3-45 Creating a Node Using Device Creator 1 Choose Topology > Create Custom Device Model… ➥ The Create Custom Device dialog box appears. If your selection expands a branch of the tree.we will delete ER-3-113 .cadfamily. The default is my_<device_type> and click OK. The default is “my_model_list”.0 www. 5 In the Enter Model Name For Device dialog box. specify a model name for your new device. Then click the Create As button. The custom model appears in the specified object palette with the specified name.please inform us. End of Procedure 3-45 Modeler/Release 14. You selection is complete when the parameters for you selection appear in the Parameters section of the dialog box.if tort to your rights.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. 2 From the tree. define the destination object palette of the device. 3 Define the parameters for the selected device. For more information about the arguments and their values. select the type of device that you want to create. continue to select the option corresponding to the device that you want to create. 4 In the field Destination palette. see Specifying Arguments for New Models on page ER-3-114.

com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. C or D Buffer Capacity Bridge Frame Service Rate Bridge Protocol Data Unit Service Rate Buffer Capacity Client Custom Application cells bits/second packets/second bits Off Sample Load Client Database Application Off Low Load Medium Load High Load Client database application load generated by the model Client E-mail Off Low Load Medium Load High Load Client e-mail application load generated by the model Client FTP Off Low Load Medium Load High Load Client FTP application load generated by the model Client HTTP Light Browsing Heavy Browsing Searching Image Browsing Client HTTP application load generated by the model ER-3-114 www.0 . you may need to specify other arguments. Table 3-26 Device Class Arguments Argument ATM Value ports Description Maximum number of physical ATM links the model can support Buffer capacity for class A. model list. These arguments. and icon name) are the same for all model types. or D traffic Rate at which a bridge can process frames Rate at which a bridge can process BPDUs Maximum queue size of a port Client custom application load generated by the model ATM QoS A.if tort to your rights. C.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.com The document is for study only.3—Project Editor Specifying Arguments for New Models When creating a new model with Device Creator. Many of these arguments (such as model name. you must set several argument options to specify your model appropriately.please inform us. B. but depending on the model class and the protocol you select. their values. B. and a description of each are listed in the following table.cadfamily.

and 1000BaseX ethernet links Maximum number of physical FDDI links the model can support Maximum number of physical Frame Relay links the model can support User-defined icon name Data rate specification for creating traffic contract used to set up the ATM connections Number of packets an IP router can forward per second User-defined model name.if tort to your rights.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.please inform us. This value defaults to my_<device_type>. Number of ports on the model Services supported by this server Maximum number of SLIP links the model can support The rate at which switch backplane (the internal switching bus) operates. Client X-windows application load generated by the model The time the client process begins to send traffic Client video conferencing application load generated by the model Description Client remote login application load generated by the model FDDI ports Frame Relay ports Icon Name IP ATM Maximum Data Rate N/A bits/second IP Forwarding Rate Model Name packets/second N/A Model List N/A Port Count Server Configuration Table SLIP Switch Backplane Speed ports N/A ports packets/sec Modeler/Release 14. 100BaseT.we will delete ER-3-115 .cadfamily. User-defined model list.3—Project Editor Table 3-26 Device Class Arguments (Continued) Argument Client Remote Login Value Off Low Load Medium Load High Load Client Start Time Client Video Conferencing seconds Off Low Load Medium Load High Load Client X-windows Off Low Load Medium Load High Load Ethernet ports Generic ethernet device that can be used for 10BaseT. This value defaults to my_model_list.0 www. It governs the time it takes for an incoming packet to reach the switch processor.com The document is for study only.

we will delete Modeler/Release 14. This address must be unique for each node TPAL ATM Maximum Data Rate bits/second Transport Address TPAL address End of Table 3-26 ER-3-116 www.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.0 .if tort to your rights.com The document is for study only.cadfamily.please inform us.3—Project Editor Table 3-26 Device Class Arguments (Continued) Argument Switching Rate Switch Port Switching Speed Value frames/sec packets/sec Description Number of incoming frames that can be forwarded The rate at which packets are switched from the switch processor to the appropriate output port The protocol that the device type is based on Technology Ethernet FDDI Token Ring Token Ring ports Maximum number of physical Token Ring links the model can support Data rate specification for creating traffic contract used to set up the ATM connections TPAL address of the node.

EMA code is in text format.c.com The document is for study only. This operation allows you to generate External Model Access (EMA) source code that represents the model currently present in the active tool.em. allowing you to edit it with an ordinary text editor.c. . For more information. ➥ The program generates the EMA code and stores it in the file <model name>. Modeler/Release 14. If not.0 www.3—Project Editor Export Topology Operations The Export Topology submenu contains operations that let you export your network model in various formats.we will delete ER-3-117 .if tort to your rights. Procedure 3-46 Generating EMA Code 1 Make sure the model for which you want to produce EMA code is active. End of Procedure 3-46 For more information about EMA. Operations include: • To EMA… on page ER-3-117 • To Spreadsheet… on page ER-3-117 • To Visio… on page ER-3-118 • To XML… on page ER-3-118 • Subnet Hierarchy to VNE Server as Groups on page ER-3-118 To EMA… WARNING—EMA source code files for all models have the same suffix. see Chapter 1 External Model Access on page MFA-1-1. choose Open from the File menu and display the model in the editor window. regardless of model type.please inform us. 2 Choose Topology > Export Topology > To EMA. Be sure that the EMA file you create will not overwrite a previously-created file you want to keep. To Spreadsheet… This operation generates a report that can have a variable amount of detail on the objects in a network model. depending on what values you specify for certain preferences. see Reports on page MC-16-16.em.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.

ER-3-118 www. ➥ The Export to VNE Server dialog box appears requesting the server name and port number. you can more efficiently perform analyses on specific subnets and nodes of interest. For more information. To XML… This operation generates an XML file that describes the network topology of the current scenario in the project. Subnet Hierarchy to VNE Server as Groups The Export Topology to VNE Server as Groups operations allows you to export your subnet hierarchy to VNE Server. For more information. Note—If you perform a cut-and-paste operation or a copy-and-paste operation on nodes in your model. see Publishing Network Information on page MC-16-1.port display as the default values. The values defined for the preferences vne_import. Procedure 3-47 Exporting Subnet Hierarchy to VNE Server as Groups 1 Select the subnets for which you want to export information. The resulting XML file can be viewed and edited using an XML editor.3—Project Editor To Visio… This operation creates a text file and supporting TIFF graphics files that represent the network currently shown in the editor window. see Publishing Network Information on page MC-16-1.if tort to your rights. Subnets are mapped to VNE Server groups in a one-to-one fashion.0 .vne_server_name and vne_export.com The document is for study only.please inform us. 2 Choose Topology > Export Topology > Subnet Hierarchy to VNE Server as Groups.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Or select no subnets to export information for the entire network. • Selected Subnets—Exports subnets selected in the project editor to VNE Server groups. 3 Choose an option from the submenu: • Entire Network—Exports all subnets and nodes to groups that contain nodes on VNE Server. These files can be imported to the Visio drawing program to produce a representation of the network. the nodes will not be exported to groups on VNE Server. When the VNE Server group information is in sync with the network topology defined in the Project Editor.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.

End of Procedure 3-47 Fail Selected Objects In some modeling situations.com The document is for study only. specify the server name and port number and select OK. ➥ The object displays a red “X” over it.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. End of Procedure 3-49 Modeler/Release 14. ➥ Each selected object displays a red “X” over it.0 www. you may want to model certain nodes and links as failed. ➥ A message appears indicating that the subnet information has been exported to VNE Server. marking it as failed Note—Subnets cannot be marked as failed. choose Fail This <Object> (where <Object> is “Link” or “Node”). End of Procedure 3-48 A similar operation for individual nodes or links is available from the Object pop-up menu. 2 From the Object pop-up menu. Procedure 3-49 Failing a Single Link or Node 1 Right-click on the object that you want to fail.cadfamily.we will delete ER-3-119 .please inform us. Procedure 3-48 Failing Multiple Links and Nodes 1 Select the object(s) that you want to fail using one of the following methods: • Click on a single object • Hold down the Shift key and click on multiple objects 2 Choose Topology > Fail Selected Objects.3—Project Editor 4 If necessary. Note—Subnets cannot be marked as failed.if tort to your rights. marking it as failed. This is especially useful if you are studying traffic routing scenarios.

End of Procedure 3-50 Procedure 3-51 Creating a Subnetwork from the Object Palette 1 Open the Object Palette. • For logical subnets.if tort to your rights. • For fixed. ER-3-120 www. The subnet icon for fixed-positions is always available from Object Palettes. see Open Object Palette. For more information. 2 From the submenu. then mobile and satellite subnet icons are also available. and return to the parent subnetwork. Subnet objects are containers for other network objects. choose one of the following: • Create Fixed Subnet… • Create Logical Subnet… • Create Mobile Subnet… • Create Satellite Subnet… Note—The mobile and satellite subnet options are available only if you have the corresponding functionality.3—Project Editor Creating Subnetworks A subnetwork is typically the first object you create when building a new network model. view the contents. press and hold down the left mouse button on the position where you want to place a corner of the subnet extent. mobile. ➥ A dialog box requests the subnet name. click on the position where you want to place the subnet.0 .we will delete Modeler/Release 14. 3 Place the subnet in the Project Editor.com The document is for study only.cadfamily. and satellite subnets.please inform us. If you have the Wireless module license. 4 Enter the subnet name and click OK. The following procedures describe how to create a subnetwork object (from the menu and the Object Palette). drag the mouse pointer. Procedure 3-50 Creating a Subnetwork from the Topology Menu 1 Choose Topology > Subnets. and release the mouse button where you want to position the opposite corner of the subnet extent.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.

multiple objects. The subnetwork icon is enclosed by a rectangle called the subnetwork extent. then release the mouse button. right-click to end the operation. For more information about creating single vs. Note—The object palette might be set to create only one object.cadfamily.0 www.please inform us. ➥ A subnetwork is drawn in the workspace and assigned a default name. ➥ A square icon outline and movement cursor appear over the subnet icon. depending on its creation mode. reposition the cursor and click to create additional subnetworks. repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional subnetworks (ignore steps 4 and 5).com The document is for study only.3—Project Editor 2 Select the subnet icon in the object palette. 3 Drag the icon outline to the desired location in the Project Editor workspace. If so. The extent defines the location and size of the subnetwork. 5 When you finish creating subnetworks. see creation_mode.if tort to your rights. 4 Optionally. End of Procedure 3-51 Modeler/Release 14.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.we will delete ER-3-121 .

states/provinces.3—Project Editor Creating and Populating Geographic Subnets The “Create and Populate Geographic Subnets” feature allows you to quickly create and populate subnets at specific geographic locations. For example. continents. countries.if tort to your rights. continents. The association is indicated in the Region treeview (in the left pane) as follows: • A dot next to a region name indicates that one or more sub-region names matches a subnet in the hierarchy. the automatic process cannot distinguish between Rome. Important—Because the “Create and Populate Geographic Subnets” feature dynamically alters your network model. The associated subnet may not match the region’s location and span information. In fact. However..0 . On the default tab (Create Geographic Subnets).com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.) Note—The automated process matches subnet names to the first matching region name that is found. and cities). Subnets with names that match a region are automatically associated with the region. ER-3-122 www.e. but the region itself does not match a subnet. Procedure 3-52 Creating and Populating Geographic Subnets 1 Choose Topology > Subnets > Create And Populate Geographic Subnets… ➥ The “Create And Populate Geographic Subnets” dialog box displays..e. Georgia. the association may be incorrect. it is good practice to duplicate the scenario before making any changes.please inform us. you can save the subnet hierarchy to a model assistant file that can be re-applied the next time the nodes are imported. • A checkmark next to the region name indicates that the region is associated with a subnet in the subnet hierarchy. Italy and Rome.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. This feature uses the latitude/longitude information stored in the default maps to create a tree of geographic regions (i. countries. states/provinces. After creating and populating the geographic subnets. 2 Select the appropriate tab(s) to define and populate the geographic subnets: • Create Geographic Subnets Tab—defines a subnet hierarchy based on geographic regions (i. subnets are shown in the subnet hierarchy (in the right pane) under the world-level “top” subnet.cadfamily. since they do not affect the network’s definition in any way. (One or more sub-regions may match also. • Populate Subnets Tab—moves nodes into the actual subnet hierarchy.com The document is for study only. false associations are kept and tolerated in this treeview. and cities). The “Create and Populate Geographic Subnets” feature is especially useful when you want to organize a large set of imported nodes into a geographic subnet hierarchy.

location.if tort to your rights.3—Project Editor • Position Nodes And Subnets Tab—applies a region’s name. Note—Your new subnet hierarchy can be saved to a model assistant file and re-applied the next time the nodes are imported.0 www. ➥ The Create And Populate Geographic Subnets dialog box closes.we will delete ER-3-123 .cadfamily. 3 Click Close. you can modify any of these subnet properties manually. perhaps with information not related to any supplied region data.com The document is for study only. End of Procedure 3-52 Related Topics: • Model Assistant on page ER-3-148 • Duplicate Scenario on page ER-3-97 Modeler/Release 14.please inform us. Additionally. and/or span to a subnet/node in the hierarchy.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.

we will delete Modeler/Release 14. • A checkmark next to the region name indicates a subnet in the network has a name that equals or begins with the region’s name.please inform us.3—Project Editor Create Geographic Subnets Tab Select the “Create Geographic Subnets” tab on the “Create And Populate Geographic Subnets” dialog box to define a subnet hierarchy based on geographic regions (i.e. • Only one region can be selected at a time.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Note— • Use the Find feature to search for a specific region.0 . and span are displayed at the bottom of the tab.cadfamily. and cities). continents.com The document is for study only.if tort to your rights. ER-3-124 www. Figure 3-35 Create And Populate Geographic Subnets—Create Geographic Subnets On the “Create Geographic Subnets” tab. countries. • A dot next to a region name indicates that one or more sub-region names matches a subnet in the hierarchy. you can perform the following procedures: • Creating a Subnet in the Geographic Subnet Hierarchy on page ER-3-124 • Deleting a Subnet from the Geographic Subnet Hierarchy on page ER-3-125 Procedure 3-53 Creating a Subnet in the Geographic Subnet Hierarchy 1 Select a region (in the left pane).. • The selected region’s name. states/provinces. location.

Note—The value of these fields specify the initial attributes of the subnet that you will create. the association is not automatically inferred. the location and span values must be within the targeted parent subnet.com The document is for study only. cities are created as logical subnets because the region information does not contain span information. Therefore. A checkmark appears next to the region name indicating that the region has been used.3—Project Editor 2 Select the parent of the subnet that you want to create (in the right pane).com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. location. Note—Logical subnets do not have meaningful spans (and do not display a background map).we will delete ER-3-125 . By default.”). However. End of Procedure 3-54 Related Topics: • Creating and Populating Geographic Subnets on page ER-3-122 • Populate Subnets Tab on page ER-3-127 Modeler/Release 14. Also. and span. if you re-open this dialog box. ➥ The selected subnet is removed from the subnet hierarchy. 2 Select the “Delete Empty Subnet” button. 3 Optionally. Select the “No span (Logical Subnet)” checkbox to create a logical subnet. End of Procedure 3-53 Procedure 3-54 Deleting a Subnet from the Geographic Subnet Hierarchy 1 Select the subnet to delete (in the right pane). the name must not have invalid characters (such as “. unselect this checkbox and enter a value. longitude/latitude.if tort to your rights. 4 Specify whether to create a logical subnet. If you know a reasonable span for a city.please inform us.0 www. and/or subnet span that came from the region’s information.cadfamily. This happens even if you specify a different name. Note—A subnet can be deleted only if it is empty. the fields must have valid attribute values. you can select and cut the subnet in the Project Editor. Note—Networks always have a root subnet named “top” that corresponds to the entire world. All other subnets are contained within the root subnet. The subnet cannot contain subnets or nodes. ➥ The subnet is created in the subnet hierarchy with the specified name. edit the name. To remove a subnet that is not empty. 5 Select the “Create>>” button. For instance.

com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.0 .3—Project Editor • Position Nodes And Subnets Tab on page ER-3-129 • Creating Subnetworks on page ER-3-120 ER-3-126 www.cadfamily.please inform us.if tort to your rights.com The document is for study only.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.

Note—Alternatively. The nodes are displayed under the selected subnet (in the left pane). In this case.3—Project Editor Populate Subnets Tab Select the “Populate Subnets” tab on the “Create And Populate Geographic Subnets” dialog box to move nodes into the defined subnet hierarchy. you do not need to select the target subnet first.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. ➥ The selected nodes are moved into the selected subnet. Figure 3-36 Create And Populate Geographic Subnets—Populate Subnets On the “Populate Subnets” tab.please inform us. Note—Use the Select feature to search for and select one or more nodes whose name contains a substring or matches a regular expression.cadfamily.if tort to your rights. you can perform the following procedure: • Moving Nodes into the Subnet Hierarchy on page ER-3-127 Procedure 3-55 Moving Nodes into the Subnet Hierarchy 1 Select the node(s) to move (in the left pane). 3 Select the “Move Into>>” button.we will delete ER-3-127 .0 www. You can move nodes (and subnets) into any existing subnet and not just into newly created subnets.com The document is for study only. End of Procedure 3-55 Modeler/Release 14. you can drag nodes (from the left pane) to the subnet (in the right pane). 2 Select the subnet into which you want to move the selected node(s) (in the right pane).

com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.0 .3—Project Editor Related Topics: • Creating and Populating Geographic Subnets on page ER-3-122 • Create Geographic Subnets Tab on page ER-3-124 • Position Nodes And Subnets Tab on page ER-3-129 ER-3-128 www.please inform us.if tort to your rights.com The document is for study only.cadfamily.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.

3—Project Editor Position Nodes And Subnets Tab Select the “Position Nodes And Subnets” tab on the “Create And Populate Geographic Subnets” dialog box to apply a region’s location.if tort to your rights. Modeler/Release 14. Span. Figure 3-37 Create and Populate Geographic Subnets—Position Nodes And Subnets On the “Position Nodes And Subnets” tab.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Location. and Subnet Type of a Subnet or Node in the Hierarchy on page ER-3-131 Procedure 3-56 Applying a Region’s Location Information to a Subnet or Node in the Hierarchy 1 Select the subnet(s) and/or node(s) in the subnet hierarchy (in the left pane).please inform us.we will delete ER-3-129 .com The document is for study only.cadfamily. span.0 www. and/or name to a subnet in the hierarchy. you can perform the following procedures: • Applying a Region’s Location Information to a Subnet or Node in the Hierarchy on page ER-3-129 • Applying a Region’s Span Information to a Subnet in the Hierarchy on page ER-3-130 • Applying a Region’s Name to a Subnet in the Hierarchy on page ER-3-130 • Overriding the Name. 2 Select the region (in the right pane) corresponding to the location to which you want to move the selected subnet(s)/node(s). Note—Use the Select feature to search for and select one or more objects.

➥ The selected subnet/node name is changed to the selected region’s name. 3 Select the “<<Apply Location” button. Note—The change is not accepted if the region’s span is outside of the parent subnet. End of Procedure 3-56 Procedure 3-57 Applying a Region’s Span Information to a Subnet in the Hierarchy 1 Select the subnet(s) in the subnet hierarchy (in the left pane).if tort to your rights.0 . ➥ The span information of the selected subnet(s) is changed. 2 Select the region (in the right pane) corresponding to the span to which you want to apply to the selected subnet(s). Note—Use the Select feature to search for and select one or more subnets. ➥ The location of the selected subnet(s)/node(s) changes to the selected region.please inform us. Note—The change is not accepted if the region’s location is outside of the parent subnet.cadfamily. Note—Use the Find feature to search for and select a region.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Note—Use the Find feature to search for and select a region. Note—Use the Select feature to search for and select one or more subnets. 3 Select the “<<Apply Name” button.com The document is for study only.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. ER-3-130 www.3—Project Editor Note—Use the Find feature to search for and select a region. 2 Select the region (in the right pane) corresponding to the name that you want to apply to the selected subnet/node. End of Procedure 3-57 Procedure 3-58 Applying a Region’s Name to a Subnet in the Hierarchy 1 Select a subnet or node in the subnet hierarchy (in the left pane). 3 Select the “<<Apply Span” button.

2 Specify the information that you want to change: • New Name—Specifies the name of the network object.we will delete ER-3-131 .please inform us. (The subnet type can be specified only when overriding subnet information.if tort to your rights. • Longitude/Latitude—Specifies the location of the network object.) 3 Select the Apply Changes button. Each subnet must have a unique name.cadfamily. End of Procedure 3-59 Related Topics: • Creating and Populating Geographic Subnets on page ER-3-122 • Create Geographic Subnets Tab on page ER-3-124 • Populate Subnets Tab on page ER-3-127 • Creating Subnetworks on page ER-3-120 Modeler/Release 14. the subnet name is appended with a number to differentiate the subnets. (The span can be specified only when override subnet information. Location. and Subnet Type of a Subnet or Node in the Hierarchy 1 Select a single subnet or node in the subnet hierarchy (in the left pane). ➥ The specified changes are applied to the selected network object. in degrees.) • No span (Logical Subnet)—Specifies whether subnet is a logical subnet.0 www.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only. Span. • Span—Specifies the span of the subnet.3—Project Editor Note—If the region name is applied to more than one subnet. End of Procedure 3-58 Procedure 3-59 Overriding the Name. Note—Use the Select feature to search for and select a network object.

Operations. • AS numbers • OSPF areas • name.3—Project Editor Group Nodes into Subnets The Group Nodes into Subnets operation allows you to reorganize nodes into subnets. Group nodes by: • name. review the following sections for a complete understanding of the advanced capabilities: — Understanding Advanced Grouping: Levels. Depending on the complexity of the reorganization. see Standard Grouping Operations. the advanced operation can provide the same results in a single operation.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.please inform us.0 . string containing • selected nodes For more information. Table 3-27 Feature Perform operation on nodes in: Grouping Nodes into Subnets Feature Comparison: Standard vs. • Grouping Nodes into Subnets (Advanced) allows you to group specified nodes from the network into multi-level subnet hierarchies.cadfamily. you can use one of two available operations: • Grouping Nodes into Subnets (Standard) allows you to group one or more specified nodes from the current subnet into a child subnet.com The document is for study only.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. using regular expression • name. regular expression • name. see Advanced Grouping Operations. using string matching • inferred clouds • moving nodes to a specified subnet For more information. Before using the advanced grouping operation. However.if tort to your rights. the standard operation can be used to reorganize nodes into multi-level subnet hierarchies. and Parameters — Considerations for Grouping Nodes into Subnets (Advanced) The following table lists and compares the features between the Grouping Nodes into Subnets operation and the advanced operation. Advanced Standard • current subnet • selected nodes of current subnet Advanced • current subnet • or below the current subnet • all nodes in network • selected nodes of network Arrange nodes in: • single child subnet • multi-level subnet hierarchies Note—If used recursively. first <n> characters • name. Specify layout: • balanced • retain layout from parent subnet • simple • balanced • retain layout from parent subnet ER-3-132 www.

Advanced (Continued) Standard • Use screen’s aspect ratio (assumed) Advanced • Use screen’s aspect ratio • Use square aspect ratio • Fit exactly (dependent on location of nodes) Note—You can also specify the zoom level to show all nodes and subnets. (Nodes are filtered through the hierarchy to the appropriate level.we will delete ER-3-133 . Specify aspect ratio: Preview grouping before applying to scenario: No Yes Note—Grouping operation cannot be undone.if tort to your rights.com The document is for study only.3—Project Editor Table 3-27 Feature Grouping Nodes into Subnets Feature Comparison: Standard vs. Use the . End of Table 3-27 Save a model assistant (. • Operation—Specifies the set of nodes to be included in the level. Remember the following when defining operations: — The operation(s) for Level 1 must define all nodes to be included in the entire hierarchy.ma file to easily overlay the subnet group changes in a scenario using the Model Assistant operation. see Model Assistant on page ER-3-148. and Parameters The Group Nodes into Subnets (Advanced) operation uses the following terms: • Level—Refers to the hierarchy of subnets. Operations. This capability is especially useful when a re-imported network includes new nodes. However. Only nodes included in current level can be included in the next lower level.cadfamily. — The operation(s) for subsequent levels define nodes to be included in that level from the nodes in the previous level. For example. For more information. There is no limit to the number of levels that can be defined.0 www.grf) file and later load the file for re-use in the Group Nodes Into Subnets (Advanced) operation.ma) file to apply saved grouping settings to a network: not applicable Understanding Advanced Grouping: Levels. A level definition includes one or more operations.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.) Modeler/Release 14. you must define at least one level. Save grouping settings for future use: not applicable Save to a (.please inform us. Level 1 is the top-most subnet. Level 2 is a child subnet of Level 1. and Level 3 is a child subnet of Level 2.

0 . all nodes (including inferred nodes) are moved to subnet xyz and no nodes are moved to subnet abc. • Parameter—Defines the selected operation.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Not all operations require a parameter. and parameters are specified to define the new subnet hierarchy. Additionally.if tort to your rights. Each operation defines the nodes to be included in a subnet. you can specify to move all inferred nodes to subnet abc. operations.please inform us.3—Project Editor You must define one or more operations for a level. For example. Figure 3-38 provides an overview of the Group Nodes into Subnets (Advanced) operation by showing how levels. the sequence of the operations affects the outcome. Table 3-29 lists the available advanced operations and their parameters. if you reverse the sequence.com The document is for study only.cadfamily. and then all other nodes to subnet xyz. ER-3-134 www.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. However.

you can quickly re-arrange the non-hierarchical (flat) network into the hierarchy shown on the right. To place a node in a lower hierarchical level. specified nodes are moved to the DC subnet.SF Network . Level 3 Preview: From the Local Service Provider subnet. Level 1 Preview: All nodes are moved to the Core subnet.we will delete ER-3-135 .com The document is for study only.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Consider the graphical display of the network below. Each level is a chain of filters. specified nodes are moved to an associated lower-level subnet. Original Preview: All nodes are in the same subnet.3—Project Editor Figure 3-38 Overview of Group Nodes into Subnets (Advanced) Operation Use the Group Nodes into Subnets operation to reorganize nodes into a hierarchy. After defining each level. Using the Group Nodes into Subnets operation.DC Network Simply define operations for each hierarchical level of the network until the nodes are arranged as you want. Below are the previews for each level of the above example.please inform us.Local Service Provider . Modeler/Release 14. you can preview the effects.LA Network . you must filter the node through the top levels.cadfamily.if tort to your rights.ATL Network . Non-hierarchy (Flat) Network Hierarchical Network Core . Level 2 Preview: From the Core subnet.0 www. There is no hierarchy.

you should carefully consider the following items. Nodes can be defined and grouped by — AS number — OSPF area — name (using regular expressions or sub-strings) Additionally. Consider the set of nodes that you want to include in the reorganization: — All nodes in network — All nodes in or below a specific subnet — All nodes in a specific subnet — A set of selected nodes • Determine the new hierarchy of the nodes. The file can be used to quickly load grouping settings.cadfamily.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. Additionally. you can save the grouping settings to a file. when creating the grouping settings file.please inform us. you can explicitly keep or move specified nodes (including inferred nodes) at a specified level. Considering the following items will help you define grouping operations and determine the best view from which to run the operation.com The document is for study only.3—Project Editor Considerations for Grouping Nodes into Subnets (Advanced) Before using the Group Nodes into Subnets (Advanced) operation. you can create a corresponding modeling assistant file. You can use the model assistant file to automatically apply grouping specifications to a scenario using the Model Assistant operation.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. • Identify the nodes to reorganize.0 . If planning to repeat the same organization multiple times. consider how you can define levels and operations to define the hierarchy. Additionally. ER-3-136 www. Consider where the first level of the new subnet hierarchy should be placed: — Top subnet — A subnet within the existing hierarchy • Determine whether this reorganization is a one-time event or if the organization will be repeated multiple times.if tort to your rights. • Identify the placement of the new subnet hierarchy within the project. Consider how you want the new hierarchy of nodes organized.

If the checkbox is not selected. Note—This operation cannot be undone. End of Procedure 3-60 Modeler/Release 14. 7 Choose OK.if tort to your rights. specify the requested information. select the grouping operation. 3 Choose Topology > Subnets > Group Nodes into Subnets… ➥ The Group Nodes into Subnets dialog box appears. Procedure 3-60 Grouping Nodes into Subnets 1 Go to the subnet containing the node(s) that you want to move to a child subnet. 5 If the selected operation includes parameters.cadfamily. The standard grouping operations allow you to group nodes from the current subnet into child subnet(s). Figure 3-39 Group Nodes into Subnets Dialog Box 4 From the “Group nodes using” pull-down list. Table 3-28 lists the available operations and associated parameters.0 www.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. For a list of the standard grouping operations. Advanced on page ER-3-132. Note—Use Grouping Nodes into Subnets (Advanced) on page ER-3-139 to group nodes throughout the network into multi-level subnet hierarchies. 2 If you want to perform this operation on a set of selected nodes. select the nodes. click the “Relayout nodes in the subnet (Balanced)” checkbox. 6 To layout the nodes in the new child subnet with a balanced layout. For a comparison between the standard and advanced grouping operations.com The document is for study only.we will delete ER-3-137 .please inform us.3—Project Editor Grouping Nodes into Subnets Use the Group Nodes into Subnets operation to perform standard grouping operations. the layout from the parent subnet is retained. see Table 3-27 Grouping Nodes into Subnets Feature Comparison: Standard vs. 8 The Group Nodes into Subnets dialog box closes and the specified nodes are moved to the new child subnet(s). see Standard Grouping Operations on page ER-3-138.

For example. • Subnet name prefix: Specifies a prefix for subnet names. Parameter: • Subnet name: Specifies the name of the child subnet to which the selected nodes are moved. if you specify “2”. A value is required. using the beginning characters of the name. Parameters: • No.g. End of Table 3-28 ER-3-138 www..0 . If no subnet name is specified. if you specify “CR*”.please inform us. • Subnet name: Specifies the child subnet name. A prefix is optional. String containing Groups nodes by name using a matching string. Parameters: • All containing: Specifies a string. nodes are grouped into child subnets based on the first 2 characters of their names.3—Project Editor Standard Grouping Operations The following table lists the standard grouping operations. then all selected nodes are moved to a child subnet named “Routers”. “subnet_1”). based on a regular expression. then the subnet is given a default name (e. if you specify “R1”. then all nodes with names containing “CR” (e. Enter ““1” or greater. if you select all routers and specify “Routers” in the Subnet name field. then the subnet is given a default name (e. If no subnet name is specified.. of characters: Specifies the character positions of the name.g. Parameters: • Regular expression: Specifies the regular expression for grouping nodes. For example.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.com The document is for study only. Selected nodes Moves selected nodes into a child subnet. Each child subnet is given the name of the first 2 characters..com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. “subnet_1”). then all nodes with names starting with “CR” are moved to a single child subnet. CR12 and TR14) are moved to a single child subnet. Table 3-28 Operation First <n> characters Standard Grouping Operations Description Groups nodes by name. Regular expression Groups nodes by name. For example. For example.g.cadfamily.if tort to your rights. • Subnet name: Specifies the child subnet name.

select the nodes. review the following: • Table 3-27 Grouping Nodes into Subnets Feature Comparison: Standard vs. 4 Select the Advanced button. Advanced on page ER-3-132 • Understanding Advanced Grouping: Levels.if tort to your rights. 2 If you want to perform this operation on a set of selected nodes. it is a good idea to first perform the operation on a duplicate of the scenario that you want to change.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.3—Project Editor Grouping Nodes into Subnets (Advanced) Before running the Group Nodes into Subnets (Advanced) operation described in Procedure 3-61. 3 Choose Topology > Subnets > Group Nodes into Subnets… ➥ The Group Nodes into Subnets dialog box appears.0 www.please inform us. Figure 3-40 Group Nodes Into Subnets (Advanced) Dialog Box Modeler/Release 14.we will delete ER-3-139 .com The document is for study only. Procedure 3-61 Grouping Nodes into Subnets (Advanced) 1 Go to the best view for running this operation (depending on the included nodes and the placement of the first level subnet). shown in Figure 3-39. ➥ The Group Nodes into Subnets (Advanced) dialog box appears. shown in Figure 3-40. Operations. and Parameters on page ER-3-133 • Considerations for Grouping Nodes into Subnets (Advanced) on page ER-3-136 Additionally.cadfamily.

6. operations. 5.2 From the “Destination subnet for first level” pull-down list.grf file. 6 Specify the new subnet hierarchy and the placement of nodes within the hierarchy. choose the placement of the first level in the subnet hierarchy: • Top subnet—Specifies that Level 1 of the new subnet hierarchy is placed in the top level of the scenario.1 From the “Nodes to group” pull-down list.1 To create a level.com The document is for study only.cadfamily.1-step 6.ma) when saving the grouping operations. ER-3-140 www. and operations for the levels (step 7).com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. click “Add level…”.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. and parameters already defined. The new subnet hierarchy can be specified using one of the following methods: • Load a grouping settings file (. as shown in the following figure.0 . you cannot create a model assistant (.3).if tort to your rights. • Current subnet—Specifies that Level 1 of the new subnet hierarchy is placed in the current subnet. 5. From the Load Grouping Settings File dialog box. select the file to load and click OK. • Define levels (step 6. choose the set of nodes to include in the new hierarchy: • Only nodes in current subnet • All nodes in or below current subnet • All nodes in network • Selected nodes Note: If “Selected nodes” is chosen. The level and operation parameters are loaded.grf) with levels. click the Load button.3—Project Editor 5 Specify the nodes to group and the placement of the new subnets.please inform us. To load a .

Figure 3-41 Group Nodes Into Subnets Dialog Box Modeler/Release 14. click “Click to enter operations…” ➥ The Grouping Operations dialog box appears. 7.2 Click “Enter description…” and specify a free-from text description of the level.cadfamily.we will delete ER-3-141 . 6. 6.com The document is for study only.please inform us.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. as shown in the following figure.if tort to your rights.1 To create an operation.3 Repeat the above steps for each level that you want to create.3—Project Editor ➥ Level “1” appears.0 www. 7 Create an operation for a level. as shown in the following figure.

• Delete button—Deletes the selected operation. 7.3 If the selected operation includes a parameter. click OK.2 Click “Add operation…” and select an operation from the pull-down menu. 9 Preview the new subnet hierarchy and the placement of nodes in the hierarchy. 7. Enter the information and click OK. The specified prefix is added to the beginning of the subnet name.com The document is for study only.please inform us.4 Optionally. as follows: ER-3-142 www. • Move Down button—Moves the selected operation one row down.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.6 Manage operations in the same level. For a description of the settings.0 . see Table 3-30.cadfamily. 8 Continue to define another level and/or operations for a level. including layout and zoom level. 7.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Click the Edit Subnet Settings button. each subnet can be specified with a different prefix. 7.8 After defining all operations and subnet settings. 7.5 Repeat the above sub-steps for each operation that you want to define. select an operation and choose one of the following buttons: • Move Up button—Moves the selected operation one row up. as shown in the following figure. Subnets settings specify characteristics of the subnets defined by the operations.3—Project Editor 7. and click OK. specify the settings. 7.if tort to your rights. Since each operation defines the nodes to be included in a subnet.7 Define subnet settings for all operations in the same level. Table 3-29 lists the available operations and associated parameters. you can enter a Subnet Name Prefix. the parameter dialog box appears to request the parameter information.

10 Fine-tune the subnet hierarchy and placement of nodes. 13. 13.please inform us.grf file. click the Reset button and then click the Preview button. specify a file name for the .cadfamily.1 From the pull-down menu.ma) that calls the . be sure to click the Save As button before you click the Create subnets button. Note—If you want to save the grouping settings to a . use this option if you selected “Top Subnet” for the first level destination subnet in step 5.ma file and click Save. You can use this . For a description of the settings. click on the subnet icons to expand/contract the tree to view the placement of subnets and nodes. Choose from • View current subnet—Displays the current level as the top-most level in the preview. Destination subnet settings specify characteristics of the destination subnet. After the Group Nodes Into Subnets dialog box closes. select the preview view option.3 In the preview. 14 Create subnets.4 In the Save As dialog box. 11 Define destination subnet settings. and click OK.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.2 Click the Preview button. You can also save a model assistant file (. This information includes the number of nodes moved to new subnets and the number of subnets created. ➥ The grouping preview information appears. To preview the changes. specify the settings. see Model Assistant on page ER-3-148. To remove empty subnets from the new subnet hierarchy.grf file.grf file and click Save. 13. If necessary. see Table 3-30. continue to specify the new subnet hierarchy and placement of nodes by defining levels. 9. 12 Indicate whether to remove empty subnets at all levels. Modeler/Release 14. described in step 6.if tort to your rights. specify a file name for the . For more information. • View entire network—Displays the entire network in the preview. save the subnet level and operation parameters to a file (. and parameters.0 www. ➥ The Model Assistant File message box appears asking if you want to save a corresponding model assistant file.grf) to load and use in the future (as described in step 6). 9.3—Project Editor 9. use this option if you selected “Current subnet” for the first level destination subnet in step 5.3 Click Yes.com The document is for study only. Typically. 13.2 In the Save As dialog box. Click the Edit Destination Subnet Settings button.we will delete ER-3-143 .ma file with the Model Assistant operation to overlay the additional grouping settings into subnets to provide a mix of rules-based node grouping and explicit node grouping. operations. Typically.1 Click the Save As button. you cannot save the grouping settings. 13 Optionally. including layout and zoom level. click the “Remove empty subnets at all levels” checkbox.

3—Project Editor Click the Create Subnets button.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Note—This operation cannot be undone. The nodes are moved into the new subnet hierarchy.if tort to your rights.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.0 .please inform us.com The document is for study only. The Group Nodes Into Subnets dialog box closes. End of Procedure 3-61 Grouping Operations (Advanced) The following table lists the advanced grouping operations. ER-3-144 www.cadfamily.

the regular expression ^([a-zA-Z])+[0-9] groups nodes that start with one or more letters followed by a digit into subnets such that all nodes that have the same first few letters up to the digit are grouped into one subnet. and the seventh through eighth positions are grouped in the same subnet. there can be only one matching portion of a node name.6-7”.if tort to your rights.3—Project Editor Table 3-29 Advanced Grouping Operations Operation Group by AS numbers Description Groups nodes by AS number. • Parameters: None • Subnet Name Prefix: Optional Group by OSPF areas Groups nodes by OSPF area.com The document is for study only.please inform us. The matching portion of the node name is used as the subnet name. Specify a name by a regular expression using Posix Extended Regular Expression syntax. starting with “0”. nodes with names starting with the same first character are grouped into the same subnet. Nodes with matching positions are grouped into one subnet. If you specify the parameter “0-2. All nodes with the same matching portion of name go into the same subnet. Specify a string position or range. The name of a node is defined by the name attribute. For example: If you specify the parameter “0”.4. If the regular expression contains “subexpressions” (the portion of the regular expression inside parentheses). For more information about the syntax of Posix regular expressions. If you specify the parameter “0-2”. see http://www.opengroup. there can be multiple matching portions of a node name.0 www. Enter a comma (. node names with matching characters in the first through third positions. • Subnet Name Prefix: Optional Group by name using string matching Groups nodes by name using a matching string. • Parameters: Specify a regular expression. The OSPF area of a node is defined by the Area ID attribute.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. The AS number of a node is defined by the Autonomous System Number attribute. with each matching portion corresponding to a subexpression.html. • Parameters: Specify a character position or a range of character positions.org/onlinepubs/007908799/xbd/re. If the regular expression contains no subexpressions. the fifth position. • Subnet Name Prefix: Optional Modeler/Release 14. The matching portions of a node name are concated to form a new subnet name and all nodes with the same matching portion of names go into the same subnet.) if specifying multiple positions and/or ranges. nodes with names starting with the first three characters are grouped into the same subnet.we will delete ER-3-145 . The nodes are grouped based on the parts of their names matching the regular expression.cadfamily. For example. • Parameters: None • Subnet Name Prefix: Optional Group by name using regular expression Groups nodes by name using a regular expression.

• Parameters: Choose “All nodes”.com The document is for study only. If “Nodes with names that match regular expression” is chosen. specify a regular expression. Additionally. with the name “Network Cloud”. “All inferred nodes”. • Subnet Name Prefix: Optional Keep nodes at this level Retains specified node(s) in the current subnet level. • Subnet Name Prefix: Optional End of Table 3-29 ER-3-146 www. • Subnet Name Prefix: Optional Move nodes to a subnet Moves specified node(s) into a subnet.3—Project Editor Table 3-29 Advanced Grouping Operations (Continued) Operation Group inferred clouds Description Groups inferred clouds into a subnet. or “Nodes with names that match regular expression”. If “Nodes with names that match regular expression” is chosen. Specify nodes by selecting one of the following: • Parameters: Choose “All nodes”.if tort to your rights. • Parameters: None.please inform us. or “Nodes with names that match regular expression”. specify a regular expression.cadfamily. Specified nodes are retained at the current level even if they fall within the parameters of an operation in the next level.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. specify a new or existing subnet to which the node(s) are moved. “All inferred nodes”.0 .we will delete Modeler/Release 14.

• Fix exactly—Specifies that the aspect ratio is dependent on the location of the nodes. Description Modeler/Release 14.cadfamily. Select one of the following: • Use screen’s aspect ratio—Specifies an aspect ratio of 1.com The document is for study only. For more information about “balanced” layout. Table 3-30 Edit Destination Subnet Settings / Edit Subnet Settings Option Lay out change subnets Do not change position of existing nodes and subnets Use simple layout method Retains the layout of existing nodes and subnets within changed subnets. see Lay Out Nodes (Balanced) on page ER-3-50. • Use square aspect ratio—Specifies an aspect ratio of 1:1. • If unchecked.if tort to your rights.please inform us.we will delete ER-3-147 . balanced layout is used.3—Project Editor Subnet Settings The following table lists the settings that specify characteristics of new and updated subnets. see Lay Out Nodes (Simple) on page ER-3-50. Settings can be defined for the top-level destination subnet and for each subsequent level of subnets. Fit subnet around location of nodes and subnets Use screen’s aspect ratio Use square aspect ratio Fit exactly Specifies the aspect ratio of subnet range.0 www.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Set (destination subnet) zoom level to show all nodes and subnets End of Table 3-30 Specifies whether to set the zoom to make all nodes and subnets visible. “simple” layout is used. For more information about “simple” layout. including layout and zoom level.333. Specifies layout method: • If checked.

you can perform the following tasks: • Saving Topology to a Model Assistant File on page ER-3-149 • Editing a Model Assistant File on page ER-3-150 Although you can edit a model assistant file from the gui. You can create a model assistant file to • Create subnetworks. model assistant files may be edited from any text editor and appear as shown in Figure 3-44.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.0 . they will not work in the current release. applied during import. WARNING—If you do not convert your pre-11. A model assistant file is an ASCII text file that specifies a set of changes to a scenario. • Applying a Model Assistant File to a Scenario on page ER-3-157 ER-3-148 www.please inform us. then apply the file to make those changes in one operation. You can more learn about the format of model assistant files by creating one and examining it in ASCII format.if tort to your rights.com The document is for study only. Model assistant files can be applied to an existing topology. and demands • Set object attributes • Import node aliases • Specify object locations • Reorganize node hierarchically in subnets Using the Model Assistant operation. You can specify multiple changes in one file. or created from your network model. links. modifications. nodes.5 model assistant files containing networks imported through DCI.3—Project Editor Model Assistant You can use model assistant files to specify certain attributes.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.cadfamily. or additions to a network model and save the file for later use.

The default filename is <project>-<scenario>-ma_export.if tort to your rights.cadfamily.3—Project Editor Saving Topology to a Model Assistant File The following procedure describes how to create a Model Assistant file for a network topology. 3. 4 Provide a filename. 2 Choose Topology > Model Assistant > Save Current Topology to File… ➥ The Model Assistant Conversion dialog box appears.please inform us. 3.we will delete ER-3-149 . 5 Click Save.3 Click Save. End of Procedure 3-62 Modeler/Release 14.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.2 Specify the link attributes and for which set of links in the Link Information tab. Procedure 3-62 Save Topology to Model Assistant File 1 Open any scenario in the Project Editor. 3 Define the attributes you want to save in the Model Assistant file.1 Specify the node attributes and for which set of nodes in the Node Information tab. 3.com The document is for study only.0 www.

cadfamily. when the model assistant file is applied during import or from the menu. • If you want to save your data to a model assistant file for future use.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. End of Procedure 3-63 ER-3-150 www. click Save. • If you want to reset all settings on all pages and reenter your data.0 . click Clear. from left to right. choose Topology > Model Assistant > Edit File… ➥ The Edit Model Assistant File dialog box appears. see Specifying Attributes in the Model Assistant on page ER-3-155. Procedure 3-63 Editing a Model Assistant File 1 In the Project Editor.ma file The tabbed sections of the model assistant file are started in order.com The document is for study only.3—Project Editor Editing a Model Assistant File The following procedure describes how to edit a Model Assistant file using the graphical user interface. 3 Click Apply to apply your data to the network.please inform us.if tort to your rights. or click Close to close the dialog box without applying your data.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. Some entries require you to specify attribute names exactly. Each tab corresponds to a different type of information. For more information. leave the page empty. Figure 3-42 Model Assistant Dialog Box Model Assistant tabs Open ASCII version of . listed in Table 3-31. The tabs are started in order (from left to right) when the model assistant file is applied. 2 The Model Assistant dialog box shows a series of tabs. • If you do not want to apply a certain type of data.

Each row in the table represents a subnet to be created. If the specified hierarchy does not exist. the new node is placed in the top subnet. • Link Model—Model to use for the link object. the new subnet is placed in the top subnet. Subnet Creation Modeler/Release 14. For example.please inform us. then click and select an object name or double-click and type in an object name. otherwise. the intermediate subnets are created automatically when the model assistant file is applied. If there is only one node with the specified name in the network. For example. • Source Port—Source port of the link.we will delete ER-3-151 . The columns are as follows: • Link Name—Name of the link object. Specify subnets you want to create in the network. You do not need to specify the full hierarchical name of this node.if tort to your rights. ethernet2_slip0_firewall).Bethesda. a full hierarchy looks like this: top.com The document is for study only.cadfamily.g. by node name and node model.3—Project Editor Table 3-31 Model Assistant File Tabs Tab Object Destruction Description Specify network objects you want to destroy. • Destination Node—Destination node of the link. You do not need to specify the full hierarchical name of this node. the model assistant will find it.MidAtlantic. Each row in the table represents an object to be destroyed.Bethesda. You can select a data rate from the pull-down menu (single-click) or type the data rate (double-click)..0 www. • For node model. otherwise.MidAtlantic. you can select a model from the pull-down menu (single-click) or type the model name (double-click) (e. a full hierarchy looks like this: top. Each row in the table represents a link to be created. Add rows. the model assistant will find it. If the specified hierarchy does not exist. the intermediate subnets are created automatically when the model assistant file is applied. • Source Node—Source node of the link. • You must specify a full hierarchy for the node name. • Destination Port—Destination port of the link. Enter the name of the subnet you want to create.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. You must specify a full hierarchy for the subnet. Node Creation Specify nodes you want to create in the network. Link Creation Specify links you want to create in the network. • Data Rate—Data rate of the link. Each row in the table represents a node to be created. If there is only one node with the specified name in the network.

the columns are as follows. Object Attributes Specify attributes for the various objects in your network. • Demand Name—Name of the demand object. You can select a demand model from the pull-down menu (single-click) or type the model name (double-click). the columns are as follows. You do not need to specify the full hierarchical name of this node. You do not need to specify the full hierarchical name of this node.com The document is for study only. • Attribute Value—New value for the specified attribute. This can be a simple or a compound attribute. If the specified hierarchy does not exist. You can select a network object from the pull-down menu (single-click) or type the object name (double-click). the model assistant will find it. If you specified a compound attribute for the name.0 . You do not need to specify the full hierarchical name of this site. the columns are as follows. • Alias—Alias to set on the specified node. You can select a subnet from the pull-down menu (single-click) or type the subnet name (double-click). the intermediate subnets are created automatically when the model assistant file is applied. • Node Name—Name of the node whose aliases you want to set. Note that simple attributes include simple (non-compound) attributes of compound attributes. the columns are as follows. if there is only one site with the specified name in the network. Each row in the table represents a demand to be created.cadfamily. If there is only one node with the specified name in the network. You can select an existing node or node to be created from the pull-down menu (single-click) or type the node name (double-click). the model assistant will find it. If there is only one node with the specified name in the network.please inform us. Each row in the table represents an object attribute. • New Site Hierarchy—New hierarchy for the site.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.if tort to your rights. • Object Name—Name of the object whose attribute you want to set. • Source Node—Source node of the new demand. ER-3-152 www. You can select a site from the pull-down menu (single-click) or type the site name (double-click). • Attribute Name—Name of the attribute to set. the model assistant will find it. you can enter only symbolic values. • Destination Node—Destination node of the new demand. Site Hierarchy Change the hierarchy of sites in your network.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. You can select a node from the pull-down menu (single-click) or type the node name (double-click). Each row in the table represents a site whose hierarchy is to be changed. You can select an existing node or node to be created from the pull-down menu (single-click) or type the node name (double-click). • Demand Model—Model name of the demand object.3—Project Editor Table 3-31 Model Assistant File Tabs (Continued) Tab Demand Creation Description Specify demands you want to create in the network. • Original Site Name—Name of the site whose hierarchy you want to change. Each row in the table represents an alias. Node Aliases Specify aliases on the nodes in your network.

see Group Nodes into Subnets on page ER-3-132. and Map. Grid Division. or disabled. You have five choices: Display Resolution.3—Project Editor Table 3-31 Model Assistant File Tabs (Continued) Tab Subnet Properties Description Set display properties on subnets in your network. • Property Value—Value of the subnet property you want to set. • Grouping Definition File—The name of the general rules (. • Grid Draw Style—Grid draw style in the subnet. Click the setting to specify another subnet. the columns are as follows.0 www. and degrees. meters.please inform us.com The document is for study only. Subnet Name—Name of the subnet whose properties you want to set.grf) file associated with the model assistant (. Subnet Property—The subnet property to set. • Map—Background image for the subnet.we will delete ER-3-153 . Right-click on the setting to change the option. in whatever your display units are. • Grid Division—Grid division in the subnet. The input to this column depends on your choice of property in the previous column as follows: • Display Resolution—Display resolution of your subnet in pixels per whatever your subnet units are. Grid Draw Style. Each row in the table represents a property. Your choices are solid.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. All node in or below current subnet. • Source Subnet—The subnet from which the grouping subnet operation should be run. You do not need to specify the full hierarchical name of this subnet. • Nodes to Group—The set of nodes to include in the new hierarchy. Modeler/Release 14. Choose from: Only nodes in current subnet.if tort to your rights. The table allows one row to represent a set of subnet grouping rules. Display Units. Click the setting to specify another subnet.ma) file. Click the setting to select another file. feet. For more information. the columns are as follows. • Destination subnet—The name of the subnet that will contain the first level of the new subnet hierarchy. • Display Units—Units your subnet will be displayed in. You can select a subnet from the pull-down menu (single-click) or type the subnet name (double-click). and All nodes in Network. kilometers. dashed. Your choices are miles. The value specified must be a valid image file Subnet Grouping Specify subnet grouping properties.cadfamily.

ON"). "Toronto.0 .com The document is for study only. and [X. see Importing Multi-Layer Switch Configurations on page XDI-2-10. "Paris.5"). Country—City and country where your node is to be placed (e. • Switch Name—Name of the switch to be coupled with the chosen router.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. NXX—Area code (NPA) and first three digits of the phone number (NXX) of the area where your node is to be placed (e. The values of the coordinates you specify will be interpreted in the units of the site's parent subnet. You can select a site from the pull-down menu (single-click) or type the site name (double-click).3—Project Editor Table 3-31 Model Assistant File Tabs (Continued) Tab Site Locations Description Set the geographical locations of sites in your network.g. Country]. Each row in the table represents a site position. You can specify the state using a two letter code or the full state name. Router/Switch Coupling Couple routers with switches in your network. -75. [City. You can specify the country using the full country name or a two letter country code from the ISO-3166 standard.if tort to your rights. or the full province name.2"). "240. You can specify the province using a two-letter code. These values are interpreted in the units of the site's parent subnet. The input to this column depends on your choice of format in the previous column as follows: • NPA. the columns are as follows. Long].g. FR")..g. Location Data—Location of the site. 497").g.please inform us. Long—Latitude and longitude where your node is to be placed (e. • Lat. Each row in the table represents a site location. Site Name—Name of the site whose location you want to set. The input to this column (X. • City. 234.g. • Site Position—Position of the site. [City. This format is only valid for locations within the US. Y) specifies the value of the x and y coordinates of the site. "38. the columns are as follows. You can select a site from the pull-down menu (single-click) or type the site name (double-click).. • City. • Router Name—Name of the router to be coupled with a switch..4. • X..we will delete Modeler/Release 14. Each row in the table represents a coupling. NXX]. Non-Geographical Site Positions Set the positions of sites in the Project Editor window when geographic positioning is turned off. "Bethesda. Y (in parent's units)]. • Site Name—Name of the site whose non-geographic position you want to set. A pop-up menu shows all defined views in the current network. This format is only valid for locations within Canada. For more information on multi-layer switch imports with eXpress Data Import. [Lat. the columns are as follows. End of Table 3-31 ER-3-154 www. Province (Canada)].g.cadfamily. State (USA)].. [City. State (USA)—City and state where your node is to be placed (e. The pull-down menu lists all sites in the network and the Subnet Creation and Node Creation pages. • Name of Associated View—The view with which the non-geographic position is to be associated. MD"). You have four choices: [NPA. "1234. • City. Province (Canada)—City and province where your node is to be placed (e. Y (in parent's units)—X and Y coordinates at which your node is to be placed (e. Location Type—Format in which your site's location is to be specified. This format is only valid for locations within the US and Canada.

com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Note—The “[IP]” at the start of the string shown in the tooltip indicates the attribute group.please inform us. the Model Assistant can be a valuable time-saver.Interface Speed". After you have gathered information about the attributes you want to set.Interface Information [1]. you must specify exact information. suppose the tooltip shows the following three strings: "[IP] IP Routing Parameters. 2 Set the "Value" field to the value you want to specify in the Model Assistant.if tort to your rights. you must enter the full hierarchical name of the attribute. devices. If the attribute is part of a compound attribute.we will delete ER-3-155 . Procedure 3-64 Find Attribute Names and Values in Topology 1 Right-click on a network object.cadfamily. you do not need to include this in the “Attribute Name” field. Modeler/Release 14. when you want to apply a single attribute value to a set of. Therefore.Interface Speed" "Symbol: 10 Mbps" "Floating Point Value: 10.com The document is for study only. Additionally.000" In this case. However. End of Procedure 3-64 You can set attributes for a device in your model by simply editing the attributes individually.Interface Information [1].0 www. ➥ The tooltip shows the full hierarchical name and current value setting for the attribute. For example. you would set the attribute fields in the model assistant file as follows: "Attribute Name" = "IP Routing Parameters. The hierarchical name includes each parent attribute and the row number. “Attribute Value” = “10 Mbps” or “10. if you want to set an attribute in your model assistant file that is part of a compound attribute. load and edit or create a model assistant file. the work can be time-consuming. which is not part of the actual attribute name. and choose Edit Attributes. expand the attribute tree until the attribute you want to set is visible in the “Name” column.000”.3—Project Editor Specifying Attributes in the Model Assistant For many of the attribute names and values in the model assistant file. 3 Rest the cursor over the Value field. or all. The best way to verify the correct format for an attribute name is described in the following procedure. For that scenario.

44. In this example. -118.please inform us.. and choose the . as shown in Figure 3-44. you can click on Edit in Text Editor to view an ASCII version of the file.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.LA: LatLong: 33. Figure 3-44 Model Assistant File in ASCII Format start_header_block Model Assistant Version: end_header_block Enter latitude and longitude information or specific link information in ASCII form.62.com The document is for study only. -122. click on Load.SanDiego: LatLong: 32.38 end_location_specifications start_link_specifications "SF-Core[ATM0/0] "Denver-Core[ATM0/0] "DC-Core[ATM1/0] "Boston-Edge[Serial0/1] "Atlanta-Core[ATM0/0] end_link_specifications <--> <--> <--> <--> <--> 192_168_0_112/29[N/A]": 192_168_0_112/29[N/A]": 192_168_0_112/29[N/A]": NY-Edge[Serial0/1]": 192_168_0_112/29[N/A]": SONET/OC1:N/A:N/A SONET/OC1:N/A:N/A SONET/OC1:N/A:N/A DS0:N/A:N/A SONET/OC1:N/A:N/A ER-3-156 www.3—Project Editor To load a particular model assistant file in the editor..cadfamily. you see the anatomy of site location specifications and site link specifications.if tort to your rights.0 .40 Office Network. 1.10 Office Network. -117. Figure 3-43 Load Model Assistant File After selecting and loading a model assistant file.SanDiego: LatLong: 37.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.ma file you wish to edit from the Select a Model Assistant File to Load dialog box.93.0 start_location_specifications Office Network.

Default Gateway”:“1. Applying a Model Assistant File to a Scenario The following procedures describes applying a Model Assistant file to a scenario.Default Gateway).cadfamily. exact attribute name (IP Routing Parameters[0].1” end_object_attributes Note that the syntax is exact hierarchical object name (top.. if you have twelve rows in the compound attribute IP Routing Parameters[0].please inform us.e. “IP Routing Parameters[0]. and exact attribute value (1. simply add a line to the file.we will delete ER-3-157 . Each entry is enclosed in quotation marks and is separated by colons.1. For example. 2 Apply the model assistant data using one of the following methods: • If you want to apply a model assistant file without editing it.1.node_0).1.Interface Information. you need to be sure to place the sub(n) row number after the attribute (i. The sub zero [0] shown after “IP Routing Parameters” in the above example indicates the row number of the attribute.Interface Information[11]” indicates the twelfth row in the node attribute). For example.node_0”:“IP Routing Parameters[0].com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. if you want to add an attribute in the Object Attributes block.1. Note—When entering attribute names and values through the GUI. End of Procedure 3-65 Modeler/Release 14. using the syntax required for each type of data. as described in Procedure 3-63. Note—DCI requires that you have eXpress Data Import functionality.com The document is for study only. use the following syntax: start_object_attributes “top. You can edit the text version of the model assistant file or you can edit the file from the GUI. choose Topology > Model Assistant > Apply File… • If you want to create a new file or edit an existing file. Procedure 3-65 Applying Model Assistant Data to a Scenario 1 Open the project and scenario that you want to update.1). you do not use quotation marks.if tort to your rights.0 www.3—Project Editor To make an entry into the ASCII version of a model assistant file. see Editing a Model Assistant File on page ER-3-150. you can apply it to a scenario by selecting the file during Device Configuration Import (DCI) or by following Procedure 3-65. After creating a model assistant file.

• Line—To create an annotation line.com The document is for study only. Note—Adding an annotation object does not affect model functionality. ellipse. then left-click in the workspace for the start point and each vertex (direction change) and double-left-click for the end of the line. which can be used to define whether an object is solid. You can use annotation lines to point to other objects or to visually separate different groups of objects in the workspace.please inform us. Procedure 3-66 Adding an Annotation Object 1 Make sure that the model you want to annotate is in the active window.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. set the “rotation” attribute to the number of degrees you want the object rotated. ER-3-158 www.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. follow the instructions below. icon 3 Create an annotation object by left-clicking it in the annotation palette and then defining the object size or location in the workspace. Boxes and ellipses also have a “color” attribute. click on the desired annotation object button and drag an outline of the shape into the workspace.if tort to your rights. These shapes can be resized by selecting the object. and in fact an object can be switched back and forth by setting the “shape” attribute to either box or ellipse. Ellipses will appear as boxes as they are being created. ➥ The annotation palette appears. To delete an annotation object. Figure 3-45 Annotation Palette left to right—box.cadfamily. Annotation boxes and ellipses are essentially the same type of object. Descriptions of the available annotation objects and how to create them follow: • Box or Ellipse—To create a box or ellipse. To create or modify an annotation object. line. but will change to an ellipse object once the size has been defined. select it and choose Edit > Cut. 2 Choose Topology > Open Annotation Palette. To rotate a box or ellipse annotation. click the line button in the annotation palette. text.0 . Size can also be controlled by the “height” and “width” attributes. then left-clicking on a corner and dragging the object to a new size. and a “fill” attribute. which can be set to any color in the palette.3—Project Editor Open Annotation Palette This operation allows you to add graphic elements to a model to help organize it visually or to call attention to key elements.

lines.please inform us.0 www. or large (Courier 14). • Icon—You might want to add icon annotations as part of a legend. Text can be moved or resized in the same manner as the other annotation objects. double-click on it to open the text edit pad. 4 When finished creating an object. and a line can be dashed or solid according to the line “style” attribute setting. see Chapter 18 Icon Database Editor on page ER-18-1. Modeler/Release 14. To edit text. ellipses. click the icon annotation button. or icon • Right-click to stop creating boxes. set the “rotation” attribute to the number of degrees you want the text object annotated. or icons • Left-click in the annotation palette to create a different type of annotation Note—You may only create one text object for each time you click on the text button in the annotation palette.we will delete ER-3-159 . To specify the icon to use. ellipse. You can drag an annotation line after creating it.3—Project Editor You can create curved annotation lines by setting the “draw style” attribute to spline. you can: • Left-click to define another box. set the “rotation” attribute to the number of degrees you want the object rotated.com The document is for study only. To add an icon annotation. right-click on the annotation object and choose Edit Attributes. and you can enter the desired text within the pad. To rotate a text annotation. and the “font” attribute changes the font size to small (Courier 10). and the text will appear in the appropriate place in the editor window. Click OK when you are finished.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. For more information about icons. then click in the workspace where you want the annotation to appear. A text edit pad will open.cadfamily. click the text annotation button. then set the “icon name” attribute. You can also drag an annotation to a new location and create multiple-segment transitions. You can specify an icon from any icon database included in your model directories. and add head and tail arrows by setting the “head arrow” and “tail arrow” attributes. medium (Courier 12). • Text—To add text. To rotate a line annotation.if tort to your rights. line. The “color” and “background color” attributes can be used to set the text to any of the RGB colors. see Chapter 2 Preferences on page EI-2-1. For information about changing the default annotation font types or sizes. then click in the workspace where you want the text to appear. then make any necessary changes.

To make the objects visible again. clear the option View > Annotations > Show In Subnet. select View > Annotations > Show In Subnet.please inform us.if tort to your rights.3—Project Editor 5 Modify the annotation object’s attributes to customize its appearance. and text objects only) Defines whether a line has a tail arrow Specifies the text to be displayed (text objects only) Specifies the width of annotation object in pixels Defines the X position of an object within a model Defines the Y position of an object within a model Tail Arrow Text Width X Position Y Position End of Table 3-32 6 If you do not want the annotation objects to appear at a particular time. This option will make all annotation objects invisible.com The document is for study only. including those in other models.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.cadfamily.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. ellipse.0 . Each object’s attributes are listed in the following table. End of Procedure 3-66 ER-3-160 www. Table 3-32 Annotation Object Attributes Attribute Background Color Color Draw Style Fill Font Head Arrow Height Icon Name Line Style Rotation Description Specifies the RBG color of the text background (text objects only) Specifies the RGB color of the object Defines a straight or curved line (line objects only) Defines whether the object has a fill Defines the font in which text is to be displayed (text objects only) Defines whether a line has a head arrow Specifies the height of the annotation object in pixels The icon to use for the annotation (icon objects only) Defines a dashed or solid line (line objects only) Rotates the annotation by the specified number of degrees (box.

see Understanding Object Palette Tree View on page ER-3-162. The default style of the object palette is defined by the network_palette. To open an object palette.cadfamily. For more information. Modeler/Release 14. paths.0 www. The default palette is marked with a “D” on its icon and includes the “Default” label in its second column.if tort to your rights.3—Project Editor Open Object Palette This operation opens the object palette.style preference. such as subnets.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. End of Procedure 3-67 Note—When opening an object palette for the first time during a session. For more information.com The document is for study only. see Understanding Object Palette Icon View on page ER-3-167. Procedure 3-67 Opening an Object Palette 1 Choose Topology > Open Object Palette. — In the Icon View. Note the following object palette characteristics: • Palette styles—There are two object palette styles: — Tree View—Displays network objects in a hierarchical structure. you can change the scenario’s default palette using a right-click menu option. ➥ The Object Palette appears. — In the Tree View. you may experience a short delay while your model directories are scanned for available models. and demands.please inform us. Use object palettes to define network objects. click the Open Object Palette button. links.we will delete ER-3-161 . locate the object model in the palette and drag the model icon to the Project Editor workspace. To add a network object to your project. Or. the scenario’s default palette is always the currently displayed palette. — Icon View—Displays network objects grouped by defined sets. do the following procedure. nodes. • Default scenario palette—Every project scenario has a default object palette that displays when the object palette is opened.

3—Project Editor • Network’s Private Palette—Each project scenario can have a single scenario-specific palette. At the top of the tree. The content of a shared object palette is the same for all projects. — In the Icon View. referred to as the “Network’s Private Palette”.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.please inform us. End of Procedure 3-68 Understanding Object Palette Tree View The Object Palette Tree View. displays all available models in a hierarchical structure. the palette can be configured in any project or scenario. At the bottom of the tree. The contents of the private palette can be different for each scenario in a project. Switching between Object Palette Tree View and Icon View You can switch between Object Palette Tree View and Icon View.com The document is for study only. • Shared Object Palettes—Palettes that are available to all project scenarios are called “shared object palettes”.if tort to your rights. you can create custom palettes. ➥ The Object Palette switches to Icon View. If switching from Object Palette Icon View to Tree View • Click the Go To Palette Tree View button.0 . called palettes. To serve your workflow.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Procedure 3-68 Switching between Object Palette Tree View and Icon View If switching from Object Palette Tree View to Icon View. • Right-click on a palette and select Open in Icon View. the private palette is named <project_name>-<scenario_name>. shown in Figure 3-46. Note—Wireless node models are available from the Object Palette if you have a Wireless license. You can drag model entries into the network workspace to create network objects which have the attributes and behaviors of those models. ER-3-162 www. do one of the following: • Click the Open Palette in Icon View button. models are organized in arbitrary collections. You cannot view or configure the private palette of a different project or scenario.cadfamily. ➥ The Object Palette switches to Tree View. — In the Tree View. as described in Procedure 3-69 Configuring Palettes in Object Palette Tree View on page ER-3-164. models are organized in categories by type. if the palette is not read-only. The standard model library comes with predefined palettes. Additionally. the private palette is named “Network’s Private Palette”.

the corresponding icon appears at the top of the right-hand icon panel. the “Create right-angled link” checkbox is available for selection. The subnet icon for fixed-position subnets is always available in the Object Palette Tree View. Subnet icons always appear below the selected model icon and can be dragged to the network workspace to create a new empty subnet object in the network. If you have the Wireless module license. For more information.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. then mobile and satellite subnet icons are also available.cadfamily. The names of the project and the scenario are displayed in the Object Palette Tree View title bar. Subnets do not have model attributes.if tort to your rights. This is helpful when multiple projects and their object palettes are open at the same time.please inform us. Select the “Create right-angled link” checkbox to draw right-angled links.3—Project Editor Figure 3-46 Object Palette Tree View Open palette in icon view Project and scenario Subnet icons Selected model icon Create right-angled link checkbox Designates a palette Designates the default palette When a model is selected in the tree. Modeler/Release 14. You can also drag this icon into the network workspace to create an object with the selected model. When a link is selected in the tree. see Drawing Right-Angled Links on page ER-3-176.0 www. Subnet objects are containers for other network objects.we will delete ER-3-163 .com The document is for study only.

1. • To add a single model from a palette—Right-click on the model and choose the option Add to Default Palette or Add to Network’s Private Palette. • To add all models from a different palette—Right-click on the other palette and choose the option Add All To Default Palette or Add All to Network’s Private Palette. as described in Procedure 3-69. The default palette is marked with a “D” on its icon and includes the “Default” label in its second column. • To remove a single model from a palette—Right-click on the model and choose the option Remove From Palette. see Table 3-33 and Table 3-34. the default palette acts as the target for the “Add” commands.1 Right-click on the palette and choose the option Make Default Palette. The Network’s Private Palette is an alternative target. Procedure 3-69 Configuring Palettes in Object Palette Tree View 1 Make the palette the default palette. ➥ The palette becomes the default palette. However. End of Procedure 3-69 ER-3-164 www. • To remove all models from a palette—Right-click on the palette and choose the option Clear This Palette.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. For a description of both the palette and model pop-up menus.cadfamily.please inform us. 2 Specify the models that you want included in the palette using the pop-up menus for palettes and models.if tort to your rights.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. it becomes the default palette.com The document is for study only. In this operation.0 .3—Project Editor Configuring Palettes Use the Object Palette Tree View pop-up menu options to configure palettes. after you start configuring the Network’s Private Palette.

Saves the palette with a new name to create a new palette. Adds all of the models listed in the palette to the designated default palette. and then makes the Network’s Private Palette the default palette. Designates the palette as the default palette and switches to the icon view of the object palette.please inform us. Removes all models from the palette. For more information. View Model Details Add To Network’s Private Palette Add To Default Palette: <default_palette_name> Remove From Palette: <palette_name> Deletes the model from the palette. this menu item only appears for models in palette subtrees. Add All To Network’s Private Palette Adds all of the models listed in the palette to the Network’s Private Palette. End of Table 3-34 Modeler/Release 14.cadfamily. This menu item does not appear for models in model type subtrees. switches to the icon view of the object palette. The default palette is displayed when the object palette is opened.3—Project Editor Table 3-33 Option Object Palette Icon: Pop-Up Menu Options Description Designates the palette as the default palette. For more information. Adds the model to the default palette. Additionally. This menu item is disabled if the palette is read-only. and opens the Configure Palette dialog box. This option is disabled for read-only palettes. See Understanding Object Palette Icon View on page ER-3-167. see Configuring Palettes on page ER-3-168. Add All To Default Palette Save Palette As… Clear This Palette Remove This Palette End of Table 3-33 Table 3-34 Option Model Icon: Pop-Up Menu Options Description Opens the Model Description dialog box for the model.com The document is for study only.if tort to your rights. The new palette becomes the default palette. This option is disabled for the default palette itself. Deletes the palette.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Make Default Palette Open In Icon View Configure In Icon View Designates the palette as the default palette.we will delete ER-3-165 .0 www. This option is disabled for read-only palettes. Adds the model to the network private palette and then makes the network private palette the default palette.

3 Click the Find Next button to find the next model.com The document is for study only. Repeat this step as necessary. For more information. ER-3-166 www. The search continues to cycle through the tree. Procedure 3-70 Searching by Model Name in Object Palette Tree View 1 In the Object Palette Tree. you can create a custom model by clicking the Create Custom Model button.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. If an item is selected in the tree. the search starts from the top and searches down the tree. 2 Click the Find Next button. The search proceeds into subtrees that are not currently open. If no item is selected in the tree. End of Procedure 3-70 Viewing Model Details From the Object Palette Tree View.0 . End of Procedure 3-71 Creating a Custom Model From the Object Palette Tree View.please inform us. ➥ The Model Description dialog box appears. Procedure 3-71 Viewing Model Details in Object Palette Tree View 1 Select the model in the tree 2 Click the More Details button. see Create Custom Device Model on page ER-3-109. the search starts from the selected item and searches down the tree. Tree items with names that exactly match or include the search text are considered matches.3—Project Editor Searching by Model Name You can search for models by name in the Object Palette Tree. When the search reaches the bottom of the tree. you can view the details of a node or a link with just one click. except for subtrees that represent palettes. it continues searching from the top of the tree. ➥ The next tree item meeting the search criteria is selected. enter the search text in the “Search by name” field.if tort to your rights.cadfamily. Unopened palettes are intentionally excluded from the search because they cannot contain models that are not listed elsewhere (especially within the “By Name” subtrees).com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. The search is not case-sensitive.

if tort to your rights. Figure 3-47 Object Palette Icon View Go To Palette Tree View button Mode List pull-down menu Up One Level button Configure Palette button The Object Palette Icon View includes the following options for navigating and configuring the object palette: • Go To Palette Tree View button—Switches the object palette to the tree view style.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. By configuring the palette. only the first keyword is shown. and links) as icons. For more information. • Configure Palette button . For more information. displays network objects (including subnetworks.com The document is for study only. shown in Figure Figure 3-47. see Configuring Palettes on page ER-3-168. see Using a Custom Model List on page ER-3-171. see Grouping Models in the Object Palette on page ER-3-172. When multiple keywords are used.cadfamily. models. For more information. • Mode List pull-down menu—Displays the selected palette.we will delete ER-3-167 .3—Project Editor Understanding Object Palette Icon View The Object Palette Icon View.Configures the palette. Modeler/Release 14.0 www. • Up One Level button—Returns to the group model. followed by an ellipsis (…) to indicate that there are more keywords. The header bar of an object palette identifies the keywords or custom model list used by that palette. For more information. you can limit the model icons displayed to those that match specified keywords (see Using Keywords on page ER-3-169) or those included in a custom model list (see Creating Custom Model Lists on page ER-3-170). see Understanding Object Palette Tree View on page ER-3-162.please inform us.

3—Project Editor Configuring Palettes An object palette can display all available models. but you cannot use the palette to create objects in the Project Editor workspace. the last configuration used within that model is saved with it and is used the next time you open that network model.com The document is for study only.if tort to your rights. For example. There are two methods for specifying the models displayed in an object palette: • Specify one or more keywords associated with the models.cadfamily. Both methods use the Configure Palette dialog box. you can specify keywords and create or specify custom model lists. you can open multiple object palettes at the same time. By configuring the palette you can cause it to display only the node and link models that support the Ethernet protocol. • Specify a custom list of the desired models.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. If you have many models available. the Configure Palette dialog box opens below the object palette and the text in the object palette’s header bar changes to indicate that the palette is in Edit mode.0 . When you click this button. and many other protocols. you can configure an object palette to display a subset of the available models.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. To make models easier to find. Figure 3-48 Object Palette with Configure Palette Dialog Box When you configure an object palette. FDDI. this results in a large palette that opens slowly and makes it difficult to find a specific model. To display sets of different models. ER-3-168 www. which you open by clicking the Configure Palette… button. the Ethernet models would be mixed in with models supporting ATM.please inform us. In Edit mode. Normally. you may be creating an Ethernet-based network model. each with a different set of keywords or different custom model lists. the configuration is automatically applied to other object palettes that you open in the same session. When you save a network model.

then click the Modify… button. the keywords are used when you first open an object palette and thereafter until you change them. Modeler/Release 14.3—Project Editor Using Keywords All Modeler-supplied node and link models have associated keywords. in which case the object palette displays only models having all of the specified keywords. ➥ The Object Palette appears. Note—The subnetwork object has no associated keyword and always appears in the object palette. Run-time specification uses the network_palette. After you specify keywords. you can specify keywords from dialog boxes that include pop-up menus for model selection or via a preference when running Modeler. ➥ The Configure Palette dialog box opens.if tort to your rights. then only FDDI link models are displayed. For example.com The document is for study only. 4 Select the Keywords radio button.we will delete ER-3-169 . These models are hidden because they are general in scope and often serve as parent models of Modeler-supplied derived models (as described in Derived Models on page MC-4-55). Procedure 3-72 Specifying Keywords in Object Palette Icon View 1 Choose Topology > Open Object Palette.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. You can specify keywords in Object Palette Icon View to limit the display of models. Some models are assigned the reserved keyword “hidden” and are not displayed unless you explicitly specify this keyword. You can specify multiple keywords.cadfamily. In addition to using the object palette. 3 Click the Configure Palette… button. 2 Switch to the Object Palette Icon View. if you specify the keywords “FDDI” and “link”.style preference. If specified at run time. the object palette continues using them until you specify different keywords or a custom model list.0 www.please inform us. ➥ The Modify Keywords dialog box appears.

A custom model list can create an object palette that displays only the models you need for a given network model. do the following procedure.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.cadfamily. ➥ The Modify Keywords dialog box closes and the object palette displays icons for only those models with the specified keywords. as described in Procedure 3-72 on page ER-3-169. 6 Edit the object palette by adding or deleting models. 3 Click the Configure Palette… button.com The document is for study only.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. 4 Optionally. 2 Switch to Object Palette Icon View. as follows: ER-3-170 www. ➥ The Configure Palette dialog box opens. The custom model list can contain any combination or number of models. • Change the status of undesired keywords to “not set”. You can create your own custom model list. 5 Click the Model List radio button. To create a custom model list. End of Procedure 3-72 Creating Custom Model Lists A custom model list is a defined list of the models to display in the Object Palette Icon View. specify one or more keywords. 6 After setting the status for all keywords. click OK. Procedure 3-73 Creating a Custom Model List from Object Palette Icon View 1 Choose Topology > Open Object Palette. regardless of keywords.if tort to your rights. ➥ The buttons supporting custom model lists become active and the Modify… button becomes inactive. or use a pre-defined list.3—Project Editor 5 Click in the Status column to toggle the status of each keyword as needed: • Change the status of desired keywords to “set”.0 .please inform us.

and click Save. as desired. 6. Run-time specification uses the network_palette preference.0 www. then click OK.com The document is for study only. 8 Click OK to close the Configure Palette dialog box. If specified at run time. Modeler/Release 14. End of Procedure 3-73 Using a Custom Model List After creating one or more custom model lists. ➥ All models are removed from the object palette. 6. To delete models individually: 6. ➥ The selected models are removed from the object palette.we will delete ER-3-171 . enter a name for the custom model list when prompted.2 Click and drag the desired model’s icon into the object palette being edited. you can specify which one to use in the Object Palette Icon View.please inform us.3—Project Editor To add models (by name): 6. 7 Click the Save As… button.1 Click the models to be deleted. 6.cadfamily.1 Open an object palette that includes the model you want to add. You can specify a custom model list from dialog boxes that include pop-up menus for model selection or via a preference when running Modeler. ➥ A Select Included Entries dialog box appears.1 Click the Link Models or Node Models button.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. ➥ Each model with the status “included” is added to the object palette.2 Click the Cut button. ➥ The custom model list is saved to disk. ➥ Selection markers appear on the models.if tort to your rights. To delete all models: Click the Clear button.2 Click in the Status column to set each model’s status to “included” or “not included”. the custom model list is used when you first open an object palette and thereafter until you change it. To add models (by dragging): 6.

Icons of the selected list appear in the palette and the list name appears in the dialog box header. right-click on a group icon and choose a model from the pull-down menu To view the models in a group. Not all models in the model library are grouped.please inform us.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.0 .cadfamily.if tort to your rights. This can to make the palette less cluttered and easier to navigate. Figure 3-49 Model List Pull-Down Menu Grouping Models in the Object Palette You can configure the Object Palette Icon View to display icons for groups of related models.3—Project Editor To specify a custom model list. double-click on the group icon Model Group view Individual Model view To return to the group view. Figure 3-50 Grouping Models in the Object Palette To select a model.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. In general. select the desired list from the model list pull-down menu. especially if the palette includes many models. click the UP arrow ER-3-172 www.com The document is for study only. vendor-specific node models (such as Cisco or Bay Networks) are organized into groups while most other models are not.

a pop-up menu opens and lists the models in that group. check the Enable Model Aggregation checkbox in the Configure Palette dialog box. right-click on the model.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. (You must right-click on an individual model icon—not a model group icon. To return to the previous level.cadfamily.3—Project Editor You can do the following in the object palette: • To view models by group. These models are represented by icons in the object palette. Procedure 3-74 Viewing or Editing a Model’s System ID using Object Palette Icon View 1 In the Object Palette Icon View. right-click on a group icon and choose the model from the pop-up menu. The System Object ID is listed in the Characteristics table of this dialog box. • To select a model from a group.0 www. the object palette displays all included models (one icon for each model) in one window. A model’s group is determined by the “System Object ID” attribute in the model’s self-description. click on the UP arrow in the upper-left corner of the palette. nodes (and links) must have an associated model to describe how they behave in the network. When you drag a node model’s icon into the workspace (or select a link model’s icon to connect nodes).com The document is for study only. • To view all models in a group. The palette aggregates all models that have an associated group. Modeler/Release 14. In addition. The object palette “drills down” one level and displays all models in the group. You can also click on a group icon and place it in the network. the object’s attributes are updated to reflect the model specification. as described in Network Reference on page MR-3-1. 2 Click the View Self-Description button to open the self description for that model.if tort to your rights. If Enable Model Aggregation is unchecked. The node (or link) is depicted in the workspace as an object and its “model” attribute is automatically set to the one chosen from the palette.please inform us. double-click on the group icon. <Cisco 1601>) indicate a model group.) ➥ The Model Description dialog box appears. 3 Right-click on the core icon to open the “core Self-Description” dialog box. you create an instance (copy) of that model. End of Procedure 3-74 Creating Nodes Unlike subnetworks. The object palette groups all included models with the same system object ID into one group. Angled brackets in an icon label (for example.we will delete ER-3-173 .

see Display of Node Labels on page ER-3-174. The display of node labels is defined by the following options: • label color object attribute—specifies the color of the label text. ER-3-174 www.please inform us.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. For information about node labels.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.show_node_label_outline network_visualization.if tort to your rights. the destination node is represented by a small gay icon.cadfamily. You can set the attribute for each node to contrast with the background. The default color is black.3—Project Editor You can add node objects to the network model by dragging them from the object palette. This feature is especially useful when placing nodes on a detailed background.0 . • When the small gray icon displays within the bounds of the subnet (not anchored to the subnet border). then the link’s destination node is located within the bounds of the current subnet. Valid values are TRUE and FALSE. The following figure shows the visibility and contrast of node labels with and without shadows. Figure 3-51 Node Labels (With and Without Shadows) network_visualization.show_node_label_outlin preference set to TRUE preference set to FALSE Display of Link Destination Nodes in Subnets When a link is connected to a node outside of the current subnet. • network_visualization. The placement of the small gray icon identifies the location of the link destination node: • When the small gray icon is anchored to the subnet border. The default is TRUE. but not defined in the subnet. For more information.com The document is for study only. then the link’s destination node is located in another subnet. Display of Node Labels The label display for nodes (and subnets) can be set for optimum visibility and contrast.show_node_label_outline preference—specifies whether to display a shadow behind the label text for nodes (and subnets). see Open Object Palette on page ER-3-161. such as a MIF map or a CADRG image.

node name. including model. • Perform Node Operations on the Destination Node—Right-click on the small gray icon to perform a node operation. See Object Pop-Up Menu. You create links by selecting a link model from the object palette and then drawing the link in the workspace.please inform us. Additionally. Creating Links Links define communication channels between nodes. you can create multiple-segment links and move them using the mouse (the end segments change length to reflect the new location).com The document is for study only.we will delete ER-3-175 . depending on the option selected from the object palette. The small gray icons are either anchored to the subnet border (meaning the destination node is located in another subnet) or displayed within the bounds of the subnet (meaning the destination node is located within the bounds of the current subnet. but not defined in the subnet).3—Project Editor The following figure shows the display of link destination nodes as small gray icons.cadfamily. the small gray icons remain anchored in place Small gray icons You can perform the following actions on destination nodes. see: • Drawing Right-Angled Links on page ER-3-176 • Redrawing Links on page ER-3-176 Modeler/Release 14. Right-angled links allow you to create topologies that are easier to understand and more aesthetically pleasing.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. For more information about creating links.0 www. Figure 3-52 Link Display Between Subnets When the node is moved. Links can be drawn free-style or right-angled. and subnet name.if tort to your rights. • Go to the Subnet of the Link’s Destination Node—Double-click on the small gray icon to go to the subnet of the link’s destination node. represented by the small gray icons: • Display Tooltip Information for Destination Node—Hold the mouse pointer over the small gray icon to display a tooltip.

To create additional link segments. • From the Advanced Attribute dialog box (right-click on the link and choose Edit Attributes (Advanced)). The right-angled characteristic is retained when network objects are moved. The advanced attributes of a link (right-click on a link and select Edit Attribute (Advanced)) includes the new attribute “right-angled”.com The document is for study only.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. With this attribute. select the Redefine Path button.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Creating additional link segments is useful when drawing a link around an existing network object to avoid overlap and clutter.cadfamily.please inform us.) You can then draw the link from one object to another object.3—Project Editor • Bundling Links and Demands on page ER-3-177 • Link Label Placement and Rotation on page ER-3-179 Drawing Right-Angled Links Drawing right-angled links allows you to create topologies that are easier to understand and more aesthetically pleasing. click the workspace. ➥ The selected link is deleted and the link model is automatically loaded and ready for you to redraw. The default setting of the “Create right-angled link” checkbox is specified by the draw_right_angled_links preference. see Understanding Object Palette Tree View on page ER-3-162. Procedure 3-75 Redrawing a Link 1 Do one of the following: • Right-click on the link that you want to redraw and choose Redefine Path. Redrawing Links You can redraw a link to make the network topology easier to understand and more aesthetically pleasing. you can enable or disable the right-angled characteristic of a link. ER-3-176 www. (For more information. select the “Create right-angled link” checkbox before selecting a simplex or duplex link model from the object palette tree view. Drawing right-angled links does not affect analysis results.if tort to your rights. Note the following characteristics when drawing right-angled links: • Drawing a right-angled link between two objects that are horizontally or vertically aligned creates a single link segment from one object to another object.0 . Drawing links around network objects does not affect analysis results. • Drawing a right-angled link between two link objects that are not horizontally or vertically aligned creates two perpendicular link segments from one object to another object. Changing the attribute automatically changes display of the link. To draw right-angled links.

The link bundling feature is activated using the network_visualization.please inform us. Additionally. The link is redrawn using the current setting of the “right-angled” attribute.. if activated. see Drawing Right-Angled Links on page ER-3-176. End of Procedure 3-75 Bundling Links and Demands Similar links (or demands) between two nodes can be bundled.auto_link_bundling preference.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. For more information about drawing links. Modeler/Release 14. When a link bundle is expanded. you can view the individual links of a bundle in a way that is easy-to-read with minimal clutter. Creating additional link segments is useful when drawing a link around an existing network object to avoid overlap and clutter. click the workspace to create an additional link segment. this preference specifies the default display of bundled links: collapsed or expanded (fanned-out).3—Project Editor 2 Redraw the link. link thickness. Figure 3-53 shows the link bundling feature’s affect on link display. head and tail color.if tort to your rights. You can expand a link bundle to display the individual links.com The document is for study only.e.cadfamily. Bundling is based on link display attributes (i. When drawing the link. For more information about the right-angled attribute.we will delete ER-3-177 . and line style).0 www. see Creating Links on page ER-3-175. which displays the links as a single object.

Additionally. display the link in a collapsed bundle. Additionally. by default. Example B: Collapsed Link Bundle B1 Example B shows a collapsed link bundle. display the link in an expanded bundle.if tort to your rights. as shown in Example B3.auto_link_bundling preference. • exclude from bundle—Specifies to exclude the link from any bundle. Click on the bundle to select all links.3—Project Editor Figure 3-53 Typical Link Display: Non-Bundled and Bundled Example A: Non-Bundled Links Example A shows seven non-bundled links between two nodes. there are seven links. each link includes the attribute “bundle display”.com The document is for study only.0 .com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. B2 B3 Example C: Expanded Link Bundle Example C shows an expanded link bundle with seven links. by default. In Example B2.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. When the link bundling preference is activated. the total number of links in the bundle displays. In Example B1.please inform us. right-click on the bundle and select a bundled link. To perform an action on a link in a collapsed bundle. which sets the link bundling option individually. In addition to the network_visualization. The bundle display attribute settings are • include in bundle and display fanned out—Specifies to include the link in a bundle. set the “bundle display” attribute to override the preference. seven of the seven links are selected. • include in bundle and display collapsed—Specified to include the link in a bundle.cadfamily. When unselected. which sets the link bundling feature globally. ER-3-178 www. the number of links selected and the total number of links in the bundle display. When selected.

If two or more links in a bundle are drawn with multiple segments.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Link Label Placement and Rotation The display of link labels is designed to produce a network topology that is easy to read and aesthetically pleasing. Note—The option to display link labels is defined by the network_visualization. then the collapsed bundle path follows one of the multi-segment links.we will delete ER-3-179 . Table 3-35 lists the operations associated with link bundling. then the collapsed bundle path follows the multi-segment link. Modeler/Release 14. Instead. Note—A collapsed link bundle is not a network object on which you can perform operations.com The document is for study only. For a complete list of object operations. the link bundle is deleted and the link model is automatically loaded so that you can redraw the link bundle. If the two longest link segments are of the same length. the collapsed link bundle represents the bundled links. link labels are placed horizontally next to the longest segment of a link. Allows you to redefine a bundle path by drawing it in the workspace. Redefine Bundle Path Bundled Links Additional Options— -Single-click on a link bundle to select all links in the bundle. Allows you to perform an action on a link in the link bundle. then the link label is placed next to the horizontal link. The design includes the following: • Link Label Placement—By default. Expanded Link Bundle (Right-click on a link in a link bundle) Collapse to Bundle End of Table 3-35 Collapses similar links into a bundle. see Object Pop-Up Menu on page ER-3-26.if tort to your rights. Note—If a link in a bundle is drawn with multiple segments.cadfamily.show_link_labels preference. Table 3-35 Option Link Bundling Operations: Collapsed and Expanded Description Collapsed Link Bundle (Right-click on link bundle object) Expand Expands the collapsed bundle to display the individual links in the bundle.0 www.please inform us.3—Project Editor The link bundle display is specified using pop-up menu operations. -Double-click on a link bundle to expand the bundle. When this operation is selected.

click the “Apply changes to selected objects” checkbox. 3 Select a value for the “label rotation” attribute: horizontal. parallel to link. link models. you can rotate the label using the link attribute “label rotation”. link labels are displayed horizontally. Procedure 3-76 Setting Link Label Rotation for One or More Links 1 Select the link(s) for which you want to define label rotation. End of Procedure 3-76 Rapid Configuration This operation allows you to build regularly structured network topologies quickly and easily. The following procedure describes setting link label rotation for one or more links. 2 Right-click on a selected link and choose Edit Attributes (Advanced). parallel to link. or perpendicular to link. They are: • ring • star • bus • tree • full mesh • randomized mesh • unconnected network ER-3-180 www. ➥ The Edit Attributes dialog box appears. For more information about attributes. and arrangement all at once.please inform us.cadfamily. You can select the type of network configuration to be built—such as a ring or bus—and specify its node models. The “label rotation” attribute can be set to horizontal.0 . without having to create and specify each network component individually. 6 The Edit Attributes dialog box closes and the label rotation is applied to the selected links.com The document is for study only. There are seven types of topological configurations available through this operation.if tort to your rights.3—Project Editor • Link Label Rotation—By default. vertical.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. vertical.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. or perpendicular to link 4 If defining label rotation for multiple links. However. 5 Choose OK. see Edit Attributes on page ER-3-252 and Network Reference on page MR-3-1.

The dialog box input fields vary.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only. and the node and link models.please inform us. After the specifications are entered. the number of nodes. ➥ The Rapid Configuration: Seed Selection dialog box appears for entering a random number seed. the configuration is constructed in the workspace.3—Project Editor The Rapid Configuration operation presents dialog boxes allowing you to select the type of configuration to be created. Procedure 3-77 Building a Rapid Configuration 1 Choose Topology > Rapid Configuration… ➥ The Rapid Configuration dialog box appears.if tort to your rights.cadfamily. Click OK and then click Next… ➥ The Rapid Configuration: <topology> dialog box appears. Figure 3-55 Rapid Configuration: <topology> Dialog Box Modeler/Release 14. 4 Type a number in the Seed text entry area or click the Generate button randomly produce a number. Figure 3-54 Rapid Configuration Dialog Box 2 Choose a topology from the Configuration pull-down menu.0 www. 3 If you are creating a network that uses random nodes and connections and you want to specify a random number other than the default (as described in Random Number Seeds on page ER-3-184). click Next… and go to step 5.we will delete ER-3-181 . depending on the selected topology. Otherwise. You can also control how the nodes will be arranged and their location within the workspace. click the Seed… button.

com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.if tort to your rights. This process is identical to setting keywords or custom model lists in the object palette.com The document is for study only.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. as described in Open Object Palette on page ER-3-161.0 . click the Select Models… button and select keywords or a custom model list for the models you want to see. ER-3-182 www.3—Project Editor 5 If you want to reduce the number of models that will appear in the model pull-down menus.please inform us.cadfamily.

3—Project Editor 6 Enter input parameters for the rapid configuration. The following table lists the parameters needed for each topology. y coordinates and sizes (turn on the Modeler/Release 14.please inform us.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. See the subnetwork’s grid to determine appropriate x. the number of nodes.if tort to your rights. These may include the node and link models to be used. Table 3-36 Parameters for Rapid Configuration Topologies Topology Bus Model Parameters Node model Number of nodes Link model Tap model Full mesh Node model Number of nodes Link model Randomized mesh Node model Number of nodes Link model Type of link Ring Node model Number of nodes Link model Type of link Star Center node model Periphery node model Number of periphery nodes Link model Tree Intermediate node model Leaf node model Link model Number of levels in tree X and Y coordinates for center of tree Number of splits per level (minimum and maximum) Width and height of tree Unconnected network Node model Number of nodes Node type End of Table 3-36 X and Y coordinates for top-left corner of network Width and height of unconnected network X and Y coordinates for center of star Radius of star Number of connections per node (minimum and maximum) X and Y coordinates for center node Radius of randomized mesh X and Y coordinates for center of ring Radius of ring Placement Parameters Horizontal or vertical layout of bus Node position around bus X and Y coordinates for head of bus Size of bus and taps X and Y coordinates for center node Radius of full mesh Note—Placement parameters are in units of the subnetwork. the types of links. The types of parameters required vary depending on the topology to be generated.com The document is for study only. and the placement of the configuration in the workspace.0 www.we will delete ER-3-183 .cadfamily.

It can be modified and saved like any other network model. specify the same random number seed each time you need the resulting network configuration. ➥ he configuration is drawn in the workspace. or a randomly-generated number.please inform us.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. choose Topology > Recover All Objects. Note—To recover all failed objects in the network at once.com The document is for study only. to ensure that an unconnected network always contains the same number and placement of nodes. Different seeds produce different sequences of random numbers.cadfamily. To create such topologies.0 . If you always enter the same random number seed. Recover Selected Objects This operation allows you to change the failed status of selected objects in a network. 7 Click OK when you are done entering parameters. End of Procedure 3-78 ER-3-184 www.3—Project Editor grid if it is not visible). End of Procedure 3-77 Random Number Seeds Some rapid configuration topologies. For example. allow you to create a network composed of a random number of nodes or links. Procedure 3-78 Recovering a Failed Link or Node 1 Select the failed links or nodes you want to recover. a number you enter. without the red “X”. a sequence of random numbers is generated based on a random number seed. 2 Choose Topology > Recover Selected Objects. Shift-click to select multiple objects. the number of random nodes and links for a given configuration will be the same each time you create it.if tort to your rights. such as the tree and randomized mesh. ➥ Each selected object changes back to its original icon. The seed can be a default value. thus resulting in different network configurations.

Shared risk groups are useful for modeling dependency relationships such as the following: • Several links that depend on a fiber: if the fiber fails.0 www. Modeler/Release 14.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.please inform us. the links also fail • A power source for a building: if the power source fails. ➥ The object changes back to its original icon.com The document is for study only. and other risk groups. where failures in one set cause failures in the other set. links.cadfamily. choose Recover This <Object> (where <Object> is “Link” or “Node”). Risk element sets and impacted element sets can contain nodes.we will delete ER-3-185 . all nodes in that building fail Every shared risk group has three components: • risk element set—contains one or more network objects that other objects (those in the impacted element set) depend on to function.3—Project Editor A similar operation for individual nodes or links is available from the Object pop-up menu. Procedure 3-79 Recovering a Single Link or Node 1 Right-click on the failed object you want to recover. without the red “X”. • impacted element set—contains one or more network objects that depend on objects (those in the risk element set) to function. ➥ The Object pop-up menu appears.if tort to your rights. • failure propagation criterion—defines the conditions under which failures in the risk element set cause failures in the impacted element set. End of Procedure 3-79 Shared Risk Groups A shared risk group defines a failure relationship between two sets of network objects. 2 From the Object pop-up menu.

as shown in the following figure. After creating risk groups.3—Project Editor You can use risk groups to model risk factors that can cause failures in a production network but do not exist as actual objects in the network model. ER-3-186 www. To model a fiber cut. The impacted element set includes all nodes that depend on that power source. • Power failures—To model a power failure. you can view and edit them in the Network Browser. fail the group “power source 1” so that the impacted nodes also fail.0 . you can create a risk group in which the risk element set is empty and the impacted element set contains objects that depend on the “missing” object. To model the failure. fail the group directly (as described in Procedure 3-81 on page ER-3-188).please inform us.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. create a shared risk group and give it a name like “fiber_1”. create a shared risk group and give it a name like “power source 1”.cadfamily. To do this. The impacted element set includes all links that depend on that fiber. Scenarios where this technique might be useful include: • Fiber cuts—To model a fiber cut.com The document is for study only. fail the group “fiber_1” so that the impacted links also fail.if tort to your rights. Procedure 3-80 Creating a Risk Group Manually 1 Verify that all the network objects you want to specify as risk elements and impacted elements are present in the scenario. Figure 3-56 Shared Risk Groups in the Network Browser Creating Shared Risk Groups Manually The following procedure describes how to create a risk group in the Project Editor.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. To model a power failure.

please inform us.) Modeler/Release 14.2 In the Network Browser treeview.0 www.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only. and risk groups that you want to include in the impacted element set.) 4. 4 Add the risk elements (if any): 4.1 Select the nodes. and risk groups that you want to include in the risk element set. you must select it in the Network Browser because risk groups are not visible in the Project Editor workspace. with the View filter menu set to Shared Risk Groups. choose Edit Attributes. you must select it in the Network Browser because risk groups are not visible in the Project Editor workspace. right-click on the risk group and choose Add Selected Objects as Risk Elements. 5 Add the impacted elements to the group: 5.if tort to your rights.1 Select the nodes.3—Project Editor 2 In the Project Editor window. and set the “name” attribute. right-click on the group. links. ➥ The selected objects are added under Risk Elements. choose Topology > Shared Risk Groups > New. links.cadfamily. (If you want to select a risk group. 3 To rename a risk group. (If you want to select a risk group.we will delete ER-3-187 . ➥ The Network Browser opens. A new risk group appears in the treeview.

choose View > Show Network Browser.2 In the Network Browser treeview.com The document is for study only.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. End of Procedure 3-80 Failing and Recovering a Shared Risk Group The following procedure describes how to fail a risk group. Procedure 3-82 describes how to recover a risk group. specify one of the following settings: • Any Risk Element Failed—All impacted objects are disabled if any member of the risk element set is disabled. 6 Specify the failure propagation criterion for the risk group: 6. 6. 2 Set the View filter to Shared Risk Groups.” which specifies its failure status.0 . Procedure 3-81 Failing a Risk Group 1 If the Network Browser is not open. ➥ The Network Browser treeview shows all shared risk groups in the scenario.if tort to your rights. 3 Each risk group has an advanced attribute called “condition. You can fail a shared risk group using either of the following methods: • Right-click on the risk group and choose Fail this Shared Risk Group ER-3-188 www.cadfamily. ➥ The selected objects are added under Impacted Elements. right-click on the risk group and choose Add Selected Objects as Impacted Elements.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.1 Right-click on the risk group and choose Edit Attributes.please inform us. 6.2 For the “failure propagation criterion” attribute. • All Risk Elements Failed—All impacted objects are disabled only if all members of the risk element set are disabled.3 Close the Edit Attributes dialog box.3—Project Editor 5. ➥ The Attributes dialog box for the shared risk group appears.

the visualization status does not refresh automatically. check the Advanced checkbox. choose Topology > Shared Risk Groups > Visualize Operational Status >Visualize. Note—If any risk-group elements are failed or recovered while status visualization is enabled. 2 Set the View filter to Shared Risk Groups. 3 Each shared risk group has an advanced attribute called “condition. Modeler/Release 14.” which specifies its failure status. choose Topology > Shared Risk Groups > Visualize Operational Status >Clear. choose Edit Attributes.we will delete ER-3-189 .com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. To clear the risk-group visualizations. End of Procedure 3-81 Procedure 3-82 Recovering a Failed Risk Group 1 If the Network Browser is not open. and set the “condition” attribute to “disabled”. and set the “condition” attribute to “enabled” End of Procedure 3-82 Visualizing the Operational Status of Shared Risk Group Elements To see which network objects are members of a failed risk group. choose Edit Attributes.3—Project Editor • Risk-click on the risk group. An icon displays over every network object that is currently failed due to its membership in a risk group. ➥ The Network Browser treeview shows all shared risk groups in the scenario. You can fail a shared risk group using either of the following methods: • Right-click on the risk group and choose Recover this Shared Risk Group • Right-click on the risk group.if tort to your rights. check the Advanced checkbox.0 www. choose View > Show Network Browser.please inform us.com The document is for study only. you must choose Topology > Shared Risk Groups > Visualize Operational Status >Visualize again to update the visualization.cadfamily.

router5 <-> top.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. • A tab-delineated list of network objects start_riskgroup_creation name: risk element: ER-3-190 www.Denver.Denver.server1 risk element: top.router5 failure propagation criterion: Any end_riskgroup_creation start_riskgroup_creation name: My Risk Group 2 risk element: top. To make the file more readable in a spreadsheet.0 .router4 impacted element: top.if tort to your rights. you can import the risk group definitions into a scenario (as described in Procedure 3-83 on page ER-3-191). • Define one or more shared risk groups in a text file with an extension of “srgi”. a line has the following format: • “Risk Element” string at the beginning of the line • A colon (‘:’) character.router4 failure propagation criterion: All end_riskgroup_creation Table 3-37 Field Data File Format for Shared Risk Groups Description Start of the definition for this risk group Name of the risk group To specify one or more risk elements. If desired.Kansas City.router4 <-> top.Denver.server4 impacted element: top.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.Portland. Figure 3-57 Data File with Definitions of Shared Risk Groups start_riskgroup_creation name: My Risk Group 1 risk element: top.Denver.Denver. After you create a data file. you can edit the resulting file in a text editor.please inform us. you can add tab characters before and after the colon.3—Project Editor Creating Data Files for Shared Risk Groups You can create a data file for shared risk groups using one of the following methods: • Export the shared risk groups defined in an existing scenario by choosing Topology > Shared Risk Groups > Export.Kansas City.com The document is for study only.Seattle.router5 <-> top.cadfamily.router5 risk element: top.

choose Topology > Shared Risk Groups > Import… ➥ The Select Import File dialog box appears.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. you can add tab characters before and after the colon. End of Procedure 3-83 Modeler/Release 14. • A tab-delineated list of network objects impacted element: failure propagation criterion: The failure criteria can be one of the following: • Any—All impacted objects are disabled if any member of the risk element set is disabled. 3 In the Project Editor window. • All—All impacted objects are disabled only if all members of the risk element set are disabled. Procedure 3-83 Importing a Data File for Shared Risk Groups 1 Create a data file using one of the following methods: • Export the shared risk groups defined in an existing scenario by choosing Topology > Shared Risk Groups > Export… If desired. • Define one or more shared risk groups in a text file using the format described in Creating Data Files for Shared Risk Groups on page ER-3-190.0 www. end_riskgroup_creation End of Table 3-37 End of the definition for this risk group Importing Data Files for Shared Risk Groups The following procedure describes how to import shared risk groups from a data file into a scenario.please inform us. a line has the following format: • “Impacted Element” string at the beginning of the line • A colon (‘:’) character. 2 Copy the file into one of your model directories.com The document is for study only. To make the file more readable in a spreadsheet.3—Project Editor Table 3-37 Field Data File Format for Shared Risk Groups (Continued) Description To specify one or more impacted elements.we will delete ER-3-191 .if tort to your rights. 4 Select the data file you want to import and click OK. you can edit the resulting file in a text editor.

This operation checks two primary model components to ensure link consistency: • Data rates of the transmitter. and link are set to compatible values. ➥ A dialog box appears with information about the incorrect link.if tort to your rights.3—Project Editor Verify Links This operation allows you to verify that a link is properly connected before executing a simulation.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Note that data rates can be set to the value “unspecified”.com The document is for study only. see Chapter 7 Network Domain on page MC-7-1. respectively.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.0 . receiver. Each inconsistent link is identified with an “X” mark. receiver. These choices specify that all unformatted packets are supported by the link. and link have at least one format in common. For more information about link consistency criteria and the mechanisms used to automatically create consistent links when possible.please inform us. ER-3-192 www. ➥ Link consistency is verified.cadfamily. • Supported packet format lists defined for the transmitter. Procedure 3-84 Verifying Links 1 With a model in the editor window. allowing them to be compatible with other data rates of any value. and that all formatted packets are supported. choose Topology > Verify Links… ➥ The Check Links dialog box appears. 3 Double-click the “X” mark. 2 Select the Verify links radio button and click OK. The supported packet format list for any of these objects can include the “unformatted” and/or the “all formatted” values.

End of Procedure 3-84 Modeler/Release 14. and link.we will delete ER-3-193 . Solution Compare the “data rate” attribute value of the link with that of each node. Check to see which packet formats have been defined for the link. Note—If you change the “model” attribute of a node. You can choose to leave the marks visible.if tort to your rights. A subnetwork is incorrectly connected to a duplex point-to-point link in a third-party network model. It is always a good idea to check the consistency of network links whenever any network topology changes are made.com The document is for study only. receiver. The transmitter and receiver are not in the same node. The link must support the types of packets that are supported for the nodes. Packet formats are inconsistent between the link and the transmitter or receiver and link. Link inconsistent due to a missing point-to-point transmitter. Link inconsistent due to a missing bus transmitter. Table 3-38 Common Link Inconsistency Problems & Solutions Problem Inconsistent data rates between the transmitter.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Either change the type of link used to one that supports the transmitter and receiver present.3—Project Editor 4 Based on the information in the dialog box. Link inconsistent due to a missing point-to-point receiver.please inform us. In this case. Contact the model developer. The following table lists common problems and solutions related to link consistency. Link inconsistent due to a missing bus receiver. The values should match. End of Table 3-38 5 Click the Clear button to remove the inconsistency mark over the current link or click the Clear All button to remove all inconsistency marks. or change the connected nodes to ones that contain a transmitter and receiver supported by the link. Check the Model Description dialog box to see what kind of transmitter and receiver are present in the objects connected to the link. the marks are removed automatically the next time that the Verify Links operation is invoked. Note that the “data rate” attribute may not be visible unless it was promoted from lower model levels.0 www. assuming the links are then consistent. it is possible that some of the links attached to that node may become inconsistent.cadfamily. you may have to re-assign a node’s “model” attribute or use a different type of link to correct the problem.

or from all nodes to a single node. from a single node to all other nodes.com The document is for study only.cadfamily. multicast. The traffic flows created have different characteristics based on the type of demand (unicast.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. IP Multicast.if tort to your rights. as shown in Figure 3-58. You can create traffic flows in a full mesh. The Traffic menu operations include: • Create IP Flows on page ER-3-194 • Export Traffic Flows Operations on page ER-3-196 • Import Traffic Flows Operations on page ER-3-196 • Export Node Aliases Operations on page ER-3-196 • Import Node Aliases Operations on page ER-3-197 Create IP Flows The menu operations within Create IP Flows let you create IP Unicast.3—Project Editor Traffic Menu Operations This section contains descriptions and procedures for using the operations available from the Traffic menu in the Project Editor. Figure 3-58 Connectivity Options Full mesh From all nodes to a specified node From a specified node to all other nodes ER-3-194 www.0 .please inform us. The demands created from a single Create IP Flows operation are configured identically. These operations are useful for quickly loading a network with a particular type of traffic. and voice over IP (VoIP) traffic flows. or VoIP). You can modify individual demands by editing the attributes of the demand.

com The document is for study only.cadfamily.3—Project Editor Unicast Flows Unicast flows represent traffic between two specific IP addresses. Traffic intensity is configured in packets/sec and bits/sec and packet size is computed as a ratio of these two values. make sure that the address is a valid multicast address. Figure 3-59 Configuration Options for Creating Unicast Traffic Flows IP Multicast Flows Multicast flows represent traffic between a node and multiple receivers with multicast IP addresses. Traffic intensity is configured in packets/sec and bits/sec and packet size is computed as a ratio of these two values. You can also configure socket information such as port and protocol.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Figure 3-60 Configuration Options for Creating Multicast Traffic Flows Modeler/Release 14.if tort to your rights.we will delete ER-3-195 . You can also configure socket information such as port and protocol.0 www. When setting the destination field.please inform us. The destination IP address for the demands can be set explicitly or automatically assigned.

When configuring VoIP flows.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. see Troubleshooting Traffic-Flow Imports on page MC-14-29.0 . see Troubleshooting Traffic-Flow Imports on page MC-14-29.if tort to your rights. Export Node Aliases Operations To Change Set… This operation allows you to save all aliases assigned to nodes in the current scenario in a file that can be imported into another project via the Import Change Sets operation. ER-3-196 www. The apply_all_aliases preference must be FALSE. or calls/hour—traffic intensity is converted internally and represented on the demands as packets/sec and bits/sec. see Working with Aliases on page MC-14-11.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. CCS. or a combination of these two. For more information about aliases. Import Traffic Flows Operations The operations on this submenu import traffic files from various sources into a scenario. Figure 3-61 Configuration Options for Creating VoIP Traffic Flows Export Traffic Flows Operations The operations on this submenu export traffic from a scenario into various file formats. For details on these operations.3—Project Editor VoIP Flows VoIP flows are configured between IP nodes.please inform us. traffic intensity is specified using erlangs. VoIP gateway nodes. For details on these operations.com The document is for study only.

see Working with Aliases on page MC-14-11.please inform us. see Working with Aliases on page MC-14-11.. For more information about aliases. in which each line contains up to five aliases: <subnet name> <node 1 name> <alias 1> . This allows you to edit your aliases using a spreadsheet program like Excel.if tort to your rights.we will delete ER-3-197 .. <alias 5> For more information about aliases..3—Project Editor To Text File… This operation exports all aliases in the scenario to a tab-separated text file. The text file has the following format.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.. <alias 10> <subnet name> <node 2 name> <alias 1> .com The document is for study only. The apply_all_aliases preference must be FALSE.cadfamily.0 www. Modeler/Release 14. see Working with Aliases on page MC-14-11. For more information about aliases... then re-import them into a scenario via the Import from Text File operation. From Text File… This operation imports node aliases from a text file in the format described in the previous section. Import Node Aliases Operations From Change Sets… This operation imports aliases from a file saved with the Export Change Set operation and assigns them to corresponding nodes in the current scenario. <alias 5> <subnet name> <node 1 name> <alias 6> .

3—Project Editor

Services
Because networks support numerous application services (i.e., voice, video, business critical data, etc.) in a common infrastructure, Modeler includes the ability to perform analyses that focus on service-oriented architectures. Note—Flow Analysis functionality is required to perform service analyses. This section includes the following topics: • Introducing Services on page ER-3-198 • Understanding Services on page ER-3-199 • Services Workflow on page ER-3-200 • Services Procedures on page ER-3-201 • Analyzing Services on page ER-3-210

Introducing Services
Use the Services operation to • Simulate and model each service network, end-to-end, to produce key metrics relevant to performing engineering, planning, and problem solving related to that service network • Provide critical decision analysis of the impact of changes in a service, and cross-service impact analysis of changes in one service on another service. The analysis includes: — Impact of common infrastructure and service-specific configuration changes — Analysis of network and service configuration errors (often caused by inconsistencies between the service and the network) — Impact of network failures on services and impact of service failures on other services and the network — Analyze service-specific failover and load balancing behaviors (typically ignorant of the underlying communications infrastructure) — Support deployment of new services and growth in existing services — Globally manage/optimize the network (e.g., engineering bandwidth, perform traffic engineering) to support both common infrastructure metrics with engineering tolerances and service-specific metrics within their service level threshold — Visualize and report on all of the common infrastructure and service-specific inputs, simulation results, and optimization from the above analyses and optimizations.

ER-3-198 www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Modeler/Release 14.0

3—Project Editor

For more information, see: • Understanding Services on page ER-3-199 • Services Workflow on page ER-3-200 • Services Procedures on page ER-3-201

Understanding Services
Services implies distributed services with service-specific elements (service-specific network devices, servers, etc.) at various locations across the shared communication network that collectively deliver functionality to a distinct set of end-users. Each element of a service provides functionality that contributes to the overall system supporting the service as a whole. In Modeler, services are defined with the following elements: • Service—an object representing a service, including the elements (nodes) that comprise the service. For more information, see Defining a Service on page ER-3-201. • Service User Group—a group of end-users that access a service. For more information, see Defining a Service User Group on page ER-3-205. • Evaluation Function—a formula that defines the criteria for evaluating the service and the supporting elements. If no evaluation function is specified, a default function is used. For more information, see Defining an Evaluation Function on page ER-3-202. After creating services, you can view and edit them in the Network Browser, as shown in Figure 3-62.
Figure 3-62 Services in the Network Browser

Modeler/Release 14.0 www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

ER-3-199

3—Project Editor

After services are defined, you can analyze the services. For more information, see Evaluating Services on page ER-3-206. When the analyses are complete, you can visualize the analyses and view service-related reports. For more information, see Visualizing Services Analysis on page ER-3-208 and Viewing Service-Related Reports on page ER-3-208. So that you can quickly re-create defined services in scenarios, you can export and import service information. For more information, see Exporting Services on page ER-3-209 and Importing Services on page ER-3-209. For more information, see • Introducing Services on page ER-3-198 • Services Workflow on page ER-3-200 • Services Procedures on page ER-3-201

Services Workflow
The following table lists a typical services workflow.
Table 3-39 Typical Services Workflow
Step 1 Description Define Services: • Define services. A service includes the service elements (nodes) that comprise the service. • For more information, see Defining a Service on page ER-3-201. 2 Define Service User Groups: • Define sets of end-users that access a service. For example, you specify user elements (nodes) that access the e-mail service. • For more information, see Defining a Service User Group on page ER-3-205. 3 Analyze Services: • Run analyses on the defined services. • For more information, see Evaluating Services on page ER-3-206. 4 View Analyses Results: • Visualize the analyses results and view reports. • For more information, see Visualizing Services Analysis on page ER-3-208 and Viewing Service-Related Reports on page ER-3-208. End of Table 3-39

For more information, see • Introducing Services on page ER-3-198
ER-3-200 www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete Modeler/Release 14.0

3—Project Editor

• Understanding Services on page ER-3-199 • Services Procedures on page ER-3-201 • Analyzing Services on page ER-3-210

Services Procedures
Services procedures include • Defining a Service • Defining an Evaluation Function • Defining a Service User Group • Deleting a Service or Service User Group • Evaluating Services (No Failures) • Exporting Services • Importing Services For more information, see: • Introducing Services on page ER-3-198 • Understanding Services on page ER-3-199 • Services Workflow on page ER-3-200 • Analyzing Services on page ER-3-210
Defining a Service

A service is an object representing a service, including the elements (nodes) that comprise the service.
Procedure 3-85 Defining a Service 1 Open the project/scenario to which you want to add a service. 2 Choose Services > Create Service. ➥ A new service is added and displays in the Network Browser. 3 Add elements to the service. 3.1 Select the object(s) that you want to add from the project editor. To select multiple objects, hold down the Shift key and click on the objects. Note—A service includes the nodes that comprise the service, and other services that are dependent on the service.
Modeler/Release 14.0 www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete ER-3-201

3—Project Editor

3.2 Right-click on the service and choose Add Selected Objects to Service. ➥ The selected objects are listed under the service. Note—To remove object(s) from the service, select the object(s), right-click on the service, and choose Remove Selected Objects from Service. To delete a service, see Deleting a Service or Service User Group on page ER-3-205. 4 Define the evaluation function. For more information, see Defining an Evaluation Function on page ER-3-202. End of Procedure 3-85

After defining services, including the evaluation functions, you can define service user groups. See Defining a Service User Group on page ER-3-205.
Defining an Evaluation Function

After defining a service (see Defining a Service on page ER-3-201), you can specify a formula that defines the criteria for evaluating the service. If no evaluation function is defined, a Default Evaluation Function is used.
Procedure 3-86 Defining an Evaluation Function 1 Right-click on a service and choose Edit Evaluation Function. ➥ The Edit Evaluation Function for <service> dialog box appears.

ER-3-202 www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Modeler/Release 14.0

3—Project Editor

2 Specify the evaluation function using the syntax listed in Table 3-40. Table 3-40
Element Expression

Syntax for Service Evaluation Function
Description Indicates the elements (nodes) that must be up and running. • For elements (nodes), specify Nn (for example: N1) assigned to a node when added to a service. (Note that nodes are numbered in the sequence that they are added.) • For services, specify Sn (for example: S1) assigned to a service.

Boolean Operator

Indicates the comparison between the expression and function. Specify one of the following: • AND • OR

Modeler/Release 14.0 www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

ER-3-203

Reachability_Requirement (i. N2. and • (Is_Connected (N1. S1))—Either N1 can reach N1. Protocol) Note— • The first 2 arguments are required (Node/Service) • Default values are used for the last 4 arguments • Reachability indicates bi-directional Default Evaluation Function If no evaluation function is defined (or <Default> is specified).please inform us.. Specify the function using the following syntax: Is_Connected (Node/Service. Node/Service. ANY. Destination_Port.if tort to your rights.e. Source_Port. using 20 and 30 as the source and destination ports.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only. ANY) where: • N1 AND S1—specifies that both N1 and S1 are up. 30. and • N1 can reach at least one server in S1. and • Is_Connected (N1. Any | All). S1)) where: • N1 AND N2 AND S1—specifies that N1. S1) OR Is_Connected (N2. or N2 can reach S1 End of Table 3-40 3 Click OK. ANY—specifies that N1 can reach any server in S1 Example Evaluation Functions Example 1: N1 AND S1 AND Is_Connected (N1. S1.cadfamily.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. S1. the following function is assumed: N1 AND S1 AND Is_Connected (N1. S1) OR Is_Connected (N2. HTTP) where: • N1 AND S1—specifies that both N1 and S1 are up. and using the HTTP protocol Example 2: N1 AND N2 AND S1 AND (Is_Connected (N1. and S1 are up.0 . S1. 20. End of Procedure 3-86 ER-3-204 www. ➥ The evaluation function is saved.3—Project Editor Table 3-40 Element Function Syntax for Service Evaluation Function (Continued) Description Indicates the reachability between the specified elements (nodes) and services.

➥ The selected service/service user group is deleted. Procedure 3-88 Deleting a Service or Service User Group 1 Right-click on the service/service user group that you want to delete and choose Delete. 3. For more information. you can perform analyses.if tort to your rights. and choose Remove Selected Objects from Service User Group. To delete a service user group. see Evaluating Services. 3. right-click on the service user group. Procedure 3-87 Defining a Service User Group 1 Open the project/scenario to which you want to add a service user group. 2 Choose Services > Create Service User Group ➥ A new service user group is added and displays in the Network Browser and Network Topology. End of Procedure 3-87 After service user groups are defined. select the object(s). You can define a service user group after Defining a Service. see Deleting a Service or Service User Group on page ER-3-205. Note—To remove object(s) from the service user group. ➥ The selected objects are listed under the service user group. End of Procedure 3-88 Modeler/Release 14.2 Right-click on the service user group and choose Add Selected Objects to Service. Deleting a Service or Service User Group Deleting a service or service user group deletes the service/group definition.com The document is for study only. To select multiple objects.we will delete ER-3-205 .please inform us. 3 Add elements (nodes) that represent end-users to the service user group.0 www.cadfamily. Note—Deleting a service or service user group and it elements does not affect the corresponding node defined the project.1 Select the object(s) that you want to add from the project editor. hold down the Shift key and click on the objects.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. including the elements and services included in the service/service user group.3—Project Editor Defining a Service User Group A service user group is a group of end-users that access a service.

com The document is for study only. select: • Service Summary • Service User Group Summary 3. • Select the Generate HTML output checkbox.3 Click OK to close the Select Reports dialog box. 3. 3 Under Reporting Options • Specify the number of failure cases that should be included in the report. When this checkbox is selected. Procedure 3-90 describes how to use survivability analysis to do a basic evaluation of the services in a network with one or more failures. you can evaluate the services by running a flow analysis.1 Click Select Reports. End of Procedure 3-89 Procedure 3-89 describes how to use flow analysis to do a basic evaluation of the services in a network.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. 4 Set other flow analysis parameters.if tort to your rights. 2 Select the “Summary Report Options…” button. There are two service-related reports: Service Summary and Service User Group Summary. the analysis generates a web report and opens the report when it is ready.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. 2 Configure flow analysis to analyze the services in the network. as desired. 3 Enable service reports. and click Run. For more information. see Configuring and Running a Flow Analysis on page FA-2-1. 3. Procedure 3-90 Evaluating Services (With Failures) 1 Choose Flow Analysis > Configure/Run Survivability Analysis. The survivability analysis report will include information on the worst failure cases.0 . by selecting the “Evaluate services” checkbox on the IP tab.please inform us.cadfamily.3—Project Editor Evaluating Services After defining services (see Defining a Service). Procedure 3-89 Evaluating Services (No Failures) 1 Choose Flow Analysis > Configure/Run Flow Analysis. 4 Under Performance Thresholds.2 Under Performance. ER-3-206 www.

You can also view service-related reports in the Results Browser. Figure 3-63 Configuring Summary Reports for Services Set these values to Yes to include services reports in the survivability analysis summary report. End of Procedure 3-90 After you have run a flow analysis with service evaluation.com The document is for study only. you can see the status of the configured services—whether the service is up or down—in the Network Browser. The value for Critical Threshold specifies the maximum number of services that can be down in a network that is critically affected by the failure(s).com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. • Networks with less than 1 failed service are acceptable • Networks with 1 to 9 failed services are moderately impacted • Networks with 10 or more failed services are critically impacted 5 Click OK to close the Configure Survivability Analysis Summary Reports dialog box then run the survivability analysis.0 www. see Visualizing Services Analysis and Viewing Service-Related Reports.please inform us. Modeler/Release 14. The value for Moderate Threshold specifies the maximum number of services that can be down in a network that is moderately affected by the failure(s). For more information. Analyzing Services describes additional studies you can do to assess performance under failure conditions.we will delete ER-3-207 . The summary report will open when the analysis is done.3—Project Editor • Set the Include column to Yes for the two services metrics: Failed Services and Impacted Service Groups.cadfamily. • Configure the moderate and critical thresholds for both reports.if tort to your rights.

1 Choose Flow Analysis > Results > View Results… 1.1 Choose Flow Analysis > Launch Latest Survivability Analysis Report. choose Services > Clear Visualization to clear the analysis display.0 .com The document is for study only.3 Under Element Survivability. an additional “failure” icon displays next to its regular icon.2 Under Distribution of Performance Metrics. click on the following reports: • Services ER-3-208 www. 2 After viewing analysis of services.if tort to your rights.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.2 View the “Service Summary” and “Service User Group Summary” reports. 2. click on the following reports: • Number of Failed Services • Number of Impacted Services Groups 2. see: • Services Procedures on page ER-3-201 Viewing Service-Related Reports After Evaluating Services (No Failures). If a service is down.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. ➥ A visualization of the analysis displays in the Service treeview of the Network Browser. For more information about flow analysis reports.please inform us.cadfamily.3—Project Editor Visualizing Services Analysis After Evaluating Services (No Failures). you can visualize the analysis results in the Service treeview of the Network Browser. End of Procedure 3-91 For more information. Procedure 3-92 Viewing Service-Related Reports 1 View flow analysis Reports 1. 2 View Survivability Analysis Reports 2. Similarly. an additional failure icon appears next to the service icon. see Viewing Reports on page FA-2-21. you can view service-related reports in the Results Browser. Procedure 3-91 Visualizing Analysis Results 1 Choose Services > Visualize Status. if a service user is impacted.

Procedure 3-94 Importing Services 1 Open the project into which you want to import services information.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. End of Procedure 3-93 Importing Services You can import a service definition to quickly recreate defined services and service user groups. etc.3—Project Editor • Service Client Groups End of Procedure 3-92 Exporting Services You can export defined services and service user group definitions to a file so that you can later quickly recreate the same services and service user groups.) are referred to by hierarchical name. an exported file can be reliably imported to another network that contains objects of the same name and hierarchy. 2 Choose Services > Import… ➥ The Select Service Import File dialog box appears. Therefore. The services export file is identified with the file extension “.please inform us.sdi”. 3 Specify the location to save the file and the file name. Modeler/Release 14. If an object is missing. Note—Services elements (nodes. 4 Select Save.com The document is for study only.we will delete ER-3-209 . 2 Choose Services > Export… ➥ The Save As dialog box appears. ➥ The service export file is saved.0 www.cadfamily. the object is skipped and the service definition will not include it. Procedure 3-93 Exporting Services 1 Open the project/scenario with the services information that you want to export.if tort to your rights. demands.

you can determine which services are disrupted most often. links. This scenario represents ideal conditions. Although both flow analysis and survivability analysis have reports on services. From the resulting reports.com The document is for study only. Then. you can configure these failures in the survivability analysis.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. You can still have service outages under these conditions if. select the services file that you want to import and click OK. For example. you can use this type of analysis to determine which services and user groups are most susceptible to failures. if a survivability analysis looks at 5 failure scenarios and a particular service is down if you know the nodes and links that are most likely to fail. • Analyze services under a variety of failure scenarios.0 . In this scenario. you have several analysis options for assessing the performance of those services under different conditions.please inform us. Evaluating Services described this type of analysis—it consists of running flow analysis on the baseline network. ➥ The services definition is imported into the current project/scenario. follow the steps in Evaluating Services to run flow analysis. In general.cadfamily.if tort to your rights. the type of information contained in the reports differs. • Analyze services under a particular failure scenario. The reports generated from a survivability analysis differ from those generated by flow analysis. The survivability reports look at all of the failure scenarios are report on how often a service or user group is impacted by this group of scenarios. The following analysis options are available for services: • Analyze services when there are no network failures. model the failure scenario you want to analyze by failing one or more network elements (nodes. run analysis. This type of analysis consists of running a survivability analysis on the services-enabled network. services) in the editor workspace. you evaluate the effect of certain node or link failures on the services in the network. when all nodes and links are up. To do this type of analysis.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. End of Procedure 3-94 After importing services information. there is no route between a service and one of its users. Since a survivability analysis runs through several failure scenarios. flow analysis results look at the effects of a failure scenario whereas survivability results tend to look at the effects of a set of failure scenarios. Analyzing Services After you have defined and configured services in the network. and view the analysis results. You can determine the effect of the failure by comparing its results with the results of the baseline network or another failure scenario. for example. you can further define the services.3—Project Editor 3 From the Filename pull-down list. ER-3-210 www.

regardless of which menu you use.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Note—To collect simulation attribute statistics for a parametric study.if tort to your rights.0 www.please inform us.com The document is for study only.3—Project Editor DES Menu Operations This section contains descriptions and procedures for using the operations available from the DES menu in the Project Editor. The items that appear on this menu are described below in alphabetical order. use the DES menu or the Workspace pop-up menu. use the Choose Statistics (Advanced) operation. Modeler/Release 14.we will delete ER-3-211 . ➥ A Choose Results dialog box appears. select Choose Results from the Object Pop-Up Menu.cadfamily. To specify object statistics. The procedure is the same. • Choose Individual Statistics on page ER-3-211 • Choose Statistics (Advanced) on page ER-3-213 • Configure/Run Discrete Event Simulation on page ER-3-213 • Define Service Level Agreement on page ER-3-214 • Open DES Log on page ER-3-218 • Panel Operations on page ER-3-219 • Results Operations on page ER-3-221 • Run Discrete Event Simulation on page ER-3-247 Choose Individual Statistics The Choose Individual Statistics operation lets you specify which global or scenario-wide statistics you want to collect during simulation. • To collect results for a particular node or link. use the Object pop-up menu for that object. Procedure 3-95 Collecting Statistics 1 Select Choose Individual Statistics… from one of the following menus: • To collect global or scenario-wide results.

com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only. ER-3-212 www.3—Project Editor Figure 3-64 Choose Results Dialog Boxes global and scenario-wide statistics object statistics 2 Specify the results you want as follows: • Click in the box next to a statistic name to select or deselect that statistic for collection. A checkmark appears in the box next to each statistic that will be collected.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.if tort to your rights.please inform us.0 .cadfamily.

3 If desired.please inform us. create custom animation.com The document is for study only. 4 Click OK to close the dialog box.0 www. A dot appears in the box when at least one of the group’s statistics is selected. Configure/Run Discrete Event Simulation The Configure/Run Discrete Event Simulation operation opens the Configure/Run DES Dialog Box (Detailed).cadfamily. See Statistic Pop-Up Menu on page ER-3-29 for details. and exercise greater control over the amount of data collected. right-click a statistic name to open the Statistic pop-up menu. allowing you to modify how the statistic will be collected or view a description of the statistic. Modeler/Release 14. Features in the Probe Editor allow you to collect scalar statistics.3—Project Editor • Click in the box next to a statistic group to select or deselect all statistics in that category.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. ➥ In the preceding figure. Chapter 15 Probe Editor on page ER-15-1 describes the operations available in this editor. which enables you to set the values of simulation attributes and control how a simulation runs. End of Procedure 3-95 Choose Statistics (Advanced) This operation opens the Probe Editor for advanced control of the results to be collected.we will delete ER-3-213 .if tort to your rights. the IPv6 statistics are selected.

com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.3—Project Editor For more information. Figure 3-65 Define Service Level Agreement Dialog Box Statistic Browser Compliance threshold fields SLA menu The Define Service Level Agreement dialog box has the following components: ER-3-214 www. see Configuring a Simulation on page ER-3-290. ➥ The Define Service Level Agreement dialog box appears. Procedure 3-96 Defining the Thresholds for a Service Level Agreement 1 Do one of the following: • Choose DES > Expert Service Prediction > Define Service Level Agreement… • Click the Define SLA Report… button on the Reports page of the Configure/Run DES dialog box. which lets you set the values of simulation attributes and control how all simulations of a sequence run. Define Service Level Agreement This operation allows you to define the thresholds that will be applied against the results collected from a particular simulation. see Configuring a Simulation on page ER-3-290. For more information. go to the General:Reports page in the Configure/Run DES dialog box.if tort to your rights.cadfamily.please inform us.com The document is for study only.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. Configure/Run Discrete Event Simulation (Advanced) The Configure/Run Discrete Event Simulation operation opens the Simulation Sequence Editor. Note—To select SLAs to be applied in a simulation. Thresholds are applied against a particular statistic.0 .

Modeler/Release 14. For all other statistics. select it from this menu. • Service Level Agreement menu—To edit an existing SLA. Clicking Clear deselects all statistics and resets the Statistic Browser to the top-level tree view. End of Procedure 3-96 Procedure 3-97 Deleting an SLA Report 1 Choose File > Model Files > Delete Model Files… ➥ The file types dialog box opens. If a statistic has a bucket-capture mode set to time average.m): SLA Probe Model”. this windows displays all available statistics for the current scenario. the system is in compliance if FTP Download Response Time is below 0.3—Project Editor • Statistic Browser – Select the statistic to be included in the SLA. An SLA can include thresholds for multiple statistics. You must set each statistic’s threshold individually. or count.5 seconds more than five percent of each hour. see Change Collection Mode on page ER-3-249.cadfamily. Any statistic with a default bucket mode of time average or sum/time retains its default mode.com The document is for study only. 2 Click on “other model types ->” to display an expanded list of model types. Note—The Import All Statistics operation could take five minutes or more. Clicking Import All Statistics displays statistics for all models listed in your mod_dirs preference.5 seconds 95 percent of each hour (in simulation time).com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. In the example. This means that an SLA violation will be shown if the FTP Download Response Time is above 0. 3 Click on “(.please inform us. the threshold applies only to the last statistic you selected. the SLA measures compliance for the entire simulation run. By default. the total simulation run is divided into buckets (set by the Bucket Duration: field) and measures compliance for each bucket.0 www.if tort to your rights. For more information about statistic collection and bucket modes. all other statistics have bucket modes set to summary. select it in the Statistic Browser. if you select multiple statistics and set a threshold.we will delete ER-3-215 . • Compliance Threshold fields—Specify the values for the selected statistic that define the compliance threshold. ➥ The existing files dialog box opens. 2 Select a statistic in the Statistic Browser and define a threshold compliance. 3 Save and close the SLA.pbs. To view a statistic’s compliance. depending on the extent of your model directories. sum/time.

Procedure 3-98 Defining a Statistics Report 1 Open the detailed Configure/Run DES dialog box.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.please inform us. When a report is defined. The data displayed in a report is that from the most recent simulation or (if you ran a set of simulations) from the most recent set. or select from the Open Report pull-down menu to edit an already existing report.0 . click Close. ER-3-216 www.3—Project Editor 4 In the list of existing files. 2 Select Outputs: Reports in the treeview and click the Define Statistics Report… button.if tort to your rights. 3 Select the New Report radio button to start with an empty report. End of Procedure 3-97 Defining Statistics Reports Statistics reports are sets of statistics collected during simulation and optionally prepares for viewing in a web browser.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. you must associate the report with a scenario (on the Reports page of the Configure/Run DES dialog box) and then run the simulation. it is not associated with any particular project or network model.cadfamily. ➥ The Define Reports dialog box appears. click on the name of each statistic report you want to delete. To collect the statistics specified in a statistics report. Statistics reports can contain one or more statistics and are similar to the Top Results reports described in Find Top Statistics on page ER-3-221.com The document is for study only. 5 When finished.

we will delete ER-3-217 . 3 Click on “(.3—Project Editor 4 Choose the desired statistics from the statistic browser.0 www. close and reopen the Configure/Run DES dialog box.cadfamily. The Import All Statistics button searches through all models in your mod_dirs directories and adds any statistics not already listed in the browser. End of Procedure 3-99 Modeler/Release 14.if tort to your rights.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. 5 When finished.pbr. Note—To make a new report appear in the Statistics Reports pane. 4 In the list of existing files. 5 Click on Save or Save As and name this report if necessary.m): Report Probe Model”.com The document is for study only.please inform us. End of Procedure 3-98 Procedure 3-99 Deleting a Statistic Report 1 Choose File > Model Files > Delete Model Files… ➥ The file types dialog box opens. ➥ The existing files dialog box opens. 2 Click on “other model types ->” to display an expanded list of model types. click Close. click on the name of each statistic report you want to delete.

You can change this with the log_time_precision preference.3—Project Editor Open DES Log This operation displays a log containing errors.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.com The document is for study only. The DES log is written to a tab-delimited ASCII file. and a summary of simulation performance. then choose Open DES Log from the pop-up menu. Simulation logs can be viewed in the log viewer (see Log Viewer on page ER-1-24) or directly from a DES menu (Procedure 3-100). choose DES > Open DES Log. Procedure 3-100 Viewing the Simulation Log 1 Right-click in the Project Editor workspace or on a node or link.cadfamily. simulation times are displayed in the log with twelve decimal places. The columns displayed in the DES log are listed in Table 3-41. (Alternatively. significant simulation events. Figure 3-66 Log Browser ER-3-218 www.) ➥ The log viewer opens with the Discrete Event Simulation tab selected and logs for the current scenario listed in the log treeview.please inform us.0 .if tort to your rights.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. By default.

unlike the tile operation.3—Project Editor Table 3-41 DES Log Fields Label Time Event Node Category Description Simulation time of the log entry Current simulation event number Node at which log event occurred (if any) “Low-Level” errors are simulation errors such as recoverable or diagnostic errors. if RIP routing is disabled. results) Full text of the log message.com The document is for study only.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. “Protocol” messages are those generated at the protocol level (TCP. “Configuration” messages cover configuration of the topology or connectivity of network devices. The operations include: • Arrange Panels Operations on page ER-3-219 • Panel Templates Operations on page ER-3-220 • Delete All Panels on page ER-3-221 Arrange Panels Operations Cascade This operation arranges open panels in an overlapping pattern that ensures the title bar of each panel is visible.please inform us. May contain possible causes of errors and suggestions to prevent similar errors. “Results” messages describe events or conditions of the simulation that may affect the expected results. a results log entry is made because no routing packets are being sent.cadfamily. IP. Distribute This operation arranges open panels along a grid but (unlike tile) does not redraw them to a uniform size. For example. ATM) Class Subclass Message Protocol layer generating the message Subset of protocol generating the message (routing. Modeler/Release 14. End of Table 3-41 End of Procedure 3-100 Panel Operations The operations on this submenu control the display of analysis panels. and less load is being imposed on the network. transmission.we will delete ER-3-219 .0 www. Panels are not redrawn to a uniform size.if tort to your rights.

right-click on the desired graph and choose Make Graph Template from the Graph pop-up menu. You can also make a specific graph or analysis panel into a template from the Graph or Panel pop-up menus. the procedure is the same. Panel Templates Operations Create From All Panels This operation removes the data for collected statistics from all analysis panels in the current scenario. the statistic is drawn according to the template’s creation history. templates can hold such operations as histograms. 2 Edit the graph and panel properties as desired.if tort to your rights. • To change a specific panel into a template. You can examine the creation history using the General Statistic Info operation in the Edit Panel dialog box. When a statistic is applied to a template. ➥ The selected graph or panels are changed into templates. 3 Select one of the following operations: • To change all panels in the scenario into templates. Thus. the procedure is the same. You can also apply data to a specific graph or panel template from the Graph or Panel pop-up menus. and panel properties. Tile This operation redraws open panels to a uniform size and arranges them in a grid. single-input filters. Show All This operation draws any analysis panels previously hidden. In any case. ER-3-220 www.3—Project Editor Hide All This operation hides all analysis panels that have been drawn.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. Before changing a statistic into a template. probability profiles.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. you can apply any operation to it except a multi-input filter. In any case. right-click on the desired panel and choose Make Panel Template from the Panel pop-up menu.please inform us.cadfamily. choose DES > Results > Panel Templates > Create From All Panels.com The document is for study only. making them into templates. the new data receives the same operations in the same sequence. • To change a specific graph into a template. End of Procedure 3-101 Load With Latest Results This operation applies the data for collected statistics to all templates in the current scenario.0 . Procedure 3-101 Creating a Template 1 Create one or more analysis panels containing the desired types of data.

Modeler/Release 14. To apply new data.cadfamily. Templates with statistics for which no data was collected remain without data.com The document is for study only. Procedure 3-102 Applying Data to a Template 1 Make sure the tool window holds a template panel.if tort to your rights. 2 Select one of the following operations: • To load all active templates in the scenario. End of Procedure 3-102 Delete All Panels The Delete All Panels operation deletes all analysis panels in the current scenario.0 www.please inform us. ➥ Collected data is applied to any matching selected template statistics. • To load all templates in a graph.3—Project Editor After data is applied to a template.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. choose Load Data Into Template from the Graph pop-up menu. Results Operations The operations on this submenu provide access to the results of discrete event simulations. The operations include: • Find Top Statistics on page ER-3-221 • Tracking Application Delays on page ER-3-224 • Generate Web Report on page ER-3-229 • Launch Last Web Report on page ER-3-229 • View Results on page ER-3-235 • Compare Results on page ER-3-235 • Viewing SLA Violations on page ER-3-246 Find Top Statistics This operation allows you to quickly determine which nodes and links produced the maximum or minimum values for any given statistic in the last simulation. • To load all templates in a panel. it becomes a normal statistic and data can no longer be applied to it.we will delete ER-3-221 . choose DES > Results > Panel Templates > Load With Latest Results. you must first create another template from the statistic. choose Load Data Into Template from the Panel pop-up menu.

If the graph displays a statistic covered by the SLA. You may have applied a service level agreement (SLA) to the scenario. or move to the subnet view containing a selected object. You can also create a graph. ER-3-222 www. average.3—Project Editor Choosing Find Top Statistics from the DES menu (or Find Top Results from the Workspace pop-up menu) opens a statistic browser containing node and link statistics from the current scenario. or maximum value. 3 Click the Find Top Results button.please inform us. Figure 3-67 Top Objects Dialog Box Sort indicator Procedure 3-103 Finding Top Results 1 Choose DES > Results > Find Top Statistics (or Find Top Results from the Workspace pop-up menu).com The document is for study only.0 . violations of the SLA will be shown. or text report containing all statistics listed in the dialog box.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.cadfamily.if tort to your rights. filtered graph. ➥ The Find Top Results statistic browser appears. ➥ The Top Objects dialog box opens for the statistic you selected. The statistic browser remains open until you click the Close button. This dialog box allows you to sort these results by minimum. Selecting a statistic in this browser will open a dialog box showing the nodes or links that produced the top 10 average values for that statistic during the last simulation run. 2 Find and select the statistic you wish to display. in ascending or descending order. ➥ The Find Top Results button becomes active.

End of Procedure 3-105 Modeler/Release 14. and the objects are sorted in the chosen order. 2 Click the Graph button. Value to use when identifying top results: Maximum.com The document is for study only. End of Procedure 3-104 Procedure 3-105 Creating a Graph 1 Specify whether the graphs should be stacked or overlaid.0 www. 2 To change the direction of the sort (largest to smallest or smallest to largest). Criterion for comparing values to the cutoff: greater than or less than.cadfamily.please inform us. use the controls in the lower left part of the dialog box to control the results displayed.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Average. or Minimum End of Procedure 3-103 Procedure 3-104 Changing the Sort Order 1 Click on the column header for the value that you want to use to sort the entries (Minimum. ➥ The sort indicator moves into the specified column and the entries are sorted by the chosen values. ➥ An analysis panel is drawn showing all of the statistics listed in the top results.if tort to your rights. click on the header again. as shown in the following figure.3—Project Editor 4 If desired. or Maximum). Number of values to display.we will delete ER-3-223 . ➥ The sort indicator changes to indicate ascending or descending order. Average. Cutoff for considering values as top results.

examining sources of delay in each segment of its path.cadfamily. ➥ An edit pad opens containing a text version of the information shown in the Top Objects dialog box. End of Procedure 3-106 Procedure 3-107 Finding a Node 1 Select an object in the Object Name column of the Top Objects dialog box.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.com The document is for study only. you can follow each packet of an application message throughout the simulated network.3—Project Editor Procedure 3-106 Creating an ASCII Report 1 Click the Report button.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. 2 Click the Find Object button.if tort to your rights. You can use this feature to answer questions such as: • What are my slowest applications? • Did my application spend more time processing at the application layer or in the network? ER-3-224 www. End of Procedure 3-107 Tracking Application Delays Application Delay Tracking (ADT) is an advanced feature that helps you identify the sources of application delay in a discrete event simulation. ➥ The workspace view changes to show the subnet containing the selected object.0 . With ADT.please inform us.

In this figure. Also. note that ADT will slow down execution of a simulation considerably.0 www.cadfamily. Limit the objects on which ADT is enabled and the duration over which it operates. However.please inform us. Application Delay Tracking captures a lot of data and its data file quickly grows very large. because ADT works on the lower levels of network behavior. Thus.3—Project Editor • What intermediate nodes or links were the largest bottlenecks? • Where were application packets dropped? You can use ADT to identify application performance problems that elude diagnosis with higher-level (and thus easier-to-use) tools such as AppDoctor. the Application Segment Tracking Viewer shows a message that experienced rapid WLAN retransmissions interspersed with slower TCP retransmissions (which highlights the exponential back-off behavior in TCP).if tort to your rights.com The document is for study only.we will delete ER-3-225 . you should be selective about its use.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. The following figure presents a sample use of Application Delay Tracking. you must have an in-depth understanding of the applications involved and be able to recognize unreasonable behavior to make good use of this feature. Figure 3-68 Application Delay Tracking: Example Modeler/Release 14.

com The document is for study only. network delay — The duration of individual message transfers. b) Sort to find the slowest application transactions. On each workstation for which you want to generate data. You can change the data file directory when you configure the simulation (see Changing the Data Directory for Application Delay Tracking on page ER-3-228). For the GNA models included in the Standard Model Library.0 . choose DES > Results > View Application Delay Tracking to open the Application Segment Tracking Viewer. transmission. 1) Enable Application Delay Tracking for your application models. By navigating the treeview.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. This file contains tracking data for all enabled profiles.please inform us. set the following attribute to Enabled: Applications > Application: Supported Profiles > row n > Application Delay Tracking To reduce the size of the ADT data file. The viewer uses a treeview to organize tracking data and two panes that show the tracking data in tabular and graphical form. After the simulation completes. link. workstation nodes have an attribute that supports application tracking for individual profiles. and the message processing times at individual links and nodes — Protocol. you can see information such as — The breakdown of transaction times into application vs.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. An Application Delay Tracking (*. 3) Analyze the results. and congestion delay times for individual packets A typical workflow for analyzing results is to a) View summary information for application transactions.adt) data file is generated in your primary model directory.if tort to your rights. ER-3-226 www.cadfamily.3—Project Editor Workflow for Tracking Application Delays The following steps outline a general workflow for viewing application delays in a network. edit one or more of the following sub-attributes: — Application Delay Tracking > Start Time (seconds) — Application Delay Tracking > End Time (seconds) — Application Delay Tracking > Sample Every N Applications — Application Delay Tracking > Maximum Samples 2) Run the discrete event simulation.

com The document is for study only. To do this.0 www. choose Packet Time Filtering Filtering lets you remove unneeded transactions from the viewer.if tort to your rights.cadfamily.please inform us. d) Identify bottlenecks in the network. choose Transaction Time — To zoom in on a packet and see packet delays. • Use the Arrange pull-down menu to organize the data hierarchy: — To examine delays by message. choose Simulation Time — To zoom in on a transaction and see transaction delays. use the last filter option. • To show only those transactions that exceed a defined Service Level Agreement (SLA). Click the Filter… button to remove transactions based on name. choose Nodes/Links Above Messages • Click on a column head in the data table to sort the data based on column values.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. start time. filter by transaction duration. • Use the Time scale pull-down menu to adjust the zoom level of the graphical display: — To view transactions relative to the entire simulation. Application Delay Analysis Techniques The Application Segment Tracking Viewer gives you control over what Application Delay Tracking data you see and how it is organized. drill into transactions of interest to identify the slowest links and nodes. • To show outliers (transactions with messages whose duration differs significantly from some standard). number of messages.3—Project Editor c) Filter out unneeded application transactions. client name. Sorting Sorting lets you arrange the displayed data in the most useful order for your analysis. choose Messages Above Nodes/Links — To examine delays by link segment. Modeler/Release 14. and message duration. duration. and so on.we will delete ER-3-227 . those with the most dropped packets. This control makes it easier to analyze the data and identify the probable causes of application delays. if any.

3) Set the Applications > Application Tracking Directory attribute to the desired directory path. not on the entire data set.0 . Changing the Data Directory for Application Delay Tracking The default location for Application Delay Tracking data files is your primary model directory.please inform us. Use this procedure to change the default location. This approach lets you iteratively reduce the displayed data until you have only what you need for analysis. Procedure 3-108 Changing the Data Directory for Application Delay Tracking 1) Choose DES > Configure/Run Discrete Event Simulation.if tort to your rights. The Show All button restores the entire data set to the viewer. That is. These color codes are • Yellow—tier processing ER-3-228 www.cadfamily.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.com The document is for study only. Application Delay Tracking Color Scheme The delay graphs in the Application Segment Tracking Viewer use a color code to identify the source of delays. End of Procedure 3-108 Model Support for Application Delay Tracking The following models support Application Delay Tracking: • Application models — ACE — ACE Whiteboard — Custom Application — FTP — HTTP — Voice — Video • Broadcast/wireless MAC models — WLAN You can use the KPs in the Application Delay Tracking Package to add support for Application Delay Tracking to your custom models. 2) Go to the Inputs > Global Attributes page.3—Project Editor Filter actions are cumulative.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. the filter actions in the Application Delay Tracking Filter dialog box operate on the data shown in the Application Segment Tracking Viewer.

3—Project Editor

• Red—network latency • Green—network bandwidth • Blue—network congestion and protocol
Generate Web Report

After a simulation has collected web report data, the web report must be generated. Generating the web report takes the raw data collected by the simulation and creates HTML formatted pages that is read by a web browser. Additionally, you can generate web reports automatically after data collection by selecting the checkbox on the Reports page of the Configure/Run DES dialog box. See Configure/Run Discrete Event Simulation on page ER-3-213 for more information.
Procedure 3-109 Generating a Web Report 1 Choose DES > Results > Generate Web Report. ➥ The Specify Report dialog box appears.

2 Rename the web report, if desired. The default web report name is the current date and time. 3 Specify whether you want to generate web versions of: • graphs created in the Project Editor. • data specified through the Choose Reports operation. 4 Click OK. ➥ The web report is created in the directory specified by the web_rep_storage_dir preference. End of Procedure 3-109

Launch Last Web Report

Two types of web-based reports are available: • Top object reports • Service Level Agreement (SLA) reports
Modeler/Release 14.0 www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete ER-3-229

3—Project Editor

Both types of reports contain the Top Nodes and Links report (also called the Top Objects report) and global statistic reports. SLA reports also contain SLA violation and SLA close call reports. To view web reports, a web browser must be installed in the location described by the preference browser_prog. Web reports are created in the location specified in the web_rep_storage_dir preference when the Generate Web Report operation is run.
Procedure 3-110 Viewing Web Reports 1 Choose DES > Results > Launch Last Web Report. ➥ A list of available web reports appears.

2 Find and select the report you want to display. The View Most Recent button displays the most recently generated report from the current project and scenario.

ER-3-230 www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Modeler/Release 14.0

3—Project Editor

3 Click OK. ➥ The web browser opens to the home page for the report you selected.

link display area

data display area

4 Select one of the reports listed in the link display area. ➥ Available object lists and statistic groups appear in the lower part of the link display area. End of Procedure 3-110

Procedure 3-111 Viewing Top Object Reports 1 Follow the instructions above to display available links. 2 Click on the desired object list or statistic group. Figure 3-69 Object List Web Report

Modeler/Release 14.0 www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

ER-3-231

3—Project Editor

Figure 3-70 Statistic Group Web Report

3 Sort the statistic group report by percentage of service level agreement violations, average value, peak value, or node name, by clicking on the appropriate column heading. 4 Click on a node name to view an individual node statistic graph. This graph is identical to an analysis panel graph of the same statistic, although it cannot be edited.

End of Procedure 3-111

ER-3-232 www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Modeler/Release 14.0

3—Project Editor

Procedure 3-112 Viewing SLA Reports 1 Follow the instructions above to display available links. SLA reports are preceded with the string SLA.

2 Click on the SLA report that you want to examine. ➥ Links to the SLA’s violations and close calls reports, plus the top objects report, appear in the lower part of the link display area. If the SLA was not violated, you see links only to the text summary reports. If the SLA was violated, you see, in addition to the text summary reports, links to reports by object and statistic. Whether or not the SLA was violated, you will see a link to the Top Nodes and Links report.

SLA reports

Top objects report

3 Click on the link that displays the desired report. Table 3-42 lists the reports and graphs available. End of Procedure 3-112

Modeler/Release 14.0 www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

ER-3-233

3—Project Editor

Table 3-42 ESP Reports
Name Violations Text Summary 1 Access Click on Violations:Text Summary link in link display area Description If no violations, a simple statement. If violations, a list of objects that violated the SLA, with detailed descriptions of the violation. The list can be sorted by statistic. Same graphs as shown when you select View Results. For more information, see Viewing SLA Violations on page ER-3-246. A table listing each link or node that violated a statistic and the statistic violated. Similar to the Top Nodes and Links report, except that all objects violating an SLA are listed and the statistic violated is color-coded. <Statistic_Group> Violations
1

Statistic graph and percentage compliance graphs

In Violations Text Summary report or Statistic_Group Violations report, click on object name Click on Violations:By <Object>

Violations Summary By 1 <Object>

Click on By Statistic:<Statistic_Group> In Violations Summary By <Object> report, click on statistic name

A table listing objects that violated the SLA relating to the statistic group, with detailed information about each object. The table can be sorted by object, average, or peak.

<Statistic_Group> SLA Violations Timeline

In <Statistic_Group> Violations report, click on click on Show violations timeline link In <Statistic_Group> Violations report, click on Show statistic table link

A color-coded representation showing whether the SLA was violated during a time period.

<Statistic_Group> SLA Violations Table

Similar to the <Statistic_Group> Violations report, but a status column shows violations and close calls, and a periods columns shows the number of periods in violation. Same as Top Objects report, but SLA violations and close calls are color-coded. Similar to Violations Summary By <object> but limited to worst violators. Similar to <Statistic_Group> Violations but lists top objects for each statistic. A color-coded representation showing whether the SLA was violated during a time period. Similar to the <Statistic_Group> SLA Violations Timeline, but lists top objects for each statistic. Looks similar to the <Statistic_Group> SLA Violations Table, but lists top objects for each statistic, which may or may not have violated the SLA.

Top <Objects> Summary

Click on Top Nodes and Links:By <Object>

Top Objects for <Statistic_Group> Top <Statistic_Group> SLA Violations Timeline

Click on Top Nodes and Links:By Statistic: <Statistic_Group> In Top Objects for <Statistic_Group> report, click on Show violations timeline link

Top Objects for <Statistic_Group>

In Top Objects for <Statistic_Group> report, click on Show statistic table link

End of Table 3-42
1. If applicable, an analogous Close Calls report may display

ER-3-234 www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete

Modeler/Release 14.0

within scenarios in the current project. then choose View Results from the pop-up menu • Object pop-up menu: right-click on an object (site.cadfamily. The Presentation is set to “Overlaid Statistics” by default.3—Project Editor View Results The View Results operation allows you to use statistics from discrete event simulation or Flow Analysis to create standard or parametric analysis panels. or demand). path. Compare Results The Compare Results operation allows you to create graphs showing results for the same statistic within the current scenario.we will delete ER-3-235 . or in all available projects.0 www. These pages provide options for displaying statistics in the same or different graphs and for manipulating the data in various ways. you can use any collected statistics available on your computer to create new graphs. link. When you choose this operation. see Graphs on page ER-3-236.please inform us. then choose Add Statistic from the pop-up menu The Results Browser contains several tabbed pages representing different collection methods (such as discrete event simulation or flow analysis) and statistic types: • Graph pages let you create standard analysis panels from vector statistics. Results Browser The Results Browser is used to view simulation and analysis results and to perform parametric studies. add statistics to existing graphs. • Parametric Studies—scalar analysis panels showing results for the same statistic across multiple simulations or comparing one statistic with another. • Tables—tabular displays of results from output table files. or view tabular results. Modeler/Release 14.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Choosing this operation from the DES menu opens the Results Browser dialog box with the current project shown and the current scenario selected. then choose View Results from the pop-up menu • Graph pop-up menu: right-click in a graph. You can open the Results Browser using any of these methods: • Menu bar: choose File > DES > View Results • Tool bar: left-click on the View Results tool button • Workspace pop-up menu: right-click in the workspace. the Results Browser opens and you can select the type of analysis panel to create: • Graphs—standard analysis panels created from vector statistics. For more information.com The document is for study only. With the Results Browser.if tort to your rights.

response time. For more information about SLA violations. For graphs and parametric studies.3—Project Editor • Parametric Studies pages let you create analysis panels to show results for the same statistic across multiple simulations or to compare one statistic with another. Arrangements can be saved and reused. see Tables on page ER-3-241. see Viewing SLA Violations on page ER-3-246. If you applied a service level agreement (SLA) to the scenario and the graph displays a statistic covered by the SLA.y plot in which the horizontal (x) axis represents the simulation time and the vertical (y) axis represents the measured value. Most graphs represent data using an x. • Table pages show all available output table reports. you can control the hierarchy of items in the results treeview. by name.cadfamily. violations of the SLA will be shown on the graph. Figure 3-71 Results Browser—Graphs Page Source treeview Results treeview ER-3-236 www.if tort to your rights.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. For more information. see Parametric Studies on page ER-3-240.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. This lets you arrange the tree to group results by their parent objects.0 . These pages also provide an interface for creating web reports of these tables.please inform us. by specific tags (which identify related statistics).com The document is for study only. or any other way that provides convenient access to the results in which you are interested. For more information. or throughput) and how that statistic changes during a simulation. Graphs A graph usually describes one statistic (such as utilization.

all results are included in the treeview.if tort to your rights.please inform us. When unselected.4 Select one or more results in the results (bottom) treeview. To create an analysis panel graph.cadfamily.2 Select the desired source files in the source (top) treeview. If the filter operates on more than one result. 3 Select the source of the results you want to view: 3. see Predefined Filters on page MC-12-40. choose whether to look at the current scenario.3 If desired.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. 4 Select the specific results you want to view: 4.com The document is for study only. or all results in the computer’s model directories.2 Use the Ignore Views checkbox to specify which results are included in the results treeview. use the first pull-down menu to specify whether they should be drawn in the same graph (Overlaid Statistics) or in separate graphs (Stacked Statistics). 5.1 From the “Show results:” pull-down menu. 4. Modeler/Release 14.1 If you have selected two or more results. only results for objects that are visible in the current view are included. When this checkbox is selected. use the second pull-down menu to choose a computation or filter to be applied to the results. the current project.3—Project Editor Graphs are displayed in analysis panels.1 From the “Results for:” pull-down menu.2 If desired. 2 Click the Graphs tab corresponding to the type of results that you want to view (for example. For descriptions of the filters. such as the adder filter. ➥ The selected results are drawn in the Preview pane. 4. use the “Arrangement:” pull-down menu to change the hierarchy of the results treeview: • Choose a saved arrangement. If none of the available arrangements meets your needs. follow the Defining an Arrangement for the Results Browser procedure to define a new arrangement.0 www. 5 Use the Presentation controls to specify how the results should be displayed: 5.we will delete ER-3-237 . 3. follow Procedure 3-113. Procedure 3-113 Creating an Analysis Panel Graph 1 Open the Results Browser. the filter is applied to the results in the order they were chosen. which you create from a Graphs page in the Results Browser. ➥ The dialog box switches to the requested Graphs page. choose which results to consider: • Common to all selected files—only results that appear in every source file • Found in any selected files—every result found in at least one of the source files 4. DES Graphs).

ER-3-238 www. enter them in the corresponding fields. End of Procedure 3-113 Defining an Arrangement for the Results Browser You can change the order in which results are listed on Graph and Parametric Studies pages in the Results Browser and what information is displayed about the results. click the Edit… button. Use the following procedure to define a custom hierarchy for the results treeview in the Results Browser. ➥ The Statistics Tree Arrangement editor opens.please inform us.0 .com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.3—Project Editor If the filter requires additional parameters. • To remove an unwanted property.if tort to your rights.cadfamily.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. Procedure 3-114 Defining an Arrangement in the Results Browser 1 In the Results Browser. You can right-click on the analysis panel or graph to edit their appearance. ➥ An analysis panel opens showing the results you selected. In this editor. The Results Browser remains open. The Statistics Tree Arrangement editor lists all properties (such as statistic names and tags) that can be used to define the results tree hierarchy. select it and click the Remove button. you can specify which properties are used to build the tree and in what order they are used. 2 Use the “Hierarchy in statistic tree” pane to specify which properties should be used to form the tree hierarchy and the order in which they should be used. 6 Click the Show button. The property is removed from the hierarchy list and added to the “Statistic information display” list.com The document is for study only.

select it and repeatedly click the Move Up or Move Down button until the property is in the desired position. then click Save. click on “Click to add…” and select the property from the pop-up list.com The document is for study only. 3 Use the “Statistic information display” pane to specify which properties should be included in a properties node immediately above the lowest level (file) node. Specify a model directory and file name. click the Save As… button.cadfamily. • To include a property. • To change the order of a property. End of Procedure 3-114 Modeler/Release 14. The property is removed from the “Statistic information display” list and added to the hierarchy list.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. ➥ The Statistics Tree Arrangement editor closes and the new hierarchy is applied to the results treeview in the Results Browser.we will delete ER-3-239 .3—Project Editor • To add a property. The properties listed in the “Statistic information display” pane represent all tags associated with the statistics currently listed in the Results Browser. plus any default properties that have been removed from the “Hierarchy in statistic tree” pane. select it and repeatedly click the Move Up or Move Down button until the property is in the desired position. 5 Click OK. • To change the order of a property.if tort to your rights. 4 If you want to save this hierarchy for future use.please inform us. click in its Display? cell to toggle the value to Yes.0 www. Arrangements are saved as model files and are available to any project.

You perform a parametric study from the Parametric Studies page of the Results Browser.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.if tort to your rights.3 From the “Show results:” pull-down menu. 3 Compare two statistics: 3. Figure 3-72 Results Browser—Parametric Studies Page Source treeview Results treeview Procedure 3-115 Creating a Parametric Analysis Panel 1 Open the Results Browser. It also can be used to examine the effect on one statistic as another is changed in the same scenario. choose which results to consider: • Common to all selected files—only results that appear in every source file • Found in any selected files—every result found in at least one of the source files ER-3-240 www. the current project.3—Project Editor Parametric Studies A parametric study examines results for the same statistic from different scenarios or from various runs of the same traffic growth simulation. or all results in the computer’s model directories.cadfamily.0 .we will delete Modeler/Release 14.com The document is for study only. 3.2 Select the desired source files in the source (top) treeview. ➥ The Parametric Studies page appears. 2 Click the DES Parametric Studies tab. choose whether to look at the current scenario. 3.please inform us.1 From the “Results for:” pull-down menu.

you can do the following: • View detailed documentation on a report—To view detailed information about the current report. select one or more additional sources for statistics (if necessary). select a statistic to be plotted on the vertical axis.com The document is for study only. representing the different simulation runs for which statistic values are available. select a statistic to be plotted on the horizontal axis. Note that the x-axis is labeled Experiment #.2 Right-click on the Series table (below the Preview pane) to use a file. Then click the Set As Y-Series button.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. 4.1 In the source (top) treeview. (Alternatively.5 If desired.3—Project Editor 3. When unselected. right-click on the Series table to use a file.if tort to your rights. Modeler/Release 14. select the statistic in the results (bottom) treeview and click the Add To Parameters button.4 Use the “Include vectors” checkbox to specify which kinds of results to include in the results treeview. only scalars are shown. • Access more detailed reports—Blue text indicates that the simulation generated a related drill-down report. or project name on the x-axis. or project name as a parameter.) ➥ The Preview pane now shows values of the second statistic on the x-axis. 5 Click the Show button. follow the Defining an Arrangement for the Results Browser procedure to define a new arrangement. both vector and scalar results are included.) ➥ The Preview pane now shows traces for each parameter value. (Or.0 www. The Results Browser remains open. Then click the Set As X-Series button. If none of the available arrangements meets your needs. to use a statistic. When this checkbox is selected. use the “Arrangement:” pull-down menu to change the hierarchy of the results treeview: • Choose a saved arrangement.7 In the results (bottom) treeview.cadfamily. scenario. ➥ The statistic is drawn in the Preview pane. 4 Add additional parameters to the graph: 4. choose Help > Describe Current Report. ➥ An analysis panel opens with the parametric study results.please inform us.6 In the results (bottom) treeview. 3. 3. You can right-click on the analysis panel or graph to edit their appearance. 3.we will delete ER-3-241 . scenario. End of Procedure 3-115 Tables When viewing tables. Click in the cell to open the detailed report.

cadfamily. as shown in the following figure: Figure 3-74 Find in Report Dialog Box ER-3-242 www. choose Edit > Find in the table viewer. Note—If any object in a table contains information that spans several rows. right-click in the column you want to use as the sort key. or HTML file—To do this. node. • Hide/Exclude/Restore rows or columns—Use the pop-up menu to perform these operations. • Copy one or more cells to clipboard—You can copy all or part of a report to the clipboard using the pop-up menu. Figure 3-73 Table Viewer Click on blue text to open a related or drill-down report Click on red text to select and zoom to the specified object(s) in the Project Editor workspace Searching a Report To search a report for specific information.if tort to your rights.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. sorting the table might cause that table to present data inaccurately. This opens the Find in Report dialog box. To select and zoom to one or more objects in the Project Editor. choose File > Export. • Search the table for a specified string—Use the Find operation (Edit > Find) to search the report. • Sort rows—To sort rows alphabetically or numerically.3—Project Editor • Select and zoom to objects in the Project Editor—Red text indicates a network object such a link. You can then paste the report contents into a text editor or a spreadsheet program like Excel. select the corresponding table cells.com The document is for study only. or demand.0 . • Export report to a spreadsheet.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.please inform us. ASCII.

➥ The Select Tables for Web Report dialog box appears. 3 Click the Generate Web Report… button. You can search the entire table. Figure 3-75 Select Tables for Web Report Dialog Box 4 Choose the results you want to include in the web report. 2 Click on the Table tab that has the results you want to view as a web report. The options are: • Any Part of Cell—Find the next cell that has contents that match the search string • Whole Cell—Find the next cell whose entire contents match the search string • Start of Cell—Find the next cell with contents that start with the search string • Regular Expression—Find the next cell with contents that match a regular expression Find Next Find the next matching cell within the search set (as specified by the Look In setting) based on the Find and Match settings Find Match End of Table 3-43 Generating Web Reports from the Results Browser You can generate a web report that contains one or more of the reports available in the Results Browser.com The document is for study only. a selected set of cells within the table. click the View Results toolbar button to open the Results Browser.please inform us.3—Project Editor Table 3-43 Find in Report Dialog Box Option Look In Description Specify the range of cells to search.if tort to your rights. Procedure 3-116 Generating a Web Report from the Results Browser 1 In the Project Editor. Modeler/Release 14. or a specified column. Specify the matching criteria. 5 Select the Include Network Diagram checkbox if you want the web report to include a graphic of the network topology. Specify the search string in this field.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.0 www.we will delete ER-3-243 .cadfamily.

you can access the top-level and drill-down reports by navigating to them as you would in the table viewer. Through the web report.please inform us. When you click on the name of a report in the frame on the left.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. the report appears in the frame on the right. If the results you generated had an executive summary. ➥ The Web report is created and opens in the default Web browser. Visualizing Data in Web Reports The Table Properties link in the web report lets you hide columns and configure data visualization parameters.com The document is for study only.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. you can configure some columns in the web report parameters to display data using a bar graph and the numerical value.3—Project Editor 6 Click Generate.ss.0 .if tort to your rights. 7 Select a directory for the HTML files and click OK. Figure 3-76 A Results Browser Web Report End of Procedure 3-116 The web report contains links to all the reports you selected for inclusion. The default directory is op_admin/web_reports/<project_name>-<scenario_name>@mm-dd-yyyy_hh.cadfamily.m m. you also set a threshold. which is used to color-code the values. To visualize the data in a report. ER-3-244 www. The executive summary gives you a high-level overview report. When you do this. this also appears as a link.

Figure 3-79 Table Properties Window Modeler/Release 14. • Red: exceeds threshold • Orange: 75-100% of threshold • Yellow: 35-75% of threshold • Green: 2-35% of threshold • Blue: less than 2% of threshold Vertical black bar indicates the value of the threshold.cadfamily. all available columns are shown. then click the “>>” button to move them to the Hidden Columns box.0 www. 2 By default.we will delete ER-3-245 . Double-click on any entry to move it from the Shown Columns to Hidden Columns and vice versa. Figure 3-78 Table Properties Link in a Web Report Click here to open the Table Properties window.com The document is for study only. To move multiple columns at the same time. Procedure 3-117 Configuring Table Properties for a Web Report 1 Click on the Table Properties link in a Web report. use Ctrl-click to select the columns.please inform us.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.3—Project Editor Figure 3-77 Text and Graphical Display in a Web Report Graphical display type Text display type Color-coded horizontal bars indicate value in comparison to the threshold.if tort to your rights.

Threshold End of Table 3-44 4 Click Update. graphs are color-coded (or patterned on monochrome displays) to indicate compliance or non-compliance with the SLA. violations of the SLA will be shown. Sets the threshold value for use with graphical display type. ER-3-246 www. For more information about service level agreements.com The document is for study only.cadfamily.0 . End of Procedure 3-117 Viewing SLA Violations If you applied a service level agreement (SLA) to the scenario and the graph displays a statistic covered by the SLA. A horizontal line shows the threshold specified in the SLA for the statistic.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. The average value of the statistic during any particular time period (or bucket) should comply with this threshold value. The vertical line shows the range of values collected for a statistic during a particular time period. The parameters are listed in the following table. • Statistic minimum/maximum. Table 3-44 Data Visualization Parameters Parameter Column Name Display Type Description Lists the columns with a configurable display type.if tort to your rights. This parameter is unavailable when the Display Type is Text. Statistic Graph The statistic graph shows three distinct pieces of information about the statistic: • Statistic threshold. Violations are shown in the following types of graphs: • Statistic Graph on page ER-3-246 • Percent Compliance Graph on page ER-3-247 If you check the Use Compliance Colors item in the graph pop-up menu.please inform us. Determines if the data is represented graphically. The bar shows the average of all values collected for a statistic during a particular time period. See Pop-Up Menus on page ER-3-25 for information about this menu. • Statistic average.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. which means that no visualization is included.3—Project Editor 3 Configure the Data Visualization Settings. see Define Service Level Agreement on page ER-3-214. The default setting is text.

percent compliance threshold) — A bucket in violation of the statistic threshold is red.0 www.if tort to your rights. “Close call” means that the bucket complies with the SLA. This means that for each time period.com The document is for study only. using whatever configuration was last applied. For this example. the percent compliance threshold was set to 80 percent. The dialog box that appears displays the status of the simulation as it runs and allows you to pause or stop the simulation.3—Project Editor Figure 3-80 Statistic Graph Statistic average Statistic threshold Statistic minimum/maximum Percent Compliance Graph The percent compliance graph shows two pieces of information about the statistic: • The percent compliance threshold defines the percentage of data points within a particular time period that must conform to the statistic threshold for that time period.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. This information is color-coded: — A bucket in compliance with the statistic threshold is green. Figure 3-81 Percent Compliance Graph Percent compliance threshold Run Discrete Event Simulation This operation runs a simulation of the current scenario. This margin is calculated as follows: — margin = 10% * (100% . Modeler/Release 14. more than 80 percent of the data points collected for a single period must be above the 75 percent utilization statistic threshold for the time period to be in compliance with the SLA.we will delete ER-3-247 . • Percent compliance by bucket. — A bucket that is a “close call” is yellow.cadfamily. but is less than some margin above the compliance threshold.please inform us.

we will delete Modeler/Release 14. The operations include • Add Graph • Add Ports • Change Collection Mode • Draw Styles • Draw Thickness • Edit Attributes • Edit Graph Properties • Edit Panel Properties • Enter Selected Subnet • Exporting Data to a Spreadsheet • Statistic Information • Time Axis • Analysis Panel Annotation Objects • Link Peak Usage Reports • View <Object> Description • Generate Distribution From Trace • Zoom In • Zoom Out Add Graph This operation adds a new graph to the current analysis panel. The graph is initially empty and does not contain any statistics.cadfamily.0 . ER-3-248 www.please inform us.3—Project Editor For more information.if tort to your rights. see: • Running a Simulation on page ER-3-299 • Monitoring Simulation Progress on page ER-3-301.com The document is for study only.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. as described in Edit Graph Properties on page ER-3-261. To add a statistic to an empty graph. Pop-Up Menu Operations This section describes operations that appear only on pop-up menus. use the Add Statistic… button in the Edit Graph dialog box.

This feature has the following constraints: • You can add new ports to switches. running a link-dimensioning design action). This functionality is not invoked by operations that can make comprehensive changes to the network topology (for example. This is the default mode. firewalls.cadfamily.if tort to your rights. which can significantly reduce the size of output files.com The document is for study only. Two modes of operation are supported: • Automatic upgrade—If you connect one or more links to a node manually.3—Project Editor Add Ports You can now add ports to an existing device so that it accommodates new links. • Modeler upgrades a node automatically only if the upgrade will have no effect on any other links that are already connected to that node. routers.please inform us. Modeler/Release 14. • Modeler upgrades nodes automatically only when you add or upgrade links manually in the Project Editor. • Bucket—collects all of the points over the time interval or sample count into a “data bucket” and generates a result from each bucket. If the sample count is 10. • Manual upgrade—To add ports to a device manually. This makes it much easier to upgrade nodes and to add or upgrade links manually. every 10th data point is recorded. You cannot add ports to traffic source/destination nodes such as workstations. Modeler will add the necessary ports to support the new links.0 www.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. A wizard prompts you for the number and type of ports to add. and that node does not have enough ports. and LANs. and hubs only. router/switches. The sample and bucket capture modes might reduce the amount of data collected during a simulation. a dialog box might prompt you to confirm the proposed upgrade. • Sample—collects the data according to a user-specified time interval or sample count. Change Collection Mode This operation specifies the mode and frequency with which to collect data for a statistic. clouds. if the time interval is 10.we will delete ER-3-249 . All other data points are discarded. servers. The available capture modes are: • All values—collects every data point from a statistic. • If the node does not support the required port type already. right-click on it and choose Add Ports. For example. data is sampled and recorded every 10th second.

com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. a new value is generated to the output vector whenever the bucket contains 10 values (regardless of how much simulation time has elapsed). every tenth data point is recorded. The total number of buckets is fixed at n.cadfamily. • Every n values—collects the statistic value at the specified sample count. ER-3-250 www. The number of values in each bucket is not fixed. If n equals 10. End of Procedure 3-118 Procedure 3-119 Setting the Capture Mode of a Statistic 1 Right-click a statistic name and choose Change Collection Mode from the Statistic pop-up menu. • Every n values—collects n values in each bucket. If n equals 10. data is sampled and recorded every tenth second of simulation time. a new value is generated to the output vector after every 10 seconds of simulation time (regardless of how many values are in the bucket).please inform us. either the default set for the statistic (usually 100) or a user-specified number of values. If n equals 10.3—Project Editor Procedure 3-118 Setting the Sample Frequency of a Statistic 1 Right-click a statistic name and choose Change Collection Mode from the Statistic pop-up menu. ➥ A dialog box opens with basic statistic collection options.0 .we will delete Modeler/Release 14. All other data points are discarded. each bucket is the set of all values collected during t/n seconds of simulation time. All other data points are discarded. The default value of n is set by the “Values per Statistic” attribute in the Configure/Run Des Dialog Box. The options for sample mode are: • Every n seconds—collects the statistic value at the specified time interval. The options for bucket mode are: • Every n seconds—each bucket collects all values generated during n seconds of simulation time.com The document is for study only.if tort to your rights. • Total of n values—This is the default mode. ➥ A dialog box opens with basic statistic collection options. 3 Click OK to close the dialog box. 2 Select a radio button for one of the sample frequency modes and enter a frequency value. Sample-frequency options have different meanings for bucket mode (the default) or sample mode. each bucket is defined by time: given a simulation duration time of t seconds. The default value of n is set by the “Values per Statistic” attribute in the Configure/Run DES dialog box. If n equals 10. • Total of n values—collects all data up to the specified number of values. and a sample-frequency rate of n. As in “seconds” bucket mode.

cadfamily.3—Project Editor 2 Select the Advanced checkbox.) • If using bucket mode (the default). bucket (the default). and Square-wave. ➥ Pull-down menus for Capture Mode and Bucket Mode are added to the dialog box. it determines if the “max value” mode generates the highest value in each bucket (Reset checked) or the highest value generated up to that point (Reset unchecked). choose Draw Style from the Graph pop-up menu.please inform us. This ensures that each bucket value reflects only the data collected for that bucket.com The document is for study only.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Sample-Hold. (See Setting the Sample Frequency of a Statistic on page ER-3-250 for more information. Linear. • count—The total number of values collected for that bucket period. 3 Choose the desired capture mode from the Capture Mode pull-down menu: all values. • sample mean—The average of all the values collected for that bucket period. With Reset checked (the default position). the bucket value is reset to zero after generating a value and writing it to the output vector. Unchecking Reset causes the bucket value to be retained (not reset to zero) and incorporated into the next bucket. End of Procedure 3-119 Draw Styles There are a variety of draw styles for graphs. Modeler/Release 14. Spline. 4 Select a sample frequency mode and value. • sum / time—The sum of all the values of points within a particular bucket. 5 In a few special cases you may want to turn off the Reset checkbox when using bucket mode. To set the draw style. This setting can greatly affect how values are calculated: for example. or glitch removal.0 www. • time average—The average value where the values that are averaged are weighted according to their duration (where duration is the time between the current value and the next value). sample. • summary—The sample mean. • min value—The minimum of all the values collected for that bucket period. • sum—The sum of all the values collected for that bucket period.we will delete ER-3-251 . including Discrete. 6 Click OK to close the dialog box. divided by the time duration of the bucket. and the standard deviation. Each of these values is graphed separately. The options on the Bucket mode pull-down menu are: • max value—The maximum of all the values collected for that bucket period. you can also specify how to generate a result from each bucket of data. the minimum/maximum values.if tort to your rights. Bar Chart.

please inform us.com The document is for study only. Figure 3-82 Draw Thickness Line Styles Edit Attributes This operation allows you to view and set attribute values through an object’s Edit Attributes dialog box. and Thick. To set the draw thickness. For a detailed description of how to use attributes to characterize objects.if tort to your rights.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. this dialog box displays the name. and units (if any). For each attribute of an object.3—Project Editor Draw Thickness The Draw Thickness menu has four available styles of lines: Dashed. choose Draw Thickness from the Graph pop-up menu. value. Medium. and the different types of attributes available.cadfamily. Thin. Figure 3-82 shows a sample of each line style. see Modeling Framework on page MC-4-1.0 .we will delete Modeler/Release 14. ER-3-252 www.

• To search for a particular attribute. • To view details of an attribute.cadfamily.0 www. double-click in the Value field to edit it.we will delete ER-3-253 .please inform us.3—Project Editor Figure 3-83 Edit Attributes Dialog Box Click the “Help” icon to view details of an attribute Click the +/icon or doubleclick on the parent name to show/hide the sub-attributes The Edit Attributes dialog box appears whenever you right-click on an object and choose Edit Attributes or Advanced Edit Attributes. The matching attributes are displayed. • To edit or view a compound attribute in a new window: — If the Value field contains an ellipsis ( (…) ).com The document is for study only. click in the Value field and choose Edit… from the menu. rest the cursor over the attribute’s name (that is. This dialog box has the same general interface for nodes. links and configuration objects. click on the question mark icon in the leftmost column. in the Attribute column). double-click in the Attribute field.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. • To expand or collapse a compound or grouped attribute. enter a string in the Find field (lower-left corner) and click Filter. Modeler/Release 14. the full attribute name appears in a tooltip. — Otherwise.if tort to your rights. • To view the parents of a nested attribute.

For more information. Extended attrs.) Promotes the attribute so that its value can be specified at a higher level in the network model or when the simulation is run. values. displays all of the attributes (primary and advanced) associated with the object.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. and links only) Button Checkbox Details Button End of Table 3-45 ER-3-254 www. (This button is available only for links that permit you to set packet formats. or you can specify a regular expression. In the advanced Attributes dialog box. Filter Edit field/button Checkboxes and Radio buttons Search for attributes with names or values that contain the specified criteria. For more information about the rules for applying these changes. specify whether criteria is an exact match or string. Additionally. The following table lists the operations available in the Edit Attributes dialog box. you can specify the items to include in the filter: names. nodes. specify whether criteria is an exact match or sting.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. By default. Specifies the filter criteria. Filter Criteria Link Interfaces Button Packet formats (selected links only) Button Promote Button Redefine path (links only) Advanced (subnets.please inform us. In the Attributes dialog box. only primary attributes are displayed. see Filtering Attributes on page ER-3-256. which shows detailed information about the selected attribute. These operations vary depending on the type of object the dialog box supports. Button Displays the Extended Attributes dialog box.cadfamily. When selected.0 . and tags. Allows you to redefine a link’s path by redrawing it in the workspace.com The document is for study only. Displays the Attribute Properties dialog box.if tort to your rights. see Using the “Apply Changes to Selected Objects” Method on page ER-3-280. the Edit Attributes dialog box also provides buttons for various operations such as viewing attribute properties. which allows you to create new attributes for the object.3—Project Editor In addition to attribute names and values. Allows you to specify which packet formats are supported by a link. possible values. Displays interface and port information for nodes connected to the selected link. Table 3-45 Attributes Dialog Box Operations Operation Apply Changes to Selected Objects Access Checkbox Description Applies changes to an object’s attribute values to both the object and all selected objects in the workspace.

The Edit Attributes dialog box displays the device type and vendor/product information of the corresponding object. see Customizing Header Information on page ER-3-258.0 www. Distributions are used to generate a series of random numbers with specified characteristics (such as normal or constant). or a simulation) before you opened the Edit Attributes dialog box.please inform us.cadfamily.intended_color—This color indicates that you recently changed an attribute during the current session of editing attributes (that is. a dialog box opens that allows you to select the type of distribution to use and enter values for one or two parameters that define the shape of the distribution (see Figure 3-84 for an example).com The document is for study only. The predefined distributions supplied with Modeler are described in Distribution Package on page DES-4-1. When you edit the value of a attribute that uses distributions. Setting Distributions Some attributes take a distribution as a value.if tort to your rights.3—Project Editor There are three preferences (Edit > Preferences) you can set to highlight attributes that have changed and do not reflect the default settings in the underlying model.we will delete ER-3-255 . Figure 3-84 Distribution Specification Dialog Box Modeler/Release 14. These preferences are: • mark_nondefault_attrs—Enable/disable attribute highlighting. To see how you can customize this information. As a result. the program. after you opened the Edit Attributes dialog box). • mark_nondefault_attrs. the attribute might not reflect the default value specified in the underlying model. • mark_nondefault_attrs.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.changed_color—This color indicates an attribute that was changed (by a user.

or a regular expression. the results will include only that attributes that contain the specified string. an interface name. or CLI command. Additionally. or tag. vendor. you can specify whether filter criteria is a substring or an exact match..html.) Note—For information about the syntax of regular expressions. you can specify whether filter criteria is a substring. an exact match. or a value (such as an IP address or a MAC address). including the space between words. such as an interface type.please inform us.cadfamily. From the Edit Attributes (Advanced) dialog box. value.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. see http://www.opengroup. if you specify multiple words within a single set of quotations. However. type in a host name. the results will include attributes that contain all specified strings. If you specify multiple words (e. Choose from attribute name.if tort to your rights.g. Figure 3-85 Attributes Dialog Box—Filtering Options Edit Attributes Edit Attributes (Advanced) From the Edit Attributes dialog box. possible value (a value that you can choose from a pull-down menu). ER-3-256 www.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. you can filter more precisely by specifying the items to compare against the filter criteria.3—Project Editor Filtering Attributes Use the filtering feature to easily locate attributes.com The document is for study only.0 . (A tag is a keyword that is associated with a model attribute.org/onlinepubs/007908799/xbd/re. The filtering feature includes different capabilities depending on whether you use the Attributes dialog box or the advanced Attributes dialog box. two or more groups of characters each separated by a space) when filtering by a string. For best results.

cadfamily.please inform us. 193.we will delete ER-3-257 . Compound attribute “MPLS Parameters > TE Flooding > OSPF”. These preferences are: • mark_nonfiltered_attrs—Specifies whether to color-code the filter results in the Attributes dialog box.3—Project Editor The following table lists example filter criteria and the expected results. Filter Criteria . 192.1.2. such as “Max Packet Count”. Attribute name “IS-IS Parameters > Interface Information > Retransmit Interval”. Associated attributes are included in the filter results because they support the matching attribute. 193. • mark_nonfiltered_attrs.0.2.builtins—Specifies the color of “built-in” attributes. Attribute name containing “max packet count”.match—Specifies the color for matching filter results.2.0. These attributes are not filtered and are always displayed.) Attribute names containing “OSPF”. such as “IP Routing Protocols > OSPF Parameters” and “Reports > OSPF Routing Table”.0.0 www.if tort to your rights. Attribute names containing “host”. • mark_nonfiltered_attrs.0.3.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.2. “Interface Information”. • mark_nonfiltered_attrs.0.symbol_match—Specifies the color for matching filter results when the match is a value that can be selected for an attribute. • mark_nonfiltered_attrs. such as “hostname” and “Host Parameters”. such as IP Address 192.com The document is for study only. etc.2.2.prominent—Specifies the color for associated attributes of matching filter results. Parents are included in the filter results to maintain the attribute hierarchy.parent_of_match—Specifies the color for parents of matching filter results.2. Table 3-46 Example Attribute Filters: Filter Criteria and Expected Results Results include… Attribute values containing the specified string. IPv6 OSPF host “max packet count” isis retransmit-interval (CLI command) mpls traffic-eng area (CLI command) End of Table 3-46 Modeler includes preferences (Edit > Preferences) that you can set to color-code filter results. Color coding the results makes it easier to identify matching filtered attributes. “Loopback interfaces”. • mark_nonfiltered_attrs. Modeler/Release 14. etc. Attribute names containing “IPv6”. such as IPv6 Parameters (including “Static Routing Table”.

3—Project Editor Attribute Types Primary and Advanced Attributes Every Edit Attributes dialog box has essentially the same structure. choose Advanced Edit Attributes from the Object pop-up menu or set the Advanced checkbox in the Edit Attributes dialog box. see Setting Attribute Values on page ER-3-279. Network objects (subnets. nodes. The Edit Attributes dialog box uses a treeview structure to represent the parent/child relationships between attributes.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. When you choose Edit Attributes from an object’s pop-up menu. Customizing Header Information The Edit Attributes dialog box displays the device type and vendor/product information of the corresponding object. model developers can organize attributes into groups like “ATM” or “IP Routing”. regardless of the type of object to which it applies. Note—Primary and advanced attributes exist only for network objects.please inform us. this dialog box displays all of the object’s attributes.if tort to your rights. In addition. the dialog box displays all primary attributes associated with the object.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. which specify parts of the object definition that you might set less frequently. For all other objects. Setting Attributes The Edit Attributes dialog box provides one way of setting an attribute value. primary attributes specify the object’s name and its underlying (node or link) model. For a description of all possible ways. and links) also have advanced attributes. Compound and Grouped Attributes Many objects have compound attributes. Figure 3-86 Header Information in an Attributes Dialog Box ER-3-258 www. Primary attributes are those you use most often to define an object. For example. To view the advanced attributes of an object.com The document is for study only.0 . For a detailed description of these topics. see the section on attributes in Modeling Framework on page MC-4-1. Advanced attributes typically define information such as an object’s appearance and location in the workspace. This section describes how you can customize the information that appears in this window. A compound attribute is an attribute that contains other attributes.

3—Project Editor Data can be read from a node’s attributes or its self-description. and the second line specifies the vendor type.com The document is for study only. Each line in this table defines a label/value pair: the first line specifies the node type. such as 'Type: '. Each line in this table specifies four pieces of information.please inform us. You can specify data from the model’s attribute list and self-description for this field.cadfamily. 'Vendor: '. the resulting dialog box displays a maximum of two label/value pairs per line.if tort to your rights.we will delete ER-3-259 . separated by commas: • <label_text>—A label clearly indicating the value displayed. The obj_dbox_headers preference (Edit > Preferences) enables you to customize the information that appears.0 www. The following sections contain notes about how to set these fields. You must delineate this field using single (not double) quotes. Modeler/Release 14. Figure 3-87 Customizing Header Information in the obj_dbox_headers Preference single (not double) quotes used as string delimiters Figure 3-87 shows the obj_dbox_headers table with the default settings. Note that you can specify multiple display fields. (Both these values are specified in the node model’s self-description).com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. or 'Model: ' • <label_tooltip>—The text that appears in the tooltip when a user rests the cursor over the label • <value_tooltip>—The text that appears in the tooltip when a user rests the cursor over the label • <value_text>—The data that appears in the value field. <label_text> Field We recommend the following syntax: <single_quote><label_text><colon><space_character><single_quote> Example: 'Type:' This ensures that a space appears between the label and the field. and displayed in an object’s Edit Attributes dialog box.

if tort to your rights. Again.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. include two single quotes with nothing between ('') .please inform us.com The document is for study only. the attribute window displays this attribute’s value. the attributes window displays one of the three attributes: 1) Modeler looks for <attr1> (attribute 1) in the object’s attribute list. you must use single quotes to delineate characters or strings.) and model. switch. For example. The result is that no tooltip appears when you rest the cursor over a label or value. specify an empty field—that is nothing between the delineating commas. Modeler looks for <attr2> and displays it if possible. etc.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. For example. separated by a space. The result is that the tooltip displays the corresponding <label_text> or <value_text> . The syntax is: selfdesc:<self_description_field> attribute:<attribute_name> You can use the plus sign (+) to show multiple values.3—Project Editor <label_tooltip> and <value_tooltip> Fields The following conventions apply for these fields: • To display the value/label text in a tooltip.0 . 2) If the attribute list does not contain <attr1>. you could enter selfdesc:machine type + ‘ ‘ + attribute:model to display the object’s machine type (router. If the list contains <attr1>. You can use a vertical bar (|) to create “back-up” values in the event that a particular self-description or attribute value isn’t found. • To display no tooltip. you could enter attribute:<attr1> | attribute:<attr2> | attribute: <attr3> Given this string. ER-3-260 www.cadfamily. Figure 3-88 Tooltip fields nothing between commas => value text appears in tooltip two single quotes between commas => no tooltip appears over label <value_text> Field This field displays data from a model’s attribute settings or its self-description.

Modeler looks for <attr3> and displays it if possible. allows you to edit the properties that affect how the graph and the statistics in it are displayed.0 www. located on the Graph pop-up menu. the header does not appear at all. only the manner in which it is displayed.if tort to your rights.please inform us.cadfamily.com The document is for study only.3—Project Editor 3) If the attribute list does not contain <attr1> or <attr2>.we will delete ER-3-261 .com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Edit Graph Properties This operation. Figure 3-89 Edit Graph Dialog Box Statistic properties Graph properties General operations Modeler/Release 14. These properties do not change the data. 4) If none of the attributes are present in the list.

report and parameter values will not appear in the graph. Default is largest vertical value of any data point in this graph. When selected.3—Project Editor The Edit Graph dialog box is divided into three sections.please inform us. Vertical Max Height (pixels) Full Scale [button] Legend [button] ER-3-262 www.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. • Tags—Each tag that is defined for the statistic. Table 3-47 Statistic Properties Name (Active Statistic) Description The first field specifies the statistic on which all statistic operations will be performed. the file. if any.0 . • Statistic—Name of the current statistic. You can use the Show checkbox to specify whether an item is included in the legend and edit the Value cell to change the default text. Draw style Set Color [button] Show [checkbox] End of Table 3-47 Specifies the draw style for the active statistic. • File—Name of the current file. if desired. The following tables list the fields in each of the three sections. • Annotation—An annotation that can be printed above the graph. • Report—Name of the report that collected this statistic. A user-specified custom title. A table of items that can be displayed in the legend for the statistic. Lets you specify the color of the active statistic and its vertical label. as shown in Figure 3-89. the corresponding label is displayed in the panel. Shows the ordinate value assigned to each drawing style in the enumerated vector dictionary. Custom title Legend Table 3-48 Graph Properties Name Vertical Min Description Specifies the minimum vertical value for this graph. Default is smallest vertical value of any data point in this graph.cadfamily. if any. If a custom title is supplied. • Object—Name of the object from which this statistic was collected. The pull-down menu lists all statistics in the graph.if tort to your rights. Specifies the height of the graph in pixels. • Parameter—Text of a parameter label. Specifies the maximum vertical value for this graph.com The document is for study only. Each section deals with a different aspect of the graph. Restores the default vertical values for this graph.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.

please inform us.if tort to your rights.com The document is for study only. You can change these properties in the panel’s Edit Panel dialog box. Figure 3-90 Edit Panel Dialog Box Modeler/Release 14. Closes the Edit Panel dialog box without making further changes to the analysis panel. Applies current options to the graph without closing the Edit Graph dialog box.we will delete ER-3-263 .cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. which opens when you choose Edit Panel Properties from the Panel pop-up menu. only the manner in which it is displayed. These properties do not change the data. Specifies the confidence interval level as a percentage. This menu is available only when the Show Confidence Interval checkbox is selected.0 www.3—Project Editor Table 3-48 Graph Properties (Continued) Name Set Color [button] Show Confidence Interval [checkbox] nn% Confidence Interval Description Specifies the color of the plotting area. When selected. Cancel [button] Apply [button] End of Table 3-49 Edit Panel Properties This operation allows you to edit the properties that affect how an analysis panel is displayed. provides access to the nn% Confidence Interval pull-down menu. End of Table 3-48 Table 3-49 General Operations Name OK [button] Description Applies current options to the analysis panel and closes the Edit Graph dialog box. Changes made previously by the Apply button are not undone.

Closes the Edit Panel dialog box without making further changes to the analysis panel. Specifies the text of the panel title. Specifies the text of the horizontal label. The following table lists the panel operations. Allows you to specify the color of the outer frame of the analysis panel (the area around the graphs).0 .cadfamily. The default label is the time scale (for vectors) or the output scalar name. enables display of the panel title. The default setting is deselected. Specifies the maximum value of the horizontal.com The document is for study only. the current selection set is cleared. by clicking the Set… button. Specifies the minimum value of the horizontal. Restores Horizontal values to their original defaults.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.if tort to your rights. The only difference between these two methods is that double-clicking also de-selects any selected objects. Cancel Draw style pull-down Full Scale Horizontal Label Horizontal Min Horizontal Max OK Panel Coordinates Panel title Show panel title Set all draw styles Set Color End of Table 3-50 Enter Selected Subnet You can enter a selected subnet in one of two ways: by double-clicking on the subnet. Table 3-50 Panel Properties and Operations Name Apply Description Applies current property settings to the analysis panel without closing the Edit Panel dialog box.3—Project Editor The Edit Panel dialog box contains options that affect the way information is displayed in the entire panel. causes a change in draw style to apply to all statistics in the panel. or by right-clicking on the subnet and choosing Enter Subnet from the Object pop-up menu.please inform us. Specifies the drawing style for all statistics in all graphs. Changes made previously with the Apply button are not affected. When selected. Use this dialog box to specify the location and size of the panel. this option is selected. ER-3-264 www. If you enter a subnetwork via the Enter Subnet command. Suppose you are at the parent network level and have three objects selected. By default. the three objects remain selected. Applies current property settings to the analysis panel and closes the Edit Panel dialog box. Summons the Set Panel Coordinates dialog box. When selected. If you enter a subnetwork via double-clicking.

com The document is for study only. If you want to export multiple graphs.if tort to your rights. 2 Display the graph or graphs you wish to export. Other programs will launch. stored in the op_admin/tmp directory.cadfamily. • If you displayed multiple graphs in the panel. see View Results on page ER-3-235.please inform us. ➥ In the case of Microsoft Excel. End of Procedure 3-120 Modeler/Release 14. Procedure 3-120 Exporting Data 1 Verify that the spreadsheet_prog preference displays the path name where the spreadsheet program is located. If the spreadsheet program is Microsoft Excel.3—Project Editor Exporting Data to a Spreadsheet This operation creates a delimited text file from the data in the desired analysis panel and launches the spreadsheet program specified in the relevant preference. imports the text file. The text file. using the Statistics Stacked option.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. it is most efficient to display them all in a single panel. and displays the data in a spreadsheet. For details on display options. 3 Do one of the following: • If you displayed a single graph in the panel.we will delete ER-3-265 . see Program Descriptions on page EI-3-1. right-click on the panel and choose Export All Graph Data to Spreadsheet. For details on this attribute. but you may need to import the data manually. the program launches and displays the data automatically. can then be imported by any spreadsheet program and further manipulated.0 www. right-click on the graph and choose Export Graph Data to Spreadsheet. this operation automatically launches the program.

please inform us. Table 3-51 Statistic Information Dialog Box Operations Name General Statistic Information Description Displays information about each statistic in the panel. This summons the Statistic Information dialog box. statistical data.com The document is for study only. Statistic Data Build Statistic Exit Statistic Information End of Table 3-51 ER-3-266 www. modify statistic data. and operations performed on the statistic.3—Project Editor Statistic Information You can get detailed information about all statistics in a panel by selecting Show Statistic Data in the Panel pop-up menu. or build a new statistic with your own data.0 .cadfamily. Converts the statistic description in the dialog box into vectors that can be graphed in an analysis panel. Closes the Statistic Information dialog box. within which you can view statistic information. This is the alternative selection to General Statistic Info on the pull-down menu in the dialog box. This is the default display when the dialog box appears. Displays detailed information about each statistic in the panel. including the horizontal and vertical values of each entry.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. minimum and maximum values.if tort to your rights. such as number of entries.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Figure 3-91 Statistic Information Dialog Box The following table lists the available operations.

horizontal min.com The document is for study only. Variance of vertical values (the mean value of the squared deviation from the sample mean). Vertical value of the last entry.3—Project Editor General Statistic Information The General Statistic Info operation provides high-level information about all statistics in a panel. Number of entries with values in the statistic (excluding entries with undefined values and the end-of-statistic entry). List of all operations performed on the statistic since the panel’s creation. The following table lists the information provided by this operation. Number of entries in the statistic (including the end-of-statistic entry). The information given applies only to the portion of a statistic that falls within the horizontal range of the panel (though entries immediately preceding and immediately following the range may be included as well).we will delete ER-3-267 . if any.0 www.if tort to your rights. max initial value final value expected value sample mean variance standard deviation confidence intervals operations list End of Table 3-52 Modeler/Release 14. Intervals estimated to contain the true mean of the vertical values at five different levels of confidence.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Table 3-52 General Statistic Information Labels Label zone statistic parameter length number of values Description Name of the graph in which the statistic is drawn. Minimum and maximum vertical values in the statistic. max vertical min. Name of the statistic to which the following information applies. These results are meaningful only if the entries are independent samples. Vertical value of the first entry. Name and current value of a parameter. Typical distance between an vertical value and the mean vertical value (computed as the square root of the variance). Average vertical value as calculated by the Time-Average Filter. Minimum and maximum horizontal values in the statistic. Information about each statistic of a multiple-statistic panel is listed in the order in which the statistics appear in the panel.please inform us.cadfamily. Mean vertical value as calculated by the Average Filter.

com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. The following table lists the information provided by this operation. Threshold value of any associated SLA report. Start time of the simulation Number of graphs in the panel.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.please inform us.cadfamily. Figure 3-92 Statistic Data Select “Statistic Data” from the pull-down menu. Enumerated. Information about each statistic of a multiple-statistic panel is listed in the order in which the statistics appear in the panel.if tort to your rights.0 . Vertical label of the statistic.3—Project Editor Statistic Data The Statistic Data operation displays information about all statistics in the panel. Statistic name.com The document is for study only. Name of SLA report associated with statistic Object associated with statistic. Number of statistics in the panel. ER-3-268 www. Summary or Standard. The information given applies only to the portion of a statistic that falls within the horizontal range of the panel (though entries immediately preceding and immediately following the range may be included as well). Table 3-53 Statistic Data Labels Label start date start time zone_count trace_count horizontal vertical report object statistic vector type threshold Description Start date of the simulation. Horizontal label of the panel.

com The document is for study only. In either case. Modeler/Release 14.if tort to your rights. <unlabeled> End of Table 3-53 Build Statistic The Build Statistic operation generates new statistics from ASCII data in the Statistic Data edit pad. The data must be in the same format used by the Statistic Data operation to display statistic information.we will delete ER-3-269 . Horizontal and vertical values of each entry.cadfamily. as shown in Figure 3-93. • New data created externally and loaded into the edit pad using the Read File operation. Build Statistic converts the ASCII data into vectors that can be plotted.3—Project Editor Table 3-53 Statistic Data Labels (Continued) Label time units length number of values Description Time units of simulation.please inform us.0 www. This data can come from either of two sources: • Existing statistic data displayed in the edit pad and modified there. Number of entries in the statistic (including the end-of-statistic entry).com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Number of entries with values in the statistic (excluding entries with undefined values and the end-of-statistic entry).

• Load a file containing predefined statistic data using the copy and paste text edit area operations (as described in Text Edit Pads on page ER-1-9). 3 Create new statistic data in one or both of the following ways: • Modify the existing statistic data by entering new values or changing existing values in the edit pad.please inform us. ➥ The Statistic Data display appears in the dialog box.com The document is for study only. ➥ The Statistic Information dialog box appears. This requires that the ASCII input contain multiple sets of data. Be sure any ASCII text files created outside of Modeler match the format used by the Statistic Data display.cadfamily.if tort to your rights. Procedure 3-121 Building a Statistic 1 Right-click in an existing panel.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. one for each statistic. whereas length includes both of these. 2 Choose Statistic Data from the pull-down menu (the default selection is General Statistic Info).we will delete Modeler/Release 14.3—Project Editor Figure 3-93 Analysis Panel and Equivalent Textual Representation Number of values does not include undefined entries or end-of-statistic marker. The Build Statistic operation can generate panels with several statistics.0 . The data for each statistic must be separated from that of the next statistic by an end-of-statistic entry (end). then select Show Statistics Data from the pop-up menu. ER-3-270 www. The data for the last statistic must also end this way.

cadfamily. Modeler/Release 14.0 www.com The document is for study only. click the Build Statistic button. ➥ The new statistic is built.if tort to your rights. open an analysis panel and configure it the way you want the annotation to appear. An advantage of panel annotations is that they appear when you print your topology or export it to bitmaps and web reports. starting from 0. hours.3—Project Editor 4 When the new statistic data is complete. • Date/Time—is used when a start date and time have been provided through the Configure/Run DES dialog box. You can use these objects to display simulation results directly in the Project Editor (rather than in a separate window). ➥ The panel is created showing the new statistic. • Auto-Scale—the default. Analysis Panel Annotation Objects You can create “analysis panel” annotation objects in the Project Editor. whichever is most appropriate to the length of the simulation. minutes. End of Procedure 3-121 Time Axis The Time Axis label menu has three available styles of axis label: • Seconds—writes the number of simulation seconds along the horizontal axis. 5 Select an area for the new panel in the tool window. You can also create an annotation by double-clicking in the panel background. labels the horizontal axis in seconds. See Configure/Run Discrete Event Simulation on page ER-3-213. Then right-click in the panel background and choose Make Panel Annotation in Network.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.please inform us. Creating Analysis Panel Annotations To create a panel annotation. The guidance display prompts you to select a location for the new panel.we will delete ER-3-271 . or days.

Either action opens the original analysis panel.com The document is for study only. choose DES > Panel Operations > Panel Annotations > Delete All Panel Annotations.3—Project Editor When you create a panel annotation. Menu Operations To create annotation objects from all open analysis panels. the original analysis panel window disappears and the annotation displays simulation results as they appeared in the panel window. You can specify one of three settings: • Fixed size (default)—The annotation is fixed at the same size as the original panel window and retains its position in the Project Editor window (regardless of the view’s zoom level or location in the network). Right-click on an annotation to edit attributes. double-click on it or right-click and choose Open Analysis Panel. To remove all annotation objects from the network. Annotation View Properties You can set an annotation’s view properties by right-clicking on it. ER-3-272 www. the message PANEL OPEN appears in the annotation. double-click in the panel background (or right-click and choose Make Panel Annotation in Network).if tort to your rights.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. After you edit the panel. choose DES > Panel Operations > Panel Annotations > Make Panels into Annotations.please inform us.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. or open the original analysis panel. set view properties. The window again disappears and the annotation displays the updated results. at the same time.cadfamily. Editing Panel Annotations To edit the graph and panel properties of an annotation. Figure 3-94 Analysis Panel Annotation Object The annotation shows simulation results and panel/graph properties as they appeared in the original window.0 .

• Thumbnail—The annotation is reduced to a small fixed-size icon.cadfamily.please inform us. application traffic and other types of explicit traffic are not considered. Thumbnail icons are useful for creating “placeholders” to objects for which you want to view results. Link peak usage reports are accessible from a link’s object pop-up menu. and by staying “pinned” to a particular network object when you scroll or move to a different subnetwork). Link peak usage reports consider the traffic from traffic flows. Like the resizable annotation. By default.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. To enable report creation for discrete event simulation. Figure 3-95 Link Peak Usage Report Modeler/Release 14. rather than the Project Editor window. a thumbnail annotation is pinned to a specific location in the network. Link Peak Usage Reports Link peak usage reports let you view utilization and throughput information for a link.3—Project Editor • Resizable—The annotation is initially the original panel size but can be manually resized.com The document is for study only. A resizable annotation has a fixed position in the network. the annotation responds to changes in the view (by resizing in response to changes in the zoom level. and PVCs.if tort to your rights. and then simply click on the thumbnail to open the a panel and view results for that object. this attribute is disabled. Link peak usage reports show you the highest utilization attained on the link during a flow analysis or discrete event simulation. Two menu options are available: one for flow analysis results another for discrete event simulation results.0 www. which appears when you right-click on the link. You can create a thumbnail icon next to a node or link. link loads. you need to set the Link Usage Report simulation attribute to Peak Usage For All Links.we will delete ER-3-273 . As a result.

4) Apply a moving average function to the PDF to get a smoother-looking function. Procedure 3-122 Viewing an Object Description 1 Right-click on an object and choose View <object> Description. or path). ➥ A description of the model assigned to the selected object displays in a text edit pad. or print the text.com The document is for study only.0 . ER-3-274 www. Figure 3-96 Node Description End of Procedure 3-122 Generate Distribution From Trace You can generate a PDF file from a statistic trace by selecting Generate Distribution From Trace in the Panel pop-up menu. See PDF Editor on page ER-13-1 for more information about PDFs.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Variations of the following algorithm are used to generate a PDF from a statistic: 1) Take the CDF of the statistic. You can then view or edit the generated file using the PDF editor.cadfamily. 3) Take the forward derivative at each data point to calculate the PDF.please inform us.if tort to your rights.3—Project Editor View <Object> Description This operation displays a text description of the model assigned to the selected object (node. write the text to a file. link.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. demand. 2) Resample the CDF function at regular intervals. You can select and copy the text from the edit pad in which it displays to another edit pad.

“Raw values” is the default. • PDF . • CDF . The default setting for this menu is set to the filter most recently applied to the statistic trace. You should change this setting only if you are certain that it is incorrect.3—Project Editor The PDF filter has two parameters: the sample count used in step 2 and the window (in points) of the moving–average function used in step 4. Procedure 3-123 Generating a PDF from a Statistic Trace 1 Select Generate Distribution From Trace from the Panel pop-up menu.please inform us.perform steps 2. The specific algorithm used to generate the PDF depends on which filter (if any) was applied to the statistic trace: • Raw Values .if tort to your rights.normalize each trace value and generate a PDF from these values. but has a total area of 1. Figure 3-97 Generate Probability Distribution Function Dialog Box The Interpret Values As pull-down menu determines which algorithm to use when generating the PDF. using a customized filter or writing out values as a histogram may result in an incorrect default. 3. ➥ The number of data points in the trace appears in the Number of data points field. The sample count is reset to 500 points. • PMF . for example. • histogram. The resulting PDF is a series of impulses that corresponds to the original statistic trace.resample the PDF and perform step 4 of this algorithm.treat each trace point as an impulse with the same ordinate and abscissa values.we will delete ER-3-275 . Modeler/Release 14.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only.0 www.cadfamily. and 4 of this algorithm. If the trace uses unfiltered statistic data. ➥ The General Probability Distribution Function dialog box appears. This results in a PDF function that corresponds to the original histogram. perform the PDF-generation algorithm described previously.If the trace uses unfiltered statistic data. 2 Select the statistic trace for generating the PDF on the Statistic Trace pull-down menu at the top of the dialog box. Note—This setting is incorrect only in rare circumstances.

see the command Zoom Panel on page ER-3-3. If you magnified a region by choosing the Zoom In command from the workspace pop-up menu. Zoom In works with Zoom Out.please inform us. you may need to choose Zoom Out several times before the magnification approximates the original zoom level.if tort to your rights. As the statistic’s value changes throughout the course of the simulation. the animation shows the updated value in the graph. ER-3-276 www. on the Workspace pop-up menu.cadfamily. the default is 3. For more information about changing zoom levels in analysis panels.) End of Procedure 3-123 Zoom In This operation.0 . on the Workspace pop-up menu. which restores the area displayed before the Zoom In operation took place. Zoom Out This operation. even if an analysis panel is the active window.3—Project Editor 3 Enter the file name and number of data points for the generated PDF in the PDF file name and Number of sample points fields respectively. magnifies the area displayed in the editor window. each operation of the Zoom Out command restores the previous zoom level. If you chose the workspace Zoom In command multiple times. Zoom Out restores the view to the exact previous zoom level.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. Note—Zoom commands on the View and Workspace pop-up menus affect the network view. expands the area displayed in the editor window. If you magnified a region by choosing the Zoom to Rectangle command from the View menu. Zoom to Rectangle allows you to define the area to be magnified. 4 Set the number of data points used by the Smooth operation in the Smoothing Window Size (points) edit field. Note—Zoom In is not the same as Zoom to Rectangle. (See Smooth on page ER-13-8 for more information. Animation You can generate the following types of animation: • Statistic Animation shows a graph illustrating the value of a given statistic.com The document is for study only. The area magnified is pre-defined: the center portion of the current display is magnified. The default number of data points is 500. and then defined an arbitrary region.

see Chapter 1 Using the 2-D Animation Viewer on page AV-1-1. End of Procedure 3-124 Modeler/Release 14.cadfamily.3—Project Editor • Packet Flow Animation shows the network as it is represented in the scenario. indicating animation capture is activated for that statistic. if you are using the Wireless module. Procedure 3-124 Collecting Statistic Animation Data 1 Choose Results > Select Choose Results.we will delete ER-3-277 .com The document is for study only.0 www. you must collect that statistic. Each packet in the animation corresponds to a simulated packet in the simulation. 3 Right-click on the statistic to bring up the statistic pop-up menu. After turning on collection for the statistic. with packets traversing the links. This section explains how to set up an animation.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. • Node Animation shows how mobile sites move during a simulation. perform the following procedure to create the statistic’s animation. Statistic Animation To create an animation of a statistic. 4 Choose Record Statistic Animation from the statistic pop-up menu.please inform us. ➥ An A appears beside the checkmark in the checkbox. For information about viewing animations. 2 Select the desired statistic.if tort to your rights.

Each packet shown in such an animation represents a simulated packet. Node Animation If using the Wireless functionality. Alternatively. End of Procedure 3-125 To view animations. see Chapter 1 Using the 2-D Animation Viewer on page AV-1-1. ➥ When the scenario’s simulation is run. right-click in the scenario workspace and choose DES Animation for Subnet > Record Packet Flows from the Workspace pop-up menu. End of Procedure 3-126 To view animations. animation data is collected for node and subnet movements. Procedure 3-126 Collecting Node Movement Animations 1 Move to the subnet in the scenario that you want to see animated (moving up or down the subnet hierarchy as needed).3—Project Editor Packet Flow Animation While statistic animations show how one aspect of a scenario develops over time.if tort to your rights. Alternatively.please inform us. a packet flow animation shows a larger picture of how traffic moves in a network. To view how these mobile sites move during a simulation. 2 Choose DES > Record Node Movement Animation for Subnet.0 . see Chapter 1 Using the 2-D Animation Viewer on page AV-1-1.cadfamily.com The document is for study only.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. ER-3-278 www. animation data is collected for packet flows. ➥ When the scenario’s simulation is run. 2 Choose DES > Record Packet Flow Animation for Subnet. you can use node animation. you might have mobile nodes and subnets in your network.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Procedure 3-125 Collecting Packet Flow Animations 1 Move to the subnet in the scenario that you want to see animated (moving up or down the subnet hierarchy as needed). right-click in the scenario workspace and choose DES Animation for Subnet > Record Node Movements from the Workspace pop-up menu.

Modeler/Release 14. subnetwork and node objects both contain the “y position” attribute. • Advanced Edit Attributes opens the dialog box with all of the object’s attributes (both primary and secondary) visible.we will delete ER-3-279 . • Edit Attributes opens the object’s Attributes dialog box with the primary attributes visible. You can even apply changes to different types of objects. they must contain the same attributes.3—Project Editor Setting Attribute Values You can set attribute values for one object or for several objects at once. you might set its value in any of several ways. summon a secondary dialog box.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. you can change the list of attributes displayed by selecting or deselecting the Advanced checkbox. You set an object’s attribute values through its Attributes dialog box. select a value from a pull-down menu. Methods of setting attribute values are identified with the corresponding attribute discussions throughout this manual. The editing method may require text editing or selection from a pull-down menu. For example. From either version of the dialog box. Setting Attribute Values for One Object To set the value of an attribute on a single object. Procedure 3-127 Setting Attribute Values for One Object 1 Move the cursor over the desired object and choose Edit Attributes or Advanced Edit Attributes from the Object pop-up menu. Changes made to this attribute in one object can be applied to the other (to align them in the workspace.please inform us. Depending on the attribute.com The document is for study only. for example). use the following procedure. or select from a palette.cadfamily. you might type a value into a text entry area. however. 2 Set an attribute value by clicking in the appropriate cell in the Value column. For example.if tort to your rights.0 www.

In each case. one attribute at a time. However.3—Project Editor 3 Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog box. Modeler begins by noting every change to the one object whose attributes you are setting.cadfamily. • Using the “Apply Changes to Selected Objects” Method on page ER-3-280 • Using the “Edit Selected Objects” Method on page ER-3-283 • Using the “Edit Similar <Nodes/Links>” Method on page ER-3-283 • Using the Attribute Template Method on page ER-3-284 Using the “Apply Changes to Selected Objects” Method With this method.please inform us. you manually select every object to be changed. the new value must be within the range of allowed values for the selected object’s attribute. Note—If some of the attribute changes fail. ER-3-280 www. There are several alternate methods for quickly changing attributes on many objects. • The new attribute value must pass all rules governing attribute values. the change is applied if all of the following criteria are met: • The attributes being set must have the same name and type.if tort to your rights. and specify that the changes be applied to all selected objects. The changes are applied to the corresponding attributes of every selected object. For example.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. specify the changes for one object. For a few attributes. It then tries to make corresponding changes to every selected object. such as the requirement for unique node names within a subnet. • The new attribute value must agree with the attribute properties of the attribute in the selected object. When applying attribute changes to several objects. There are no warning for any failed attribute value changes. you could make these changes individually using Procedure 3-127. open the Attributes dialog box of a selected object to verify the changes. individually changing the attributes can be tedious and error-prone for large numbers of objects. Modeler changes only those attributes that passed the preceding tests. If necessary.com The document is for study only. End of Procedure 3-127 Setting Attribute Values for Many Objects You might need to set values for the same attributes on several objects in a network model.0 .

as described in Select Objects on page ER-2-45. To edit only specific sub-attributes. WARNING—If you change a sub-attribute of a compound attribute.cadfamily. see Extended Attributes on page MC-4-31. but not on a selected object.com The document is for study only. depending on the Auto.3—Project Editor Additional rules apply when extended attributes are involved: • Any extended attribute deleted from the object being set is deleted from all selected objects. For more information on extended attributes. ➥ Selection markers appear around the objects. that value is removed and either promoted or replaced with its default value.0 www. You can select the objects manually or automatically.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.if tort to your rights. the entire compound attribute value will replace the corresponding compound attributes on the selected objects. — If a property change causes a previously-set value to become invalid. • Any extended attribute appearing on both the object being set and a selected object is retained on both. Procedure 3-128 Setting Attribute Values for Many Objects 1 Select the objects whose attribute values will be set. Assign Value setting of the extended attribute.we will delete ER-3-281 . This can produce unwanted changes in other sub-attributes of the compound attribute. is added to the selected object. Modeler/Release 14. see the procedure Using the Attribute Template Method on page ER-3-284.please inform us. If the properties of such an extended attribute are changed. • Any extended attribute appearing on the object being set. the following additional rules apply: — Any changes to the properties of an extended attribute in the object being set are also made to the selected object.

the objects all move to the same y position.3—Project Editor 2 Open an object’s Attributes dialog box.com The document is for study only. 3 Set the desired attribute values.if tort to your rights.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. In this example.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. End of Procedure 3-128 ER-3-282 www. 4 Select the Apply Changes to Selected Objects checkbox. because changes always apply to the object whose Attributes dialog box is open.cadfamily. then click OK.0 .please inform us. ➥ The Attributes dialog box closes and the attributes of the selected objects are updated. This object does not have to be selected.

displaying all the attributes that the selected objects have in common.0 www. Procedure 3-129 Setting Attribute Values on Selected Objects 1 Select the objects whose attributes you want to change. 2 Change the attribute values as appropriate. End of Procedure 3-130 Modeler/Release 14. ➥ The Attributes dialog box opens. End of Procedure 3-129 Using the “Edit Similar <Nodes/Links>” Method This method is similar to the Edit Selected Objects method except that it automatically selects the set of objects to consider.3—Project Editor Using the “Edit Selected Objects” Method This method provides an alternate way to edit the attributes of several objects at once. ➥ The object attributes are updated appropriately. 4 Click OK. Procedure 3-130 Setting Attribute Values on Similar Objects 1 Right-click on an object in the workspace and choose Edit Similar Nodes/Links from the Object pop-up menu.please inform us. ➥ The Objects Attributes dialog box opens. Modeler identifies the attributes that the objects to be edited have in common and creates a table of the common attributes. displaying all the attributes of all the objects with the same “model” attribute as the selected object.com The document is for study only. 3 Click OK. 3 Change the attribute values in the Objects Attributes dialog box.cadfamily. 2 Right-click in the workspace and choose Edit Selected Objects. You can then edit the attribute values as needed.if tort to your rights. ➥ The object attributes are updated. based on the value of their “model” attribute.we will delete ER-3-283 . They do not have to be the same type of objects.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.

pull-down lists.please inform us.3—Project Editor Using the Attribute Template Method This method generates an editable table of attribute values based on a user-defined attribute template (for an example. you can change the attribute values quickly and easily.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.com The document is for study only. 5 Edit the attributes as needed. 3 Set the “Include only selected objects in report” and “Ignore views” checkboxes to control which objects will be included in the attribute table. for all or only certain objects. and so on).if tort to your rights. Copy and Paste Mode You can copy an attribute value and paste it to one or more similar attributes.cadfamily. Figure 3-98 Edit Objects by Template Dialog Box Procedure 3-131 Setting Attribute Values by Template 1 Choose Edit > Edit Objects Using Template. define a template as described in Procedure 3-132. ➥ The Edit Attribute Template dialog box appears. If you want to define a custom template. then begin this procedure again. Because the table is limited to a set of interesting attributes in the network. ER-3-284 www. 4 Click Generate. This mode disables the standard methods for changing attribute values (edit fields.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. There are two editing modes: Standard Mode You can click on any attribute value and edit it as you would in the Attributes dialog box (see Procedure 3-127 Setting Attribute Values for One Object on page ER-3-279). see Figure 3-98). ➥ The Edit Objects by Template dialog box appears. click Close.0 . 2 Select an attribute template from which to generate an attribute table. The default settings will include all objects in the network.

a specific type of network object. • View a real-time table of selected attribute values For more information.1 Select the Copy and Paste Mode checkbox. 5. see Using the Attribute Template Method on page ER-3-284. and has a name that identifies it. 5. • Object types to include—A table can include all network objects.if tort to your rights. Modeler/Release 14. To define a new attribute template or edit an existing one. An attribute template specifies the following information about an attribute table: • Table category and name—Every attribute table belongs to a category.) 6 When you are finished editing attribute values.0 www. or objects selected by custom criteria that you specify. These attribute tables are used when you: • Edit attribute values for multiple objects For more information. see User-Defined Reports on page MC-16-18.2 Select an attribute value and press Ctrl+C.3—Project Editor 5. follow Procedure 3-132. click OK to make the changes.com The document is for study only. see User-Defined Reports on page MC-16-18.we will delete ER-3-285 . End of Procedure 3-131 Defining an Attribute Template Attribute templates are used to generate tables of specific attribute values for one or more objects in a network.cadfamily.3 Select the attribute value or a range of contiguous values and press Ctrl+V.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. (You can paste only into the same attribute column that you copied from.please inform us. • Create custom reports of attribute values for screen or web viewing For more information. • Attributes to include—Each row of an attribute template specifies the title and contents of a column that will appear in the attribute table. such as “IP” or “Application”.

if tort to your rights. (You will specify these names when you save the template. 3. Each table row in this dialog box corresponds to an attribute column in tables generated from this template. 4 Choose the attributes to include in table columns. At first.) • To edit an existing template. you must close the Define Attribute Template dialog box and return to Step 1 to make your criterion appear in the Logical selection pull-down menu.cadfamily. Note—If you define a new selection criterion. ➥ The Define Attribute Template dialog box appears. 2 Choose whether to define a new template or edit an existing one: • To define a new template. you can double-click the Column Value field. leave the category and table names set to “unnamed”.0 . see Editing an Attribute Table Column on page ER-3-287 for details. (Alternatively. • To edit a column definition. select the desired attribute row and click Duplicate. • To add a new column based on an existing one.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.com The document is for study only. 3 Choose the object types to include in the table.3—Project Editor Procedure 3-132 Defining or Editing an Attribute Template 1 Choose Edit > Edit Attribute Template. 3. click New. • To add a new undefined column. ER-3-286 www. select a row and click Edit.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.please inform us. You can use one of the predefined criteria or create your own (as described in Select Objects on page ER-2-45).2 If you selected “Objects in logical selection”. the only column defined is for an object name. use the Logical selection pull-down menu to specify a selection criterion. select its category and name from the pull-down menus.1 Select an object type from the Include pull-down menu.) This opens a dialog box for specifying the contents and format of the table column.

please inform us. you can either keep the original category and table names (to replace the original template) or change the table name (to create a new version of the original).cadfamily. Modeler/Release 14. A drilldown is a child table that you open by following a link in the parent table. respectively). you might want to create a drilldown table for IP port attributes on a router. 5 Click Save As. Follow Procedure 3-133 to edit the definition of an attribute table column. • If editing a template. End of Procedure 3-132 Editing an Attribute Table Column Use the User Report Column Definition dialog box (Figure 3-99) to specify the contents and appearance of a column in an attribute tables.com The document is for study only.0 www. select an attribute row and click Move Up or Move Down (thus moving the resulting table column left or right. The dialog box lets you pick an attribute from a list of available attributes. click Preview.3—Project Editor • To delete a column. enter names for the category and table. The category can be one of the existing categories or a new one. This operation creates a drilldown table definition. select its row and click Delete.if tort to your rights. To edit the drilldown table. select the row and click Edit. New templates are saved in your default model directory. • If defining a new template.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. ➥ The template is saved with the extension .urep. • To add a drilldown. You can assign a column title and specify how the attribute value should be shown.we will delete ER-3-287 .xml. edited templates are saved in the same directory as the original template. 6 Click Cancel to close the dialog box. • To see what the generated table will look like. Drilldowns are useful when you want to show a set of related attributes in a separate window. which is initially equivalent to the current table definition. For example. select a row and click Add Drilldown. You can also move attributes around to modify the appearance of tables generated from the template: • To change the sequence of attributes.

The options are: • By example using object—The Example treeview lists all objects in the current scenario. 2 In the Example treeview. ER-3-288 www.0 .we will delete Modeler/Release 14. top.cadfamily. including all parent objects (for example. • By example using model—The Example treeview lists all models in the model directories (specified by the mod_dirs preference). ➥ The Attributes treeview displays a list of all attributes for the selected object or model.please inform us.) 5 Use the Column value pull-down menu to specify the contents of each table cell in the resulting column.3—Project Editor Figure 3-99 Define User Report Column Dialog Box Procedure 3-133 Editing an Attribute Table Column Definition 1 Use the Specify attribute pull-down menu to specify how to view the available an attributes.if tort to your rights.node_3). enter a title for the table column. Note—Full hierarchical name applies only to an object.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. 4 In the Column title field. The options are: • Full hierarchical name—The object name. (Typically.subnet_1. the title is a version of the attribute name. 3 Select an attribute in the Attributes treeview. select an object or model that contains the attributes you want to view.com The document is for study only. so attribute selection is disabled when you select this option.

otherwise. Note—Simple name applies only to an object.0 www. and so on). so attribute selection is disabled when you select this option. duration.3—Project Editor • Simple name—The object name (for example.” You could then select the IP address sub-attributes for the three compound attributes. the next step is to configure and run a simulation.please inform us. The options are: • As symbol or value—If the model uses a symbol map for the attribute. If you select this option. Every scenario has an associated simulation sequence. node_3). For example.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. At its simplest. As the simulation runs. This option is useful when you want to show related attributes in the same column. containing one or more simulation sets. you could create a column called “IP Address. you must also select something from the Index variable pull-down menu. depending on the attribute values (or range of values) assigned to it. physical interfaces. 7 Click OK to accept the column definition and return to the Define Attribute Template dialog box. Each interface attribute includes a sub-attribute that specifies the IP address. Using this option.com The document is for study only. the statistics and animation data you requested are collected. physical interfaces.cadfamily. and subinterfaces. a simulation sequence contains one simulation set representing a single simulation run. and subinterfaces). and a set of simulation attribute values (seed. you should next select some additional attributes in the Attributes treeview. 6 Use the Display attribute pull-down menu to specify how to show the attribute value. Modeler/Release 14. execution preferences. A simulation set is a specific configuration for a simulation.we will delete ER-3-289 . A simulation set can represent one or more simulation runs. This option is useful if a model can contain multiple instances of an attribute. • Index variable value—The index value of the attribute. the “IP Address” column would show the addresses for loopbacks. End of Procedure 3-133 Discrete Event Simulation After you set up a scenario and specify the statistics and animations you want to collect. the attribute value is displayed.if tort to your rights. • Parallel attribute values—The current value of one or more similar attributes. a router model might contain compound attributes for three types of interfaces (loopbacks. the symbol is displayed when appropriate. statistics to be collected. global and object attribute values. • Attribute value—The current value of the attribute. • As actual value—The attribute value is always displayed. In the resulting table. specifying a network model. If you select this option.

please inform us. The detailed dialog box presents a full set of controls and lets you configure multiple runs for a simulation set.0 .configuration_mode preference is detailed. the simulation is opened automatically in a higher mode. a simulation configured with multiple runs opens in the detailed Configure/Run DES dialog box. You can use these default values or set them yourself prior to running a simulation. by clicking a button in the Configure/Run DES dialog box. If a simulation was previously configured in a higher mode and its configuration is incompatible with the current configuration mode. You can temporarily switch between the simple and detailed modes. The simple Configure/Run DES dialog box presents a reduced set of controls for configuring a simulation. The Simulation Sequence Editor gives you full control over all simulation sets in the sequence.3—Project Editor Configuring a Simulation The Configure/Run Discrete Event Simulation operations let you set the values of simulation attributes and control how a simulation runs. even if the configuration mode is “simple”. Initially. ER-3-290 www. • If the preference value is “advanced”.configuration_mode preference.if tort to your rights. it lets you configure only one simulation run at a time. all simulation parameters (such as duration and random number seed) are set to default values by the scenario.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. The default value of the des.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. the method used depends on the value of the des. the Simulation Sequence Editor opens.cadfamily. When you first open a simulation sequence. a simple or detailed version of the Configure/Run DES dialog box appears.com The document is for study only. as follows: • If the preference value is “simple” or “detailed”. There are three ways to configure a simulation. letting you edit each one and select which simulation runs to execute. For example. or from the detailed to advanced mode.

3—Project Editor Table 3-54 lists the maximum configuration allowed for each configuration mode.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. 3 If you need to set values for additional attributes. 4 Click Apply to save the configuration changes.com The document is for study only.we will delete ER-3-291 .) End of Procedure 3-134 Modeler/Release 14. • Simple mode – Procedure 3-134 • Detailed mode – Procedure 3-135 • Advanced mode – Procedure 3-136 Procedure 3-134 Configuring a Discrete Event Simulation in Simple Mode 1 Choose DES > Configure/Run Discrete Event Simulation… ➥ The simple Configure/Run DES dialog box opens. Table 3-54 Simulation Sequence Limits for Using Configuration Modes The Simulation Sequence Must Contain No More Than: 1 simulation set with 1 simulation run (the run must be enabled for execution) 1 simulation set (any number of runs. all runs must be enabled for execution) <no limits> To Use This Configuration Mode: simple detailed advanced End of Table 3-54 Follow one of these procedures to configure a simulation. Note—Click the Help button in the dialog box for a description of the dialog box controls. Changes affect only the current scenario. See Configure/Run DES Dialog Box (Simple) on page ER-3-293 for a description of this dialog box. click Run.please inform us. 2 Set the “Duration” and “Values per statistic” attributes to the desired values.if tort to your rights. select the desired page and set the necessary values. (To save changes and immediately run the simulation.0 www.cadfamily.

2 Set the Common page attributes to the desired values.) End of Procedure 3-135 Procedure 3-136 Configuring a Discrete Event Simulation in Advanced Mode 1 Choose DES > Configure/Run Discrete Event Simulation… Note—If the des.0 . 4 If you need to set values for additional attributes.configuration_mode preference is not set to Advanced. ➥ The Simulation Set dialog box (an enhanced version of the detailed Configure/Run DES dialog box) opens. select the desired page in the treeview and set the necessary values.com The document is for study only. (To save changes and immediately run the simulation. 4 Click Apply to save the configuration changes.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. Note—Click the Help button in the dialog box for a description of the dialog box controls. ER-3-292 www. 3 If you need to set values for additional attributes. 2 Right-click on the simulation set you want to edit and choose Edit Attributes from the pop-up menu. 5 Click OK to save the configuration changes. Changes affect all runs in the current scenario only. Note—Click the Help button in the dialog box for a description of the dialog box controls. repeat steps 2–5 to edit other simulation sets.cadfamily.please inform us.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.if tort to your rights. ➥ The Simulation Sequence Editor opens. 6 If desired. choose DES > Configure/Run Discrete Event Simulation (Advanced). click Run. See Configure/Run DES Dialog Box (Detailed) on page ER-3-294 for a description of this dialog box.3—Project Editor Procedure 3-135 Configuring a Discrete Event Simulation in Detailed Mode 1 Choose DES > Configure/Run Discrete Event Simulation… ➥ The detailed Configure/Run DES dialog box opens. See Configure/Run DES Dialog Box (Detailed) on page ER-3-294 for a description of this dialog box. select the desired page in the treeview and set the necessary values. 3 Set the Common page attributes to the desired values.

if tort to your rights. presents a reduced set of controls to simplify configuration and execution of discrete event simulations.we will delete ER-3-293 . Only single simulation runs are supported.please inform us. which appears when the DES configuration mode is set to “simple”.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Figure 3-100 Configure/Run DES Dialog Box (Simple) Modeler/Release 14. End of Procedure 3-136 Configure/Run DES Dialog Box (Simple) The Configure/Run DES dialog box lets you configure and run a discrete event simulation for the current scenario.cadfamily.com The document is for study only.3—Project Editor See Chapter 16 Simulation Sequence Editor on page ER-16-1 for information about creating additional simulation sets or selecting runs for simulation.0 www. The simple version of the dialog box (Figure 3-100).

as described in Configure/Run DES Dialog Box (Detailed) on page ER-3-294. Cancel button—Closes the dialog box without saving any changed settings. In this context.please inform us. Both single and multiple runs are supported.com The document is for study only. Running a simulation from here opens the Simulation Execution Dialog Box. The following table lists the controls in this dialog box.0 . closes the dialog box. Reports page Dialog box controls Detailed… button—Switches temporarily to detailed mode and the detailed Configure/Run DES dialog box.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. Apply button—Saves the current settings and keeps the dialog box open. Reports are predefined sets of statistic probes. slightly modified. ER-3-294 www. and runs the simulation. This value sets the “duration” simulation preference. seen in Detailed mode.if tort to your rights. Use this page to select Statistic reports and Service Level Agreement (SLA) reports for the simulation. seen in Detailed mode. which appears when the DES configuration mode is set to “detailed”. This value sets the “num_collect_values” simulation preference. to edit simulation set attributes in the advanced configuration mode. Values per statistic field—Sets the maximum number of values collected for each statistic. End of Table 3-55 Configure/Run DES Dialog Box (Detailed) The Configure/Run DES dialog box lets you configure and run a discrete event simulation for the current scenario. Table 3-55 Element Basic controls Controls in the Configure/Run DES Dialog Box (Simple) Description Duration field—Sets the duration of the simulation. (This button does not change the des. Note—The Simulation Sequence Editor uses this dialog box.3—Project Editor The simple Configure/Run DES dialog box has two pages of controls. Help button—Opens a help file for the dialog box.) Run button—Saves the current settings.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. These controls are organized by type and can be selected by clicking the corresponding tab. Global Attributes page Use this page to define the values of global simulation attributes. except that you cannot set multiple values for an attribute or automatically reset the default value. Specify units with the pull-down menu following this field. presents a full set of controls for configuration and execution of discrete event simulations. it is called the Simulation Set dialog box.cadfamily. The detailed version of this dialog box.configuration_mode preference. This page is identical to the Reports page—Used to specify statistics and service level agreement reports to be collected during a simulation. This page is similar to the Global Attributes page—Used to define the values of global simulation attributes for the simulation.

3—Project Editor Figure 3-101 Configure/Run DES Dialog Box (Detailed) The detailed Configure/Run DES dialog box has multiple pages of controls.com The document is for study only.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Basic controls for a discrete event simulation appear on the Common page (shown in Figure 3-101).we will delete ER-3-295 . These controls are organized by type and can be selected from the treeview in the left-hand pane.0 www.cadfamily. Click the Help button in the Configure/Run DES dialog box for details about each page.please inform us.if tort to your rights. The remaining control pages are described in the following topics: • Configure/Run DES Dialog Box (Detailed)—Input Controls on page ER-3-296 • Configure/Run DES Dialog Box (Detailed)—Output Controls on page ER-3-297 • Configure/Run DES Dialog Box (Detailed)—Execution Controls on page ER-3-298 • Configure/Run DES Dialog Box (Detailed)—Runtime Display Controls on page ER-3-298 Modeler/Release 14.

including multiple values for parametric studies. Table 3-56 Description These controls are available in both Detailed and Advanced modes: • Preview Simulation Sequence button—Opens a window showing the simulation invocation. and runs the simulation. Simple mode is available only when the simulation sequence has a single simulation set with a single selected run. • Number of runs label—Shows the number of simulation runs to be executed. (This button does not change the des. (This button does not change the des.) End of Table 3-56 Shared Controls in the Configure/Run DES Dialog Box (Detailed) Configure/Run DES Dialog Box (Detailed)—Input Controls The input control pages let you configure various inputs to a discrete event simulation. and any varying attribute values that will be used for the simulation runs being configured. If all have a single value. The total number of runs is equal to the product of the number of values for each. Advanced mode lets you create additional simulation sets and choose a subset of runs within a set for execution.configuration_mode preference. The global attribute table displays names and assigned values of all simulation attributes declared by models involved in the scenario to be simulated. Click on the question mark in the first column of a row to see information about the attribute in that row. This button is available only in Advanced configuration mode: • OK button—Saves the current settings and closes the dialog box.cadfamily.) • Edit Simulation Sequence… button—Switches temporarily to advanced mode and the Simulation Sequence Editor.if tort to your rights.3—Project Editor The controls at the top and bottom of the detailed Configure/Run DES dialog box appear on every page. This number depends on the number of multiple seed values. ER-3-296 www.configuration_mode preference. These buttons are available only in Detailed configuration mode: • Simple… button—Switches temporarily to simple mode and the simple Configure/Run DES dialog box. (The simulation does not run. and traffic growth iterations. Running a simulation from here opens either the Simulation Progress Dialog Box (for single runs) or the DES Execution Manager (for multiple runs). as described in Configure/Run DES Dialog Box (Simple) on page ER-3-293. only one simulation run is executed.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.) • Run button—Saves the current settings. • Object Attributes page—Used to define the values of object attributes for the simulation. multiple attribute values.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. closes the dialog box. • Cancel button—Closes the dialog box without saving any changed settings. as described in Chapter 16 Simulation Sequence Editor on page ER-16-1. • Apply button—Saves the current settings and keeps the dialog box open. contents of the environment file.com The document is for study only. • Global Attributes page—Used to define the values of global simulation attributes for the simulation.0 .please inform us. Table 3-56 describes these shared controls. Click on an attribute value to edit the value. • Help button—Opens a help file for the dialog box.

please inform us. For more information about 3D animation. you can evaluate when service level agreements (SLAs) might start to fail by setting traffic growth on this page and selecting one or more SLA reports on the Reports page. You also can define new reports and specify whether or not web reports should be generated automatically when the simulation is complete.if tort to your rights. • Terrain Modeling page—Use this page in conjunction with the Wireless and Terrain Modeling functionality to configure the use of terrain data in path-loss calculations. You can select one or more of these reports.3—Project Editor The object attribute table displays all promoted network-object attributes that have values assigned to them. The Reports page displays lists of all defined statistics reports and SLAs. For example. see Animation on page ER-3-276. 3D representations require 3DNV functionality and an available 3D Sim license. Click on an attribute value to edit the value.we will delete ER-3-297 . which cause the simulation to collect data for the reports.com The document is for study only. Each selected value is added to the “ef” simulation preference. • Traffic Growth page—Used to define a set of simulations with increasing traffic levels in each simulation. • Environment Files page—Used to choose the set of environment (. see Animation Viewers. For details about 2D animation. Environment files are text files used to set simulation options or values for promoted attributes. Click on the question mark in the first column of a row to see information about the attribute in that row. • Reports page—Used to specify statistics and service level agreement reports to be collected during a simulation.cadfamily. Traffic growth is useful for predicting network behavior as traffic increases over time. See Global Packet Statistics on page ER-3-325 for details.0 www. • Global Packet Statistics page—Used to set options for collecting statistics on packets generated by the simulation.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. This page displays a list of all environment files found in the directories specified by the mod_dirs preference.ef) files to be parsed by the simulation. Modeler/Release 14. • Animation: 3D page—Used to set options for generating a three-dimensional (3D) representation of some network elements. Configure/Run DES Dialog Box (Detailed)—Output Controls The output control pages let you configure various outputs of a discrete event simulation. See Types of Traffic Growth on page ER-3-299 for more information. • Animation: 2D page—Used to set options for displaying and saving two-dimensional (2D) animation generated by the simulation. because you do not need to duplicate a scenario or manually scale network traffic.

com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only. ER-3-298 www. • OPNET Debugger page—Used to configure the OPNET Debugger.if tort to your rights. • Checkpoint page—Used to control generation of run-time checkpoints (Linux only). Configure/Run DES Dialog Box (Detailed)—Execution Controls The execution control pages let you configure the behavior of a discrete event simulation.0 . • Advanced: Compilation page—Used to review and modify the global compilation preferences. • Advanced: Linking page—Used to review and modify the global linking preferences.cadfamily. For details about using checkpoints to restart discrete event simulations. • Troubleshooting page—Used to control various execution preferences to help troubleshoot execution problems.3—Project Editor • Statistics Collection page—Used to define a time window for collecting statistics and to specify how statistics are saved by the simulation. • Advanced: Kernel Reports page—Used to select simulation kernel reports to be generated for the simulation. • Logging page—Use this page to enable and configure the discrete event simulation log. • Profiling page—Used to control generation of run-time profiling information. • Advanced: Application page—Used to configure the simulation program used to execute the simulation. • Memory Usage page—Used to control what memory usage information is available in the Simulation Progress dialog box.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. Configure/Run DES Dialog Box (Detailed)—Runtime Display Controls The runtime display control pages let you configure the information displayed during execution of a discrete event simulation.please inform us. see Checkpoints on page ER-3-317. • Advanced: Kernel Type page—Used to choose a simulation kernel to be used with the simulation. • Other Displays page—Used to control what information is displayed in the Simulation Progress dialog box. • Advanced: Kernel Preferences page—Used to configure the behavior of the simulation kernel.

com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. choose one of the following menu items in the Project Editor: • DES > Configure/Run Discrete Event Simulation • DES > Run Discrete Event Simulation • Scenarios > Manage Scenarios Modeler/Release 14.if tort to your rights.com The document is for study only. Compound traffic growth is calculated using the following formula: Traffic Level (%) (current sim) = ( = Growth Rate (%) (current sim) × Traffic Level (%) (previous sim) ) + Traffic Level (%) (previous sim) • Simple traffic growth by table – Increments traffic from the baseline by the percentages specified in the growth rate table. Simple traffic growth is calculated using the following formula: Traffic Level (%) (current sim) Growth Rate (%) (current sim) + Traffic Level (%) (previous sim) • Compound traffic growth by table – Increments traffic from the baseline in a compound manner by the percentages specified in the growth rate table. and explicit traffic) is scaled according to the specified growth rate. baseline load traffic.3—Project Editor Types of Traffic Growth The types of traffic growth available are as follows: • Simple traffic growth – Increments traffic from the baseline by the percentage specified with the “Use growth rate of <x>% per iteration” checkbox (the growth rate table is not editable for this type of traffic growth).cadfamily.0 www. Simple traffic growth is calculated using the following formula: Traffic Level (%) (current sim) = Growth Rate (%) (current sim) + Traffic Level (%) (previous sim) • Compound traffic growth – Increments traffic from the baseline in a compound manner by the percentage specified with the “Use growth rate of <x>% per iteration” checkbox (the growth rate table is not editable for this type of traffic growth). Compound traffic growth is calculated using the following formula: Traffic Level (%) (current sim) = ( Growth Rate (%) (current sim) × Traffic Level (%) (previous sim) ) + Traffic Level (%) (previous sim) Note—ALL traffic in the entire scenario (including conversation pair traffic.we will delete ER-3-299 .please inform us. Running a Simulation To run a discrete event simulation.

please inform us. click Close to close the dialog box. Note—If your network model uses custom or customized process models.0 .we will delete Modeler/Release 14. 2 Choose Scenarios > Manage Scenarios. Simulating the Current Scenario Typically.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. you must disable the use of repositories before running the simulation. This is particularly useful when you plan to compare results for several scenarios. Both display a series of messages that show the progress of the simulation. ER-3-300 www. 3 When the simulation is finished. choose DES > Run Discrete Event Simulation or press Ctrl+Shift+R. you will want to run a simulation of the current scenario.cadfamily. beginning with the initialization stages and continuing with run-time statistics. resume. End of Procedure 3-137 Simulating Multiple Scenarios You can run simulations for the project as a whole rather than for individual scenarios. configure the simulation as described in Configuring a Simulation on page ER-3-290. or stop the simulation at any time. Procedure 3-138 Running Simulations for All Scenarios in a Project 1 If necessary. You can pause. See Monitoring Simulation Progress on page ER-3-301 for descriptions of the Simulation Execution and Simulation Progress dialog boxes. click the Run button. click the Apply button to save the changes.com The document is for study only. After making the desired changes. configure the simulation as described in Configuring a Simulation on page ER-3-290. • If the Configure/Run DES dialog box is closed. ➥ Depending on DES configuration mode.if tort to your rights. either the Simulation Execution or Simulation Progress dialog box opens.3—Project Editor The DES menu operations run simulations of the current scenario only. 2 Run the simulation using one of the following methods: • If the Configure/Run DES dialog box is open. followed by the Cancel button to close the dialog box. Procedure 3-137 Running a Simulation for One Scenario 1 If necessary. Do this by selecting the “Ignore ‘repositories’ preference value” on the Execution > Advanced > Application page of the detailed Configure/Run DES dialog box. The Manage Scenarios operation enables you to run simulations for any or all scenarios in the current project.

see Table 3-57 for details. click Close to close the dialog box. either the Simulation Execution or Simulation Progress dialog box opens for the first scenario. do the following: • Set the appropriate simulation duration (in seconds). the number of runs configured. Both display a series of messages that show the progress of the simulation. The specific dialog box that is opened (and thus the amount of information and control provided) depends on the current DES configuration mode. and whether the debugger (ODB) is active. or stop a single simulation or the entire sequence at any time. Additional scenarios are simulated sequentially in the order shown in the Manage Scenarios dialog box.3—Project Editor 3 For each scenario you want to simulate. ➥ Depending on DES configuration mode. beginning with the initialization stages and continuing with run-time statistics. 4 Click OK to close the Manage Scenarios dialog box. Modeler/Release 14.com The document is for study only. resume. End of Procedure 3-138 Monitoring Simulation Progress At the start of a discrete event simulation.cadfamily.if tort to your rights.we will delete ER-3-301 . Table 3-57 Simulation Monitoring Modes With… 1 run 1 run And ODB is… n/a 1 If the simulation was run from… Simple mode Detailed or Advanced mode Simulation progress is monitored in… Simulation Execution Dialog Box Simulation Progress Dialog Box Simulation Progress Dialog Box Simulation Execution dialog box (advanced) Simulation console (advanced) DES Execution Manager not used used multiple runs End of Table 3-57 n/a 1 1.0 www.please inform us. 5 When all simulations are finished. You can pause. See Monitoring Simulation Progress on page ER-3-301 for full descriptions of the Simulation Execution and Simulation Progress dialog boxes.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. • Select the scenario name and click the Collect Results button. OPNET Debugger (ODB) is disabled in simple mode or when there are multiple runs. a dialog box displays information about simulation progress and lets you control execution of the simulation.

as shown in the following figure.src dest address: <integer> * Desc: * Press <return> to select default: -1 Enter value: To avoid this interruption in the simulation process.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.cadfamily.if tort to your rights. prompts for undefined attributes appear on the command line. no dialog box appears. simulation speed. and memory usage.please inform us. Also. Simulation Execution Dialog Box The Simulation Execution dialog box (Figure 3-103) displays basic information about the progress of a discrete event simulation and lets you control execution of the simulation. The following example shows a typical command-line prompt: -.0 .com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.3—Project Editor Pauses for Prompting If there are any unresolved parameters from a discrete event simulation. ER-3-302 www. The Simulation Execution dialog box displays when you run a simulation in simple mode (des. Figure 3-102 Dialog Box for Unresolved Attributes If the attr_prompt_mode preference is set to “console”.e1.configuration_mode preference set to “simple”) or when you click the Run button in the simple Configure/Run DES dialog box (Configure/Run DES Dialog Box (Simple) on page ER-3-293). you should define values for all promoted object attributes before running a simulation. Instead.Unset Environment Attribute -* lan0. the simulation pauses and requests the necessary information. The displayed information includes elapsed time.com The document is for study only. if the simulation was run from the command line rather than from the graphical user interface. You can do this on the Object Attributes page of the Configure/Run DES dialog box. the prompt appears on the command line of the shell window from which Modeler was launched.

com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.if tort to your rights. see the following topics: • Simulation Speed Page on page ER-3-307 • Memory Usage Page on page ER-3-308 • Messages Page on page ER-3-310 You also can see descriptions of the information and controls by clicking the Help button in the Simulation Execution dialog box.com The document is for study only.0 www. Simulation Progress Dialog Box The Simulation Progress dialog box (Figure 3-104) displays detailed information about the progress of a discrete event simulation and lets you pause or stop execution of the simulation.please inform us.cadfamily. Modeler/Release 14. plus a variety of tabbed pages containing more detailed information.3—Project Editor Figure 3-103 Simulation Execution Dialog Box Discrete Event Simulation Statistics on page ER-3-305 summarizes the simulation information displayed in this dialog box. and memory usage).we will delete ER-3-303 . Discrete Event Simulation Controls on page ER-3-306 summarizes the controls. For information about the information panes. simulation speed. The displayed information includes the basic information found in the Simulation Execution dialog box (elapsed time.

For descriptions of these tabbed pages.3—Project Editor The Simulation Progress dialog box displays when you • Run a simulation in detailed or advanced mode (des.0 .com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.please inform us. Discrete Event Simulation Controls on page ER-3-306 summarizes the controls.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.com The document is for study only.configuration_mode preference set to “detailed” or “advanced”) • Click the Run button in the detailed Configure/Run DES dialog box (Configure/Run DES Dialog Box (Detailed) on page ER-3-294) • Click the View Details button in the DES Execution Manager dialog box (DES Execution Manager on page ER-3-316) Figure 3-104 Simulation Progress Dialog Box Discrete Event Simulation Statistics on page ER-3-305 summarizes the simulation information displayed in this dialog box. see the following topics: • Simulation Speed Page on page ER-3-307 • Live Stats Page on page ER-3-308 • Memory Usage Page on page ER-3-308 • Messages Page on page ER-3-310 • Memory Sources Page on page ER-3-310 • Memory Stats Page on page ER-3-312 ER-3-304 www. The Simulation Progress dialog box displays numerous pages of additional information about the simulation.cadfamily.if tort to your rights.

0 www. The following table lists the statistics presented in each update. You can also click the Update Progress Info button to view current statistics. Amount of real time used so far by the current simulation run. triggering some kind of response within the module.if tort to your rights. Estimated amount of real time until the current simulation is completed. Simulation progress Simulated Time Events Speed: Average Speed: Current End of Table 3-58 Modeler/Release 14.cadfamily. Discrete Event Simulation Statistics The information displayed in the Simulation Execution and Simulation Progress dialog boxes is updated at intervals of simulated time determined by the “Update interval” parameter on the Common page of the detailed Configure/Run DES dialog box.we will delete ER-3-305 . Table 3-58 Simulation Statistics Statistic Running Elapsed time Estimated remaining time Description Name of the scenario being simulated. Average number of simulation events per second of real time (measured since the beginning of the simulation). An event usually signifies the arrival of a packet or an interrupt at a module. Instantaneous number of simulation events per second (measured using real time over the last update interval).com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.3—Project Editor • Profiling Page on page ER-3-313 • Dependencies Page on page ER-3-314 • Invocation Page on page ER-3-315 You also can see descriptions of the information and controls by clicking the Help button in the Simulation Progress dialog box.please inform us.com The document is for study only. Total number of events processed so far. Current simulation time. Progress bar showing current simulation time as a fraction of total simulation duration.

The following table lists these controls in these dialog boxes. Table 3-59 Simulation Controls Description Update Progress Info button—Immediately updates the simulation statistics displayed in the dialog box.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.) Simulation Console button—Opens a dialog box showing status and error messages generated by the simulation program. Stop Run button—Stops the current simulation run. The output is saved in the output vector file that were specified for that particular simulation. statistics are saved only when the simulation completes. Resume button—Resumes a simulation after it has been paused. See Simulation Console on page ER-3-315 for details. deselect this checkbox. Save output when pausing or stopping simulation checkbox—When selected. ER-3-306 www. See Saving Simulation Output for details.if tort to your rights.3—Project Editor Discrete Event Simulation Controls The Simulation Execution and Simulation Progress dialog boxes let you control execution of the current simulation. To discard output when a simulation is stopped before completion. the controls appear on every tabbed page. causes the simulation to save all statistics collected so far each time the simulation is paused or stopped. If you resume and complete the simulation. End of Table 3-59 Saving Simulation Output To save output whenever a simulation run is stopped. Help button—Opens a help file for the dialog box. all statistics are written to the destination output vector file when you press the Pause button.) Close button—Closes the dialog box.0 . When the “Save output when pausing or stopping simulation” checkbox is selected. When unselected. (Not available in the Simulation Execution dialog box. This allows you to view results without waiting for the entire simulation to complete. (Called Stop in the Simulation Execution dialog box.please inform us. Pause button—Pauses the simulation that is currently running and optionally saves the statistics collected so far (see Saving Simulation Output for details). In the Simulation Progress dialog box.com The document is for study only. select the “Save output when pausing or stopping simulation” checkbox (this checkbox is selected by default).we will delete Modeler/Release 14.cadfamily. You can view partial results for a simulation and decide whether to continue running that simulation or stop it. the temporary results are overwritten.

please inform us.we will delete ER-3-307 . Figure 3-105 Simulation Speed Page Modeler/Release 14.0 www.cadfamily.if tort to your rights. This display appears as a pane in the Simulation Execution dialog box and as a tabbed page in the Simulation Progress dialog box.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.3—Project Editor Simulation Speed Page The Simulation Speed page displays a graph showing the current and average speeds of a simulation.com The document is for study only.

Memory Usage Page The Memory Usage page displays a graph of memory usage versus simulation time.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.cadfamily. live statistics do not use the op_vuanim program. Figure 3-106 Live Stats Page Note—Live statistics are not available for dimensioned statistics (those consisting of an array of values) or statistics whose collection mode is “all values”. ER-3-308 www. right-click on a statistic name in the Choose Statistics dialog box and select Generate Live Statistics from the pop-up menu. therefore. they are available only until the simulation’s Simulation Progress dialog box is closed.3—Project Editor Live Stats Page The Live Stats page shows a real-time graph of selected statistic values as the simulation runs.please inform us.if tort to your rights. Unlike statistic animation.com The document is for study only. To view live statistics. To do so.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.0 . you must enable collection of statistic values before running the simulation. This display appears as a pane in the Simulation Execution dialog box and as a tabbed page in the Simulation Progress dialog box.

Modeler/Release 14.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.0 www.cadfamily.if tort to your rights. Click the Help button in the Simulation Execution or Simulation Progress dialog box for details about this page.we will delete ER-3-309 .3—Project Editor Use the Memory Usage page of the detailed Configure/Run DES dialog box to enable this feature.com The document is for study only.please inform us. Figure 3-107 Memory Usage Page Note—The way memory usage is reported on the Memory Usage page depends on the setting of the mem_optimize preference.

0 . similar to that shown in Figure 3-108. • Abnormal Termination—If the simulation run terminates abnormally. This display appears as a pane in the Simulation Execution dialog box and as a tabbed page in the Simulation Progress dialog box. The op_vuerr program mentioned in the display is a supplied program that can be run from the command line.cadfamily.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. a message displays.if tort to your rights. beginning with the initialization stages and continuing with run-time simulation statistics.com The document is for study only. Memory Sources Page The Memory Sources page displays detailed information about all managed memory blocks in current use. The information is organized as a treeview of all unique function call stacks (FCSs) that have allocated currently active memory blocks. ER-3-310 www. Figure 3-108 Messages Page Two common types of messages appear here: • Successful Termination—If the simulation runs successfully to its conclusion. a message displays.please inform us.3—Project Editor Messages Page The Messages page displays messages that show the progress of a simulation. The op_admin subdirectory mentioned in the error message is located in the user’s home directory.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.

if tort to your rights.cadfamily. Modeler/Release 14. Figure 3-109 Memory Sources Page The Show Details button opens a dialog box with details about all individual memory blocks allocated by the selected FCS in the highlighted row of the Memory Sources treeview.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Figure 3-110 Memory Blocks Dialog Box Click the Help button in the Simulation Progress dialog box for more details about the Memory Sources page.we will delete ER-3-311 . Note—Memory source information is available only while the simulation is running. We recommend that you pause the simulation before examining memory usage details through this page.0 www.com The document is for study only.3—Project Editor Use the Memory Usage page of the Configure/Run DES dialog box to enable this feature and specify memory categories to be traced.please inform us.

Note—The way memory usage is reported on the Memory Stats page depends on the setting of the mem_optimize preference.if tort to your rights.3—Project Editor Memory Stats Page The Memory Stats page displays memory statistics during a simulation. Figure 3-111 Memory Stats Page Click the Help button in the Simulation Progress dialog box for more details about this page.com The document is for study only.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. ER-3-312 www.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.0 . Use the Memory Usage page of the Configure/Run DES dialog box to enable this feature and specify when data is generated.please inform us.cadfamily.

if tort to your rights. Figure 3-112 Profiling Page Click the Help button in the Simulation Progress dialog box for more details about this page. To see this display. Modeler/Release 14. you must enable collection of profiling information on the Profiling page of the Configure/Run DES dialog box and direct output to the simulation progress window.cadfamily. as shown in the following figure.com The document is for study only.please inform us.we will delete ER-3-313 .com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.0 www.3—Project Editor Profiling Page The Profiling page displays profiling information for functions used in the simulation code.

Figure 3-113 Dependencies Page Click the Help button in the Simulation Progress dialog box for more details about this page.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. In addition. ER-3-314 www.please inform us.if tort to your rights.com The document is for study only.cadfamily.0 . it lets you package all or a subset of these files in a component file archive.3—Project Editor Dependencies Page The Dependencies page shows a list of files that were accessed using OPNET APIs during the discrete event simulation. See Component File Archive on page ER-3-323 for details.

if tort to your rights.cadfamily.please inform us. and error messages generated by the simulation program. These parameters include the command used to run the simulation program (usually op_runsim) and the content of the special environment file generated for the simulation. simulation progress. To view the Simulation Console.we will delete ER-3-315 . This environment file contains a list of preferences based on the settings defined in the Configure/Run DES dialog box.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Figure 3-114 Invocation Page Simulation Console The Simulation Console is a text window containing status.0 www.3—Project Editor Invocation Page The Invocation page shows the invocation parameters of the current simulation. click the Open Console button in either the Simulation Execution or Simulation Progress dialog box. Figure 3-115 Simulation Console Modeler/Release 14.com The document is for study only.

and error messages generated by the simulation program. • Resume—Causes the simulation to resume execution. Simulation sets that contain multiple runs can be expanded to show each run. • Pause—Causes the simulation to pause at the end of the currently executing simulation event. ER-3-316 www.0 . It appears in place of the Simulation Progress dialog box when you run a simulation sequence that contains multiple simulation sets or simulation runs. Toggles between Pause and Resume to control simulation execution.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.please inform us.if tort to your rights. Shows the ID of the most recently completed simulation event. simulation progress.cadfamily. Shows the current simulation time. Message display Pause/Resume button Save To File button Saves the contents of the Simulation Console message display to a text file. Status display Current Time display Current Event display End of Table 3-60 DES Execution Manager The DES Execution Manager dialog box lets you monitor the status of multiple simulations.3—Project Editor Table 3-60 Control Simulation Console Controls Description Displays status.com The document is for study only. Figure 3-116 DES Execution Manager The left pane of the DES Execution Manager contains a treeview that lists the simulation sets and runs that will be executed. Shows the status of the simulation. The right-hand pane shows the status of each simulation as it is executed.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.

• At the first checkpoint in a simulation run.if tort to your rights. the simulation runs exactly as if it had not been checkpointed (same number of events. After restart. or the entire sequence. For example: • During development.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. You can find additional details about this implementation at http://ftg. same results. • Appropriate licenses are needed to restart a simulation. This feature can save time in several situations.3—Project Editor You can open a Simulation Progress dialog box for any running or completed simulation by selecting it and clicking the View Details button (see Simulation Progress Dialog Box on page ER-3-303). Note the following restrictions on checkpoint/restart: • Only sequential simulations running on a single Linux computer are supported. Checkpoints The checkpoint feature gives Linux users the ability to save the state of a discrete event simulation at a specific point and later restart the simulation from that point. You can then run as many production simulations as needed without waiting for initialization each time. the checkpoints from previous runs are deleted. • All simulation files must be opened and closed using OPNET APIs. simulations with a lengthy initialization phase can be checkpointed at time 0.lbl. working part of the simulation. and so on). The checkpoint feature is based on Berkeley Lab Checkpoint/Restart (BLCR).please inform us. Modeler/Release 14. a set.gov/CheckpointRestart/CheckpointRestart. developed by the Future Technologies Group at Berkeley Lab Computing Sciences. lengthy simulations that crash late in the run can be checkpointed shortly before the crash. not fopen() or fclose(). Click the Help button in the DES Execution Manager for more details about the controls in this dialog box. Other buttons in the DES Execution Manager let you pause and resume a running simulation or stop a run.we will delete ER-3-317 .0 www.cadfamily. You then can restart the simulation as often as needed to locate the problem without having to re-run the initial. • Memory paging is disabled automatically when checkpointing is turned on. The only difference in a checkpointed simulation is some slow-down while checkpoints are taken.shtml. • During production.com The document is for study only. after the initialization is complete.

o Note—You must reload the kernel modules after any reboot.2.gz cd blcr-0.0 .com The document is for study only.lbl. Procedure 3-139 Installing BLCR Software 1 Download BLCR version 0.gz) from the BLCR website at http://ftg./configure make make install 2.lbl.if tort to your rights. End of Procedure 3-139 Checkpointing a Simulation To checkpoint a simulation. enable checkpointing on the Checkpoint page of the Configure/Run DES dialog box and configure the feature as desired.shtml.tar.cadfamily. the BLCR software must be installed on the computer running Modeler.html.4.gov/blcr/doc/html/BLCR_Admin_Guide. as follows.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.o # /sbin/insmod /usr/local/lib/blcr/<kernel_version>/ blcr.4.gov/CheckpointRestart/CheckpointDownloads.o # /sbin/insmod /usr/local/lib/blcr/<kernel_version>/ blcr_vmadump.tar.2 (blcr-0. Options include the following: • Periodic checkpoints — At event n — Every n events — At simulation time n (before entering time) — At simulation time n (leaving time) — Every n simulation seconds (before entering time) — Every n simulation seconds (leaving time) — On low memory ER-3-318 www.please inform us.4.2.2 su root .2 Load the kernel modules: # /sbin/insmod /usr/local/lib/blcr/<kernel_version>/ blcr_imports.4. The basic steps are as follows: 2.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.3—Project Editor Preparing to Use Checkpoints Before using the checkpoint feature.1 Install the software: % % % # # # tar zxvf blcr-0. 2 Install BLCR on your computer using the instructions given at http://mantis.

please inform us. • des. then click OK. terminates the simulation after taking a checkpoint.we will delete ER-3-319 . To do so.cadfamily.continue—When FALSE.autogen—Specifies when periodic checkpoints should be taken. Set to 0 to keep all.checkpoint. • des.checkpoint.lowmem—When TRUE. enter a new random seed. 3 If desired.checkpoint.checkpoint.3—Project Editor • Number of checkpoints to keep • Stop or continue the simulation after taking a checkpoint You can use checkpoints when running a simulation from the command line. Restarting a Simulation You can restart a checkpointed simulation from the GUI or the command line.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. 2 Select the desired checkpoint from the list of checkpoints for the current scenario and click OK.checkpoint. specifies that detailed checkpoint messages should be generated.enabled—Set to TRUE to enable checkpointing. • des. enter: op_sim_restart <checkpoint_directory> where <checkpoint_directory> is of the form Modeler/Release 14.verbose—When TRUE. specifies that a checkpoint should be taken when a memory allocation fails. End of Procedure 3-140 Procedure 3-141 Restarting from the Command Line 1 At a command prompt. • des. use the following preferences: • des. You can programmatically force a checkpoint to be taken with op_sim_checkpoint(). • des. Procedure 3-140 Restarting from the GUI 1 Choose DES > Restart Discrete Event Simulation.com The document is for study only.0 www.keep_last—Specifies how many checkpoints to keep.checkpoint.if tort to your rights.

we will delete Modeler/Release 14. For example.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.cadfamily.i1. all computers (local and remote) must be able to access the environment database in the specified location and also must be able to access all paths in the mod_dirs preference (which is specified in the environment database). Modeler uses it to start another one. if the env_db preference is specified on the command line. Thus. • There are several preferences which. ER-3-320 www. Simulation progress is reported in the DES Execution Manager dialog box (see DES Execution Manager on page ER-3-316). opnet_dir.dir End of Procedure 3-141 Distributed Simulation Distributed simulation lets you run multiple discrete event simulations at the same time on one or more computers (or multiple processors in the same computer). These preferences are env_db. As each processor finishes a simulation. You can use distributed simulation for several purposes. Modeler tries to start the specified number of simulations on each specified computer. and license_port. This process continues until all simulations have been run. both local and remote computers must be configured to deal with these preferences and their effects.0 . This means that. are passed to op_des_server on the remote computers.3—Project Editor <project>-<scenario>-c<#>. in this case. Requirements and Limitations for Distributed Simulations Consider these issues when running a distributed simulation: • Modeler and op_des_server can use different environment databases. if specified on the command line when launching Modeler.if tort to your rights. If the env_db preference is not specified on the command line when launching Modeler. opnet_user_home. license_server. The only restriction is that the model directory (containing the network and associated models to be simulated) must be in a shared location (to ensure that simulation results are available to the GUI) and must be specified in the mod_dirs preference on all computers (local and remote).desckpt. such as: • Performing parametric studies more quickly by executing multiple simulations concurrently • Using a powerful remote computer to run simulations that need more memory or processing power than are available on your local computer When running a simulation with distributed simulation enabled. the core directories and model installation directories must be identical on all computers.please inform us. the software and models can be installed in different locations on the local and remote computers.com The document is for study only.

set the following preference values: • Set des. • Distributed simulations can be run across platforms (for example. • Set des.com The document is for study only. 2 On every remote computer in the server host list: • Run op_des_server.if tort to your rights.distributed_server_port_default and des. 3 On every computer in the server host list: Modeler/Release 14. each CPU requires licenses for these products as well. Modeler on Windows and op_des_server on Linux) provided that both platforms have the same endian-ness.0 www.ov) files produced by the simulation are created in the shared model directory. Note—You must restart this program after a computer is rebooted. If desired. Procedure 3-142 Running Distributed Simulations Note—Modeler (or another OPNET product that supports discrete event simulation) must be installed on every computer used for distributed simulation.distributed_server_host_info to a list of the computers available to run distributed simulations. 1 On the local computer. set the des. This program is located in the <reldir>/sys/<arch>/bin directory. Running Distributed Simulations Use this procedure to execute a discrete event simulation with multiple runs on two or more processors in the same or different computers. therefore. also specify the port and number of concurrent runs for each server. The output (. Cross-platform distributed simulations involving Solaris are not supported.cadfamily.distributed_server_num_runs_default preferences. two on wtn11166 and one (the default number) on wtn12120. • Distributed simulation requires either a simulation site license or one simulation runtime license for each CPU. • Optionally. If the simulation uses licensed modules or specialized models. Example: wtn11166:7012:2.please inform us.we will delete ER-3-321 .3—Project Editor • The directory containing the model being simulated must be shared by the local and remote computers.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. • Distributed simulation is intended to speed up production runs.distributed_mode to TRUE. debugging with ODB is disabled. wtn12120 The preceding specification lets up to three simulations run concurrently. wtn11166 is contacted on port 7012.

Note—The directory containing the model being simulated must be shared by all computers running a distributed simulation.distributed_server_host_info string list “” ER-3-322 www. for example.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.we will delete Modeler/Release 14. Allow Simulation Runs on Multiple Hosts Specifies whether discrete event simulations are run consecutively on the local computer or concurrently on one or more processors.if tort to your rights. Modeler launches simulations on each specified computer in the listed order. Computers are specified by triplets with the format <name>:<port>:<num_runs>. The port and number of concurrent runs can be omitted. This preference has no effect unless des. in which case Modeler uses the default values specified by the des. End of Procedure 3-142 Preferences for Distributed Simulation The distributed simulation feature uses these preferences. configure and run the simulation. distributed simulation is enabled and simulations are run concurrently on the computers listed in the des.distributed_server_host_info preference.distributed_server_port_default and des. Tag Type Default Value des.3—Project Editor • Set the mod_dirs preference to include the directory on the local computer that contains the project being simulated.distributed_server_num_runs_default preferences.please inform us. “wtn1234:7012:2”. Tag Type Default Value des.cadfamily.distributed_mode is set to TRUE. When TRUE. 4 On the local computer.0 .distributed_mode boolean FALSE Distributed Simulation Hosts Specifies a list of computers on which to run distributed simulations.com The document is for study only.

h) files.if tort to your rights.com The document is for study only.distributed_mode is set to TRUE. This preference has no effect unless des. Optionally. You can run more. This is a compressed package containing all of the files accessed during a simulation run. the number of concurrent simulations to run on a computer should not exceed the number of processors available on that computer. Tag Type Default Value des. select Runtime Displays: Other Displays in the treeview.3—Project Editor Distributed Simulation Host Port Number Specifies the port number to use when connecting to the DES server process on a target computer if the number is not specified in the des. terrain files. Modeler provides a means of doing this easily via a component file archive. Modeler/Release 14. see Configuring a Simulation on page ER-3-290). and any files accessed directly by a model (bypassing kernel APIs).) Note—File types not directly accessed during a simulation are not included in the component file archive.we will delete ER-3-323 . see Create Project File Archive… on page ER-2-21.cadfamily. Ideally.distributed_server_host_info preference. but performance will suffer.distributed_server_host_info preference.distributed_server_port_default integer 7007 Distributed Simulation Runs per Host Specifies the maximum number of concurrent simulations to run on a target computer if the number is not specified in the des. you can exclude certain types of files from the archive.distributed_mode is set to TRUE.distributed_server_num_runs_default integer 1 Component File Archive At times. 2 In the detailed Configure/Run DES dialog box. you might need to collect all of the files used by a simulation and send them to a colleague or to Technical Support. This preference has no effect unless des.please inform us.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. Tag Type Default Value des.0 www. (For a similar operation. Such file types include header (. Procedure 3-143 Creating a Component File Archive 1 Prepare to run the simulation for which you want to create a component file archive (if necessary.

if tort to your rights.cadfamily. 4 Run the simulation.please inform us. use the checkboxes on the Dependencies page to exclude any file types you don’t want in the component file archive: • Exclude object files • Exclude Standard Models (this option excludes only those models in the standard models directory: <reldir>/models/std) • Exclude repositories • Exclude sources ER-3-324 www.0 .we will delete Modeler/Release 14.com The document is for study only.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.3—Project Editor 3 Select the “Generate list of component file dependencies” checkbox. ➥ During the simulation. 5 When the simulation is complete. a list of accessed files is displayed in the Dependencies page of the Simulation Progress dialog box.

and destroyed during a simulation. 3 Locate the destination directory for the project files.0 www. Note—To use the project files in a simulation. This feature collects information on the number of packets created.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. ➥ The component file archive is saved. and module. End of Procedure 3-143 Use the following procedure to expand the files from a file archive. then click Select. click Save.opcfa extension is added to the specified file name.cadfamily. letting you quickly get a sense of whether a simulation is performing as expected. node. ➥ All files from the project file archive are unpacked to the specified directory.3—Project Editor 6 Click the Package… button to create an archive of the listed files. A . 7 After specifying the name and save location. allowing you to specify the name and location for saving the file. copied. End of Procedure 3-144 Global Packet Statistics Global packet statistics provide a “high-level” view of simulation behavior. The collected statistics are saved in an output table file with a name of the form <project_name>-<scenario_name>-DES-<run_number>.we will delete ER-3-325 . Procedure 3-144 Expanding Files from an Archive 1 Choose File > Manage Model Files > Expand Project File Archive. To avoid conflicts with existing files. then click Select. Modeler/Release 14.if tort to your rights.com The document is for study only.ot. 2 Locate and select the project file archive. ➥ A file browser window opens. These numbers are broken down by packet format. make the destination directory the first directory listed.please inform us. You can use this information as a first step in debugging a model. make sure that the destination directory is listed in your mod_dirs preference.

we will delete Modeler/Release 14. 3 Go to the Outputs > Global Packet Statistics page.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only. or unselect the checkbox to disable collection.0 . 2 Open the Configure/Run DES dialog box (choose DES > Configure/Run Discrete Event Simulation… or click the Configure/Run DES tool button). Collection is enabled by default in new simulations.if tort to your rights. the content of “copied” packets is shared unless changes are needed. 4 Select the “Packet info” checkbox to enable collection of global packet statistics. Use the following procedure to disable or enable collection of global packet statistics. as well as those that would have been copied or destroyed if the packet sharing optimization was disabled. the packet statistics include all packets that were copied or destroyed.3—Project Editor Figure 3-117 Packet Statistics in Results Browser Note—When the sim_packet_sharing (Packet Data Sharing Mode) preference is set to conservative or full.cadfamily. ER-3-326 www. Collecting Global Packet Statistics Global packet statistics can be collected when running a discrete event simulation using a sequential development kernel.please inform us. Procedure 3-145 Controlling Collection of Global Packet Statistics 1 Open the scenario for which you want to collect global packet statistics. Regardless of this preference.

When you click on the Preview table or the Show button. Modeler/Release 14. • click on any blue text to open a report that shows an additional breakdown for that row—packet counts for all modules in the node (for node-centric tables) or all nodes containing the module (for module-centric tables). Global Tables present the packet statistics for each node or module.if tort to your rights.3—Project Editor 5 Complete any other needed configuration.please inform us.0 www. In the report. or object. for example. then run the simulation.com The document is for study only. “DES Run (<run_number>) Tables”. you can • click on a red node name to select and show that node in the workspace. the table opens in a separate report dialog box.we will delete ER-3-327 . broken down by packet format.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail. End of Procedure 3-145 Viewing Global Packet Statistics Global packet statistics are viewed in the Results Browser on a tabbed page corresponding to the output file name. packet format. Object Tables present the packet statistics by module. On that page.cadfamily. the treeview node “Report: Packet Info” presents global packet statistics in two ways: in Global Tables and in Object Tables.

com The document is for study only.0 .com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.we will delete Modeler/Release 14.please inform us.3—Project Editor ER-3-328 www.cadfamily.if tort to your rights.